JP7722883B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows games to be played.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can be operated, and can perform movable body effects by moving the movable bodies while variable symbol displays are being performed.

Some gaming machines of this type are capable of executing an initial operation (long initial operation) that causes the moving body to operate in the same way as the performance operation when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, or an initial operation (short initial operation) that causes the moving body to operate by omitting some of the performance operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Additionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, manage various random numbers using hardware random numbers and software random numbers (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-113217 Patent No. 6124313

However, there was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body and
A game control means;
A variable means;
A display performance control means;
A performance control means;
a movable body control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action prompting performance is notified.
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of variable display before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control is performed using the second movable control pattern during the execution of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control ends before the start of the second part,
the display control means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display when the power is turned on,
the movable body control means is capable of starting the confirmation operation control after the start-up preparation display has started to be displayed,
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the movable body performance is restricted during the confirmation operation control to display the effect display,
The game control means is capable of performing a round game multiple times in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means is set to an easy-entry state in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
The game machine further includes an ending performance execution means for executing an ending performance after the final round of games is completed,
The movable body control means
If no power outage occurs during the execution of the ending performance, the movable body performance is not performed during the execution of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs during the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control ends before the execution period of the ending performance ends.
It is characterized by:

The present invention may have only the invention-specific features set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have the invention-specific features set forth in the claims of the present invention as well as features other than those features. Such a configuration enables appropriate updating of random numbers, thereby enhancing marketability.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display result designation command, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state background designation command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small jackpot type determination table. An explanatory diagram of the types of jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing an example of small win end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an origin placement control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the performance position. 1A shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame-mounted movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position. A diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. (A) is a diagram showing the effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state. A diagram showing an example of the operation of the pre-reading movable object announcement. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the start notice operation. A diagram showing an example of the operation of movable object preview and pseudo consecutive preview. A figure showing an example of the reach warning and button warning operations. A figure showing an example of the operation of SP reach notice. A diagram showing an example of the operation of a jackpot presentation. A figure showing an example of the operation of a jackpot effect (promotion effect). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of state transition operation control. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. 1A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a movable body, and FIG. 1B is a diagram illustrating the manner in which a lamp and sound are emitted in response to the operation of the movable body. 10A to 10J are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. This is a timing chart for when a moving body preview is performed after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for when a movable body preview is performed after initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice after initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting the look-ahead movable body advance notice during the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and variable 2 display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs after the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart showing a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation, and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as an initial operation. As a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position, and as a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position. This is a timing chart of a movable body preview when the movable body stops on its way from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation due to a cold start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart of a demonstration effect when a movable body stops midway from the origin position to the effect position during initial operation. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a jackpot fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare performance. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of one round of play. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A diagram showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control as a modified example when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the start of a round of play in which a promotion effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is initiated based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial operation performed during a cold start. 10A and 10B are timing charts showing an initial operation by a cold start and a timing chart showing an initial operation by a hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A to 10D are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation check control during cold start processing as a modified example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when an error occurs in the operation confirmation control. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a random number for gaming. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process for game control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a special pattern process jump table. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process for performance control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control microcomputer. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address map. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of main setting of addresses included in a function setting register area. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of main setting of addresses included in a function control register area. A diagram for explaining an example of settings for gaming random numbers. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a random number update period. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power supply start response process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a function setting register stored value table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of an RWM access protection register. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-off process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number update process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial value change random number update process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial value determination random number update process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port switch passing process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol information setting process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot information data selection process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. This is a flowchart showing an example of a winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process. This is a flowchart showing an example of a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern type table when a winning combination is lost. A diagram for explaining an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern type allocation table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a gate switch passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of normal processing for normal symbols. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of use of a data configuration.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part where a movable body announcement can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the movement of the on-board movable body 32A),
The sound output means can output a movable body effect sound corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 49, the part where effect sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, which performs the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed at the time of power-on with initialization, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the output of the performance movable control and the movable body performance sound is limited, while the display of the effect display is performed, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG1 When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in Figure 61, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the performance movable control is limited when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, the performance movable control, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, When a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as shown in Figure 65, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable object 32A, the below-board movable object 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable object 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction are executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed using a variable display that is started during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate to the player that a movable body presentation has been executed by outputting an effect display or movable body presentation sound, while preventing the presentation movable control from interfering with the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is
When the movable body performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, when the movable body notice is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the movable body notice is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed, while the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, In this case, when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of a movable body prediction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body prediction are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again, but the output of a movable body prediction sound in response to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed.
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, When a start winning occurs, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by limiting the control of the movable body presentation, which has a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
When power is turned on, the movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control to move the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally (for example, a part of the performance control CPU 120 that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 ).
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial movements of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 are the last to end upon completion of the initial movement of the under-board movable body 32B).
The movable body effect is an effect using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable body notice is a part that operates the on-board movable body 32A),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the effect movement control is limited when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, and the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame-up movable body 32A, the frame-up movable body 32B, the frame-up movable body 32B, the frame-up movable body 32B, the frame-up movable body 32C, the frame-up movable body 32D, the frame-up movable body 32D, the frame-up movable body 32D, the frame-up movable body 32E, the frame-up movable body 32F ... If a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movable control is completed, the performance movable control using the first movable body is executed, so that it is not possible to distinguish between the confirmation movable control and the performance movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on accompanied by initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and an initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movable control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation period of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101).
After the execution period of the confirmation movable control has ended, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that was started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the effect movable control and the display of the effect display are performed, but the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not lit in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization response notification, if the confirmation movement control has ended, the performance movement control is executed, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be executed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading movable body notice),
When the predictive movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A to be a part that can move up and down multiple times between an origin position and an intermediate position as a predictive movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special chart change time of the non-reach miss variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the period of the initial operation is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, if the start condition is met multiple times during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the predictive movable body performance is executed in a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition, when the predictive movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited,
When the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body effect is executed during the specified period ends, the specific movable body control limited to the specified period will not be executed after the end of the specified period (for example, as shown in Figure 68, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and the execution of the pre-reading movable body announcement is decided due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the period of initial operation control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement, and after the end of the variable display, the presentation operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the pre-reading movable body announcement is not executed again).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the restricted specific movable control is not executed during the confirmation movable control, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not confuse the player by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movable control ends.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing, in one variable display, as the movable body presentation, a first movable body presentation (for example, the first movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69) and a second movable body presentation (for example, the second movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body presentation,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control (for example, a part where the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation,
When the second movable body performance is executed, a second performance movement control (for example, a part that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times) that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action can be performed.
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the restricted first performance movable control is performed, the first performance movable control is not performed and the second performance movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is executed after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, but if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview has already been executed before the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview continues to be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the second movable body by a special operation to notify that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a decisive effect of raising the under-board movable body 32B),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
It is possible to perform special light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the special effect movement control, emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E5), the effect control CPU 120 controls the under-board movable body 9e to emit a predetermined light color (for example, a portion that emits light in a rainbow flash as shown in FIG. 56 (B9)) when the under-board movable body 32B rises),
When the special effect movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the deciding effect is reached during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, a part that limits the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a manner corresponding to the deciding effect during the execution period of the deciding effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The operation mode of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the second movable body by the special performance movable control are common (for example, the initial operation and performance operation of the under-board movable body 32B are both operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) and FIG. 61, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial highlight mode (flashing red)),
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) , the effect control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to flash in rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B advances, and causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in smooth rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B moves in a contrasting motion).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-board movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B as shown in Figures 61 and 62).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in Figure 61, during the execution of the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the above-board movable body LED 9d is made to emit light in an initial highlighting mode, and the below-board movable body LED 9e is made to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, from the timing when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start winning occurs, the initial operation of each movable body is executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display ends and the game is put into a standby state, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, from the start timing of the customer waiting demo effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and if the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the game is put into the standby state, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, a part that gives priority to the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body over the movement of each movable body to its origin position);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-12 is
The performance control means can execute the movable body performance multiple times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the part where the first variable display notice and the second variable display notice are executed during one variable display),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, if a variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if a first movable body announcement is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed).
When one of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to that one movable body performance does not end normally, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 71, even if the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body preview begins, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can attempt a retry using the performance movable control corresponding to the next movable body performance even if the performance movable control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body announcement) and a second movable body performance (e.g., a second movable body announcement) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform first performance movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body notice),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body notice),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is restricted during the predetermined period is executed (for example, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is executed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
When the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
a first detection means (e.g., origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at an initial position;
Further provided is a second detection means (e.g., performance position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned at the advanced position,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is placed at the initial position, and for moving the movable body toward the initial position when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that moves the movable body toward the origin position when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The performance movement control is a control that moves the movable body toward the advance position over a second period, and stops the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advance position during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed during play, even if the movement of the movable body corresponding to the movable body presentation is not performed normally, the movement of the movable body based on the confirmation movement control is not performed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of a movable body presentation that was not performed normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly performs the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)).
When the error movement control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, in the movable body performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output corresponding to the movable body announcement from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The performance control means can perform demo display control to display a demonstration display on the display means when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 76 , a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5).
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable bodies so that the confirmation movable control ends before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 76 to 78, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after a power outage, the initial operation control of each movable body is executed and then the customer waiting demo performance is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control for a predetermined period of time (for example, the performance control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means can perform the demo display control after a period at least as long as the predetermined period has elapsed since the confirmation movement control was completed (for example, a part in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the initial movement of each movable body is completed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the demonstration display is not displayed immediately after the confirmation movable control, thereby preventing the visibility of the demonstration display from being hindered.

The gaming machine of type 2-3 is
The effect control means can perform the demo display control at different timings when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means
The confirmation movement control can be performed in common when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means;
When power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, in the case where the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is performed differs between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is performed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization.

The gaming machine of type 2-4 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light by the specific light emission control is restricted so as not to have a brightness based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) , when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of type 2-5 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means can display a changeable display indicating that the brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 , a portion of the image display device 5 where a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is limited during the predetermined period, and the changeable display is displayed after the predetermined period has ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 , the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body, and the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movable control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which attention to the confirmation movable control is not lost.

The gaming machine of type 2-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B).
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A is performed, the below-board movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in an initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 2-7 is
The performance control means
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed during the demonstration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion capable of executing an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the effect position during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, the part where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a demo-in-motion control that moves the movable body in a motion manner common to the motion manner of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation motion control (for example, a part that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position).
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the demonstration display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The fanfare performance is as follows:
An introductory part (for example, an introductory part. See FIG. 52 (F2) to (F6)) that notifies the user of the advantageous state;
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hit notification part. See Figure 52 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right hit notification part) involving the operation of the on-board movable body 32A starts. See FIG. 80).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
There are several types of advantageous states (for example, jackpots A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (for example, a jackpot type display 132SG421) corresponding to the advantageous state being controlled, and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (for example, an introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the advantageous state name display is displayed (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 52 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to know which advantageous state the game will be controlled to, even if confirmation movable control is performed during the fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance by the confirmation movement control,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance by using specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control.

The gaming machine of type 3-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, fanfare light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emission control means causes the light emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light emission control when the first movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control, while causing the light emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of type 3-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the fanfare effect is executed, light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control to make the light emitting means emit light at a second luminance in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first luminance in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect, during the movement confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
the movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of type 3-7 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the effect operation control can emit light in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position. See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the launch direction notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, and outputs sound corresponding to the launch direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movable control (for example, in the movable body effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the right hit notification part, which is different from the initial highlight mode (white lighting), and sound output is limited when the movable body moves by the initial operation, and in the movable body effect executed in the right hit notification part, sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is
Further provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The performance control means
In the launch direction notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 52 (F7)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special action,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When the confirmation movement control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, when a movable body performance is executed in the right-hit notification part in a fanfare performance, the movable body is moved by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and if the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over the specific period, it can be determined that an action error has occurred and the action confirmation control can be performed again, and when the action confirmation control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted, while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance) that moves the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started by the effect control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control ends before the end of the execution period of the fanfare effect (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started and the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round effect corresponding to the round game starts. See FIG. 81).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare.Furthermore, if the power is cut off at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare effect, thereby providing a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the restoration display),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the moving body that moves through the performance movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 4-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a fanfare performance was in progress before the power was cut off.

The gaming machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control is completed before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to complete the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 82).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
The effect control means can display, in a round of play after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a round-time light-emitting control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is illuminated with a lamp pattern corresponding to the round of play by the confirmation movement control.
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during the jackpot. See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control even during a round of play through specific light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round, causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emitting control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the in-round light emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during a jackpot),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-6 is
The light emission control means
In a round game after the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform a round light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the light emission control during the round.
The light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on thereafter, has lower brightness than the light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) in a round game in which the pachinko game machine 1 has not started up with a hot start after a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, may be lower brightness than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machines of types 5-7 are:
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means is capable of setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power cut occurs at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control when a power cut occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends; see FIG. 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off as soon as the variable means enters an easy-to-enter state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to the open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, over the period from when the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state until when the variable means is controlled to enter an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off) see FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during the power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during control of the variable means to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode (light off) corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during the jackpot). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the player that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a round of play was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the easy-entry state in the next round of play (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (see FIG. 52 (F10)). See FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated before the end of the next round of play, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing the round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the next round of play that is started when the first round of play is completed, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game medium in the specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in the special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-4 is
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the variable means in one round of play to be in the impossible-entry state, and then moves the movable body by the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 7-5 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat movement period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) is performed to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance or a promotion performance) is performed to move the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as control is made to the no-entry state in one round of play and power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the no-entry state ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)). See Figure 87).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the variable means becomes unable to enter during one round of play, the power is cut off at the same time, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on;
The light-emitting control means is capable of performing light-emitting control during recovery, in which the light-emitting means emits light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and when the power is subsequently turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off). See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 8-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the case where the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and a power outage occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 8-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the one round of play, when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, a power outage occurs at the same time, and when the power is turned on after the power outage, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the interval effect (for example, the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 8-6 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-7 is
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, a movable body effect using the under-board movable body 32B can be executed as a promotion effect in the result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform effect operation control in an operation mode common to the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates by the operation confirmation control, and a part in which sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control, and a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 8-8 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body effect (see FIG. 53 (F24)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
In the one round game in which the interval performance is executed, a power outage occurs immediately before the control is made to the inaccessible state, and thereafter, when the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body presentation is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special presentation movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined to be an operation error and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in one round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation, and if the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation may be restricted, while the effect display may be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance operation period) in the effect operation control (for example, in the case of successful promotion in a promotion effect), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat operation period). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a promotion effect) that notifies which of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is in a specific round of play,
The notification performance is
An introduction part (see, for example, Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see, for example, (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
If the first advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
If the second advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play starts. See FIG. 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the specific round of play, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen), and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) relating to the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
Light emitting means;
light emission control means;
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an alarm performance by using specific light emission control and notification light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 9-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission control means causes the light emission means of the movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moving due to the movement confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light emission) instead of a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-6 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The notification light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the notification light emission control that is performed when no power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play (for example, during the second round interval period or the third round of play, the operation confirmation control is started, and the initially operating movable bodies, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (promotion performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-7 is
The effect control means is capable of executing an action prompting effect that prompts the player to take an action during the execution period of the notification effect (see FIG. 53 (F23)),
The action prompting performance is executed in the introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the introduction part starts (for example, the operation prompt part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, i.e., the part where the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion effect in the introductory part is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means can execute a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)),
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, when performing an initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performing an effect operation in a promotion effect, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-9 is
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body effect using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that moves by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game, and the confirmation movable control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined that an operation error has occurred and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which a promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and if the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance can be restricted, while the effect display can be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means can execute an ending effect after the final round of play has ended (see FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14)),
The ending performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 52 (F12) and Figure 53 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part. See FIG. 52 (F13), FIG. 53 (F32), (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies about the special state that is controlled after the advantageous state;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) of Figure 53) in which information on the time-shortened state is notified in the ending period; see Figure 90).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special status notification part in the ending performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an ending performance by using specific light emission control and ending light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting control means causes the light-emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light-emitting control, while causing the light-emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the ending light-emitting control (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that are performing the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during the ending presentation.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the ending performance is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the ending light emitting control.
The ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the ending presentation (for example, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g that perform the initial operation emit light at low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending presentation (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
the effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after the final round of play is completed;
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) of Figure 53) in which information regarding the time-shortened state is notified; see Figure 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the load on the gaming machine by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, cuts off the power at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and ends the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending performance (allowing the player to enjoy the high base state without worrying about the moving body operating due to the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off) see FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending presentation (for example, the mode (light off) corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending presentation (ending introduction). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending presentation was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol),
the normal state is a state in which the variable display of the first identification information is easily executed,
the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information about the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means,
During the special state, the second display area of the display means can display hold information (for example, the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002) related to the variable display of the second identification information,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display area with respect to the second display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). See FIG. 92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
The information relating to the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to a movable body operating through confirmation movable control, is not hindered as much as information regarding an advantageous state, which does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the second display area (for example, the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454 due to the initial operation is larger than the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second pending memory number and the second pending display area 132SG012 of the second pending display 132SG002 due to the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part (for example, a result notification part of (D6) and (D7) of FIG. 50) that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action prompting performance;
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the second part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding a variation in which a button notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 94).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promotion performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates button advance notice execution, etc.) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the action prompting effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then power is turned on (for example, when a variation pattern designation command designating a specific variation pattern (with button advance notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the means may interrupt the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation having an operation period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (for example, 5 seconds, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of executing a start effect (for example, a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The start performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 48 (B2) to (B6)),
A result notification part (see (B3a) to (B6a) of FIG. 48) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a start notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start-up performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a notice at the start of a game) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the start effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and the power is then turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part is started as a result of the start-time notice),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a variable display of identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and after temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification information, is capable of executing a variable display notification effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) that notifies that the variable display of the identification information will be executed again;
The reconfigurable display notification performance is
An introductory part (see (C3) to (C5) of FIG. 49) informing whether or not the re-variable display of the identification information is to be executed;
A result notification part (see (C6), (C10), and (C9) of FIG. 49) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display of identification information based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 96).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) to the effect control means,
The presentation control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification presentation (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo-consecutive preview is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to launch the game medium toward the first game area (e.g., the left game area),
The special state is a state designed to launch the gaming medium toward the second gaming area (e.g., the right gaming area),
The display means, in the normal state, is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, and then the machine is started up by hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the part is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 97 and 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on,
When the recovery display is displayed, it is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left hit promotion display 132SG530),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the direction in which gaming media are released even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is limited,
When the confirmation movement control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is restricted, and when the operation confirmation control is performed based on starting up by hot start after a power outage occurs, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an appropriate first game area promotion notification that takes into account the situation when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a gaming medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a passing gate 41) provided on the second gaming area side, the first gaming area promotion notification (for example, a left-hit promotion display 132SG530) can be performed.
In the normal state, a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification can be made based on the entry of a specific number of game media into the predetermined area,
The confirmation movement control makes it possible to issue the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is movable (for example, in the normal state, it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (for example, 5 balls) into the gate switch 21, and it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is operating (for example, 20 seconds) through the operation confirmation control).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movable control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the round game and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, in the predetermined display area, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, a ball number display 132SG453, a consecutive number of games/total number of balls displayed display 132SG454, etc.),
When either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state and then the power is started by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the predetermined area (see Figure 83 (A)) in which information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed; see Figures 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves due to confirmation movement control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means
If a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510).
As the restoration in progress display, it is possible to display text information indicating that restoration is in progress in a predetermined display area,
Along with the recovery display, it is possible to display a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the gaming medium in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round of play in a jackpot game state and the initial operation is performed when the game is started up by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A does not overlap the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. See Figures 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves due to confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the special movable control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
the confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movement control,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that is moved by the special movable control stays in the predetermined display area for a longer period of time than the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control that is performed in that state (for example, the period of time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the performance position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control is not superimposed on the specified display area for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in determining whether or not recovery is in progress.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is then turned on, a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, a display corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the predetermined display area,
When either the display corresponding to the special state or the restoration display is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the gaming medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during variable display in a time-saving state and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 101 (B) (C)) where information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls output display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, but is not overlapped on the front side of the specific area (see Figure 101 (A)) where the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed. See Figure 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which is a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control and has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress display.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, the initial operation is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, while the initial operation at the time of power-on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time-saving state is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
a display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the display means is capable of displaying a launch direction indication display indicating a launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area in the special state, and is also capable of displaying information relating to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the information regarding the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movable control.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control to indicate the result of the variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a part that can light up a plurality of lamps constituting a special pattern in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of specific identification light-emitting control, which has a high impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the movable body that operates through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the start condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays the restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power failure is not completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
Further provided with a reservation storage means (for example, a special chart reservation storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 9) capable of storing reservation information related to variable display,
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is terminated and the variable display is started based on the hold information that was stored before the power outage, the display means displays the restoration in progress display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the portion where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The light emission control means can perform initialization-responsive light emission control to cause a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a manner corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, a portion that causes frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification manner).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the initialization-compatible light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-line 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of the initialization-compatible light-emitting control without being distracted by the movable body operating through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state that recovery is being performed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state of being in recovery).
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, background display corresponding light emission control is performed, in which the light emission control means causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a portion that causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state of being in recovery).
Thereafter, if the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), if the round of play that was executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started (when the light emitting means is emitting light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work)).

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state of being in recovery).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage ends and the next round of play is started while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B) , when the round of play that was executed before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32).
The game control means
When the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), an opening control is executed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period),
When a power outage occurs when the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the normal variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power outage occurs when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol win, a portion controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (e.g., startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the normal variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means, which is in the easy-to-enter state due to the special control, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, which is in the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
When a power outage occurs during the variable display of normal identification information, resulting in a predetermined display result, and the power is then turned on (for example, when the variable display of normal symbols has been executed before the power outage occurred and the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in a hot start mode),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 31 and 32).
The game control means
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-entry state in which the game medium is easy to enter (for example, a part that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When a power interruption occurs while the variable means is in the easy-entry state, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power interruption occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a portion controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by a hot start).
The display means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, the startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and control is being performed, and then the power is turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, the restoration in progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in FIG. 8, a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to control the variable means to the easy-entry state and control the variable means to the non-entry state (for example, a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to an open state and a part that controls it to a closed state in a round game).
When the power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in one round of play ends and control is performed to make the variable means in the next round of play unable to enter while the start-up preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the round of play ends and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The display means
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, a cold start process), an initialization display (for example, an initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed can be displayed.
When power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
Thereafter, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control is completed, the display of the initialization display is terminated (see FIGS. 109 and 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not prevent confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has been completed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed (for example, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the power is turned on to initialize the machine, confirmation movement control is immediately performed, so that the display of the initialization display does not become visibly observable.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period;
Even if the start condition is met while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period ends, and even if a start winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform the operation check control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that starts based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display continues to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup by hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 is not displayed, and the background display is performed based on the game status background designation command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B),
A second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is closer when the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position than when the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position (see Figure 111).
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
The confirmation movement control is a control in which the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the movement confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial movement periods overlap (see FIG. 111(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that their respective initial movement periods do not overlap (see FIG. 111(C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can operate normally in the advanced position and that the second movable body can operate normally in the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the movement of the first movable body from the advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, to be confirmed individually.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movement control means is capable of performing a performance movement control in which the first movable body is moved from an initial position to an advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to an advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and thereafter the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance movement in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the movement confirmation control, an initial movement is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance movement described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are moved forward separately)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is disposed at the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advance position by the detection means (for example, a part that causes the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the on-board movable body 32A) arranged at the performance position in the movement confirmation control toward the origin position to be performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to the initial position when the movable body is not positioned at the initial position when the power is turned on (for example, before the long initial operation control is started, when the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, is not positioned at the origin position, return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B),
A second movable body (for example, a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101),
a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, a game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in a game frame (for example, an opening and closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
As the confirmation movement control, an operation is performed to move the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is operating normally (for example, while the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position; see Figures 57 (G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the first movable body being placed in the advance position during confirmation movable control indicates that the confirmation movable control has not ended, and the operation of the second movable body is started when the first movable body is placed in the advance position, so that the confirmation movable control of the second movable body is not overlooked.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in an initial position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 1 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment refers to the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in a flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, serving as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device. A door frame 3a with a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable about its left side. The door frame 3a is configured to open and close the gaming area, and the gaming area can be seen through the glass window when the door frame 3a is closed.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." The special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols may be of one type. The special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). When the variable display is stopped, the CPU 103 can light up these multiple lamps in a combination that corresponds to the variable display result.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, includes a device with a movable piece that can move back and forth. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable piece is retracted from the game board surface to a retracted position, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B has a movable piece that protrudes forward from the game board surface to a protruding position, allowing game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-mentioned device, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

To the right of the variable prize ball device 6B is a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening. The special variable prize ball device 7 has a large prize opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large prize opening door forms the large prize opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is played.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening and closing door frame 3a to play and output sound effects, etc. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided at the top and left and right sides of the opening and closing door frame 3a to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B that operate in accordance with the effects. Furthermore, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the frame-top movable body 132SG121 is provided with a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attack LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the opening and closing door frame 3a below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

In addition, an operation unit 600 is provided in the center of the bottom of the opening and closing door frame 3a. The operation unit 600 includes a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player, and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled back and forth by the player and is rotatable. The chance button 631B can move up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and can also move between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. In addition, a cross key that constitutes the selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as volume is provided in the upper tray portion of the opening and closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 2) for detecting the player's operation (action) on the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, a protruding position sensor 635D (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the protruding position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 2) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an advance/retract motor 635F (see Figure 2) for moving the chance button 631B back and forth between the origin position and the protruding position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 2) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward/backward movement of the lever body 631A, and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting whether the lever body 631A is located at the protruding position. The selection button 132SG35 is also provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see Figure 2), which consists of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detects operation of the selection button 132SG35's cross key in the up/down/left/right directions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening and closing door frame 3a has three performance units: the first performance unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center, the second performance unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left, and the third performance unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-mounted movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as described below.

The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown). The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see Figure 2). As will be described later, the jackpot probability in this feature section 132SG is set to 1/200, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in this setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see Figure 2) is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see Figure 2) is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 30 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out.
The setting key 51 and setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and will hereinafter be referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

The time-saving state continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the condition for the time-saving state is met, the predetermined number of special games have been played, this is also called a "time-saving state with a cut-off count" (time-saving with a cut-off count).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on). A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

In addition, during the first round of a jackpot (first jackpot) in normal mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the effect shown in Figure 52 (F8) is displayed.In the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time), so the effect shown in Figure 40 (C2) is displayed.In addition, during the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the displays, various lamps, and sounds will be different between the first and second rounds.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B) and count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening and closing door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals (signals output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation) from the push/pull sensor 625Y, protruding position sensor 625C, button sensor 635B, origin position sensor 635C, protruding position sensor 635D, up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and effect position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, 132SG134.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays effect images on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with video signals corresponding to the effect to be executed based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies sound designation signals (signals designating the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and lamp signals (signals designating the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to the drive circuits that drive each movable body or the vibration motor 635E, the advance/retract motor 635F, and the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of sound output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG121, and chance button 631B (such as supplying signals to operate each movable body).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 (see FIG. 12).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

Figure 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3 is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern specification command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variable pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in Figure 4 (A), the variable display result notification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss," "jackpot," or "minor hit," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in Figure 4 (A), in the variable display result notification commands, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "small hit" and the small hit type will be "small hit A." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cold started (the power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed down (step S6 was executed because the recovery condition was not met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 12)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power was turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (step S4 was executed when the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 12).

Command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game state background designation command is also a command that specifies that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image that corresponds to the game state. With the game state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4(B), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times after the end of jackpot play for jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to seven times after the end of jackpot play for jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is a fifth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. Command 9504H is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a start-of-win command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot or small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A3XXH is a end-of-win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot or small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state or small prize game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a V-winning notification command that notifies that a V-winning has occurred, that is, that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on as a result of the game ball passing through it. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special pattern time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving controls for the second special pattern in the time-saving state. Command D3XX is a prize ball count notification command that notifies the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball entering the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 5, in this feature unit 132SG, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11. Note that other random number values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

Figure 6 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 132SG. In this feature section 132SG, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" or "reach," respectively, and also to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as the non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is referred to as the reach variation pattern (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set aside to execute a congratulatory effect to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature unit 132SG have the same period until the variable display result is announced, preventing the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

Note that the jackpot variation pattern in this feature unit 132SG exemplifies a form in which an additional 15-second special chart variable display time is provided for executing a congratulatory effect after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special chart variable display time for executing a congratulatory effect provided in the jackpot variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may vary depending on the game status.

As shown in Figures 6(A) and 6(B), this feature section 132SG has multiple different variation patterns pre-set depending on the special symbol that executes the variable display.

As shown in Figure 6 (A), the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, such as the jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern, include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as Super Reach α or Super Reach β is executed, and a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which no reach effect is executed. Note that while this feature section 132SG has only one normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach, multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be established, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. Furthermore, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns may also be established for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern for the first special symbol also include a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed 1 to 3 times, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during variable display. In this feature unit 132SG, the reach effect executed - normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β - differs depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. For example, if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during variable display, a normal reach reach effect is executed afterwards; if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during variable display, a super reach α reach effect is executed afterwards; and if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed three times during variable display, a super reach β reach effect is executed afterwards.

Furthermore, of the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β reach effect is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, while the Super Reach α reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, the normal reach reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach α reach effect (jackpot expectation of reach effects: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature unit 132SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation of that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 6 (B), the second special symbol fluctuation patterns in this feature unit 132SG include jackpot fluctuation patterns, small jackpot fluctuation patterns, and miss fluctuation patterns, which are non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns with special symbol variable display times that differ from the first special symbol fluctuation patterns (normal reach fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach γ is executed). Of these second special symbol fluctuation patterns, the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation (jackpot expectation for second special symbols: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, as will be described later, in this feature unit 132SG, rather than first determining the type of variation pattern, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, or a super reach type, and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to that determined type, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type may be provided, and the type of variation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the variation pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to that determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables shown in Figure 7 and other figures, which are prepared so that the CPU 103 can make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variation pattern judgment table (see Figures 14 to 19) that stores multiple variation patterns that determine the variation modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special and normal symbols.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 7(A), display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 7(B), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in Figure 7(C), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in Figure 7(D), small jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 7(E), as well as various first special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 14 and 19), various second special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 20 to 19), and regular symbol variation pattern determination tables (not shown).

Figures 7(A) and 7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination table 1 and display result determination table 2. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a win determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Display result determination table 1 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 1 (first), i.e., when the first special symbol is the target of variable display. Display result determination table 2 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 2 (second), i.e., when the second special symbol is the target of variable display.

As shown in Figure 7 (A), when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1, a judgment value corresponding to a big win is set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, a big win is possible, but a small win will not occur. Furthermore, the probability of winning a big win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1 is approximately 1/200.

Also, as shown in Figure 7 (B), when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a small win are set. Furthermore, when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the first special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(A), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (Big Hit A or Big Hit B). Also, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the second special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (Big Hit B), and if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probabilities" shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B) indicate the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a big hit means deciding whether to control the game to a big hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big hit pattern. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a small hit means deciding whether to control the game to a small hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small hit pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 132SG, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of a big hit may be made using a common table for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern, regardless of the variable display special pattern designation buffer, and the determination of a small hit may be made using a separate table depending on the variable display special pattern designation buffer.

In addition, with this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to first, no judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, meaning that small wins are not won. However, some of the judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins can be set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, allowing small wins to be won.

Figures 7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 7(C) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 7(D) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot, either jackpot A or jackpot B, based on the jackpot type determination random number (MR2) when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a jackpot pattern. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, as shown in Figures 7(C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot that occurs will be either jackpot A or jackpot B, while when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, only jackpot B will occur.

Figure 7 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The small win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as small win A or small win B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the win type when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a small win pattern. Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit A, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C will be executed, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E will be executed, and if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E will be executed. In other words, jackpots C to E are not determined by the random number value MR2 used to determine the type of jackpot extracted at the time of the initial winning, but by whether the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during play of small jackpot A or small jackpot B.

Here, referring to Figure 8, the jackpot types in this feature section 132SG are explained. In this feature section 132SG, jackpot types A to E are set as jackpot types, and time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the large prize entry port is repeatedly changed to a second state advantageous to the player three times (so-called three rounds). Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until a special game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which the large prize slot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player ten times (so-called 10 rounds). The interval period between each round in Jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C1 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) are repeated, changing the jackpot entry port to a second state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 11 special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 11 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot E is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state of Jackpot E ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C2 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

As such, the interval period between the third round of jackpots C, E, and E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature unit 132SG can execute the promotion effect, described below, as an effect suggesting that the jackpot game will continue through the ninth round over those 30 seconds.

In addition, in each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole formed by variable winning ball device 6B. In other words, the occurrence of a second start winning makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, making small hits more likely to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, a jackpot may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or a jackpot may occur when the game ball enters a V-shaped hole during a small hit game, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states are more likely to occur consecutively.

Furthermore, in time-saving state A after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, and therefore the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small jackpot for that one variable display of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during that one variable display of the second special symbol (the total of the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot occurring in the total of five variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 54%.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state after the end of jackpot play for jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those seven variable displays of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those seven variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 83%.

Furthermore, in time-saving state C2 after jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot E ends, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and for any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the above total of 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to nearly 100%.

Note that while this feature section 132SG provides four types of jackpots, jackpot A through jackpot E, the present invention is not limited to this and there may be five or more types of jackpots, or three or fewer types.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 has a game control data holding area 132SG150, as shown in FIG. 9, which is an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a special game reserve memory unit 132SG151, a regular game reserve memory unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, a game control counter setting unit 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started, and reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 132SG151 associates the order of winning (the order of game ball detection) at the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot with a reserve number, and stores numerical data indicating the start slot buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the first start condition being met when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "8"). The maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the first start winning slot and the maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the second start winning slot are each four.

The reserved data stored in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SG151 thus indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers. Furthermore, when the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, one of the variable display based on the first hold information and the variable display based on the second hold memory information may be executed in priority over the variable display based on the other hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The special symbol variable display effect control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control content of various effect operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, the effect display operation in reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols, during the period from when the special symbol begins to vary in the special symbol game to when the confirmed special symbol that results in the special symbol display is derived and displayed. The preview effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the preview effect executed in response to, for example, multiple preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content.

The effect control patterns for variable display of special charts may include, for example, multiple types of reach effect control patterns that differ in the effect mode of each reach effect for each variable pattern that executes the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 132SG190 as shown in Figure 10(A). The performance control data storage area 132SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature unit 132SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, as shown in FIG. 10(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" through "8") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first and second special symbol reserved memories (e.g., "8"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first or second start winning slot, a set of three commands is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start slot winning designation command (first start slot winning designation command or second start slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command). The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for associating the start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory count notification command, and storing the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory together.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the decorative pattern change stop process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A of this feature unit 132SG has a memory area reserved for each buffer number for setting a hold display flag value indicating the display mode of the hold display or active display in the advance notice setting process (Figure 35) described below, and a memory area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel or second special chart hold memory corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in time-saving state A.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the first free entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, commands from the start win designation command to the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 132SG194A shown in Figure 10(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended, and the contents of the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (entry corresponding to buffer number "1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3," "4," "5," etc. are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2," "3," "4," etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing the commands related to the reserved memory currently being displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a designation command, or a pending memory count notification command, and if these commands have been received, it stores these commands as pending memories for each special symbol at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3: Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed. The recovery processing in Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3: No), initialization processing (Step S6) is executed. The initialization processing in Step S6 includes clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clearing processing.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

After executing the recovery process or initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). It then enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG, the normal special symbol process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol process, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" or a "small hit," as well as the type of big hit if it is a "big hit," and the type of small hit if it is a "small hit," are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a miss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" and the normal special symbol processing ends. This feature unit 132SG stores the order in which the game balls enter the first and second start winning slots, and the conditions for starting the special symbol game are met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result will be "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (variable special symbol display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the time-saving state is in effect and the end of the play count is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

Step 132: The pre-processing for opening a small win in SGS118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8." This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win." At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9," and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win opening process of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9." This small win opening process includes measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10" and the small win opening process ends.

The small win termination process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10." This small win termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a gaming ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" and the small win processing ends. Furthermore, if a gaming ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small win gaming state was entered continues. When the waiting time at the end of the small win gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" and the small win termination processing ends.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on (132SGS101) based on a detection signal from the switch. If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (132SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 is not the upper limit (132SGS102; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 132SGS101 is off (132SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 has reached the upper limit (132SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (132SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 132SGS105 is not the upper limit (132SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 132SGS103 or 132SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (132SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (132SGS112). Then, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the CPU 103 performs settings to send the reserved memory number notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

Figure 15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 132SGS112 in Figure 14 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display of a special symbol or decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (S110 in Figure 13) determines whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) should be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or a "small hit" to a small hit game state. Furthermore, the variable pattern setting process (S111 in Figure 13) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a game ball is detected in the starting winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at S112 at the time of winning to determine whether a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol should be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning slot begins, in other words, before it is determined at the start of the variable display whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120 and other devices will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold preview presentations, as described below.

In the winning random number determination process shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is normal or time-saving (step 132SGS121). It then determines whether the set start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, it selects display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 7(A) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, it selects display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 7(B) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, it determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot determination range (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is outside the small win determination value range, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it determines whether the start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the start opening buffer value is 1, if the game state is normal, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18(A). If the game state is either a time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19(A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 21 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state C2, time-saving state C2, or the eighth or subsequent variable display, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 18 (A) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C); if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21(C); or if the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 18(C), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it determines whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the start port buffer value is 1, and the game state is normal, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18(C). If the game state is either a time-saving state, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, when the game state is normal, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 20 (B) is selected; if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 21 (B) is selected; if the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the eighth or subsequent variable display, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 22 (B) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109 to determine the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the transmission of a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 15 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the random number value determination process when a win occurs (step 132SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 13. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is any reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, demo display settings such as sending settings for a customer waiting demo designation command are made, and the normal special symbol processing ends (step 132SGS572). Note that the customer waiting demo designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 12).

If there is a reserved memory in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and random number values MR1 to MR3 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). The values of the number of reserved special charts to be displayed variably and the total number of reserved special charts are decremented by 1, and the contents of the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

It also determines whether the start opening buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special designation buffer value (step 132SGS555). The random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is then compared with the display result determination table set in step 132SGS555 to determine whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot range, it is further determined whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range (step 132SGS557). If the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range, i.e., if the variable display result is a small jackpot, a small jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a small win type determination table (see FIG. 7(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small win type is determined by comparing the selected small win type determination table with the random number value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). A small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is then set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range for a small win, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Furthermore, if the value of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table (see Figure 7(C) or 7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special chart designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and processing proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 132SGS571).

Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 13. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 18 and 19 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is two or less, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 18 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is three or more, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 18 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 18 (C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variable pattern determination table D shown in Figure 19 (A) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variable pattern determination table E shown in Figure 19 (B) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, a variable pattern determination table is selected from Figures 20 to 23 according to the variable display result, game status, value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (number of variable displays in each time-saving state), etc., and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table D for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table E for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 21(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table F for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table J shown in Figure 23 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table K shown in Figure 23 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table L shown in Figure 23 (C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern that includes the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing from the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and determines the identified variation pattern as the variation pattern that will execute the variable display.

Then, settings are made to start the variable display of the special symbol (step 132SGS136), and various commands for starting the variable display, such as a variable pattern specification command and a variable display result specification command according to the determined variable pattern, are set for transmission (step 132SGS137), and a variable display time timer according to the variable pattern is set (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the special symbol variable processing, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in Figure 12.

In addition, with regard to the miss variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 18 and 19, so the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are least likely to be determined. On the other hand, with regard to the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 22 and 23, so the Super Reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the Super Reach α and normal reach variation patterns are least likely to be determined. For this reason, with regard to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in a non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation probability) is lowest, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are set to be the most likely to be determined. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for variation patterns that execute a common reach effect, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects are set to have a higher jackpot expectation. For example, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach β, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach β that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach β that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects. Similarly, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach α, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach α that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach α that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects. Furthermore, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of normal Reach, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of normal Reach that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of normal Reach that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in Figure 13. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer described below is running (step 132SGS201). If the symbol determination period is not running, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stopped symbol of the special symbol (step 132SGS202), and sets up the transmission of a symbol determination command (step 132SGS203). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flags are set, the time-saving flags and other game state flags are cleared (step 132SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission settings for the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is normal, and then proceeds to step 132SGS242 (steps 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The hit start designation command and game state background designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Also, if the symbol determination period timer is running in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 132SGS211). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS212). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is not a losing symbol, the CPU 103 determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214); if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

Also, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving count counter is set to the sum of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the first special symbol and the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the second special symbol in the time-saving state (either "5," "11," or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater, the value of the total time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, i.e., whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 2 (the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol), the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special symbol time-saving count counter is a counter that is set to the maximum number of time-saving control times for the second special symbol (either "1," "7," or "685") during time-saving mode.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any time-saving flags are set (whether the system is controlled to any time-saving state). If no time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any time-saving flags are set, the process further determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the variable display of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 0, the process clears the set time-saving flag (step 132SGS226), clears the value of the total time-saving count counter, and proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, it sets the transmission of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command according to the type of small hit, and proceeds to step 132SGS242. The hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12. If the small hit flag is not set, it proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state background designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS243).

The symbol determination period designation command and game state background designation command are sent to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 13 as the small win release processing. In the small win release processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the release time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the release time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening timer has timed out, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening timer has not timed out, the process determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by activating solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the process sets up the transmission of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open according to the round (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. The command specifying that the large prize opening is open, set up for transmission in 132SGS285, is sent to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the large prize opening (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 activates solenoid 132SG083 to control the large prize opening to a closed state (132SGS287). Then, it sets the transmission of a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened according to the round (132SGS288), and proceeds to 132SGS289. The command to specify when the large prize opening is open, set for transmission in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize opening, it proceeds to 132SGS289 without passing through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In step 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not on, the small win release process is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win release process is terminated. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). Note that the V winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10," which corresponds to the small win end processing (S120) (132SGS293), and ends the small win release processing.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed by 132SGS120 in Figure 13 as small win end processing. During small win end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the small win end display timer is running (132SGS301). If the small win end display timer is not running (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302) and a win end designation command corresponding to the small win is set to the presentation control board 12 (132SGS303). The win end designation command is sent to the presentation control board 12 during the command control processing described above. Then, the small win end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small win end display time (132SGS304), and the small win end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is running, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end processing is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on, it determines whether the V winning flag has been set, indicating that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 (132SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends; if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS310) and ends the small win end processing. Note that the V winning notification command is sent to the effect control board 12 during the command control processing described above.

Also, when the small win end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (132SGS311). If the V prize flag is set, CPU 103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big win flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, CPU 103 determines the big win type from "Big Win C" to "Big Win E" based on the type of small win that resulted in the V prize (132SGS314). As shown in FIG. 7(E), if the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win A," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot C." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot D." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win C," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot E." The determined jackpot type is stored in accordance with the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

In addition, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (steps 132SGS316 and 132SGS317), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (S114) (132SGS318), and the small win end processing is terminated.

In other words, this feature unit 132SG allows the game ball to pass through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during small win play, but also during the period after the small win play ends until the small win end display time has elapsed. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win slot just before the small win play ends, the game ball will pass through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win play will be executed after the small win end processing has ended.

If the V prize flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and ends the small win end processing.

Figure 27 is a flowchart of the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 13. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not running, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag (step 132SGS322a) and sets the transmission of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. The CPU 103 then sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time during which the jackpot end display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time), and ends the jackpot end processing (step 132SGS322c).

Also, if the jackpot end display timer is running in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end processing is terminated. If the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "1" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state A, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E, the second special chart time-saving count counter is set to "685" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "689" (steps 132SGS329, 132SGS330). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C1, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a). If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C2, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

Also, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "7", and the total time-saving count counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state B, and the program proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a game status background designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot that was executed (step 132SGS339b). The game status background designation command is transmitted to the presentation control board 12 in the command control process described above. The CPU 103 also stores the game status background designation command that has been set up for transmission (step 132SGS340), and terminates the jackpot termination process.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 28 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a startup preparation display process (step 132SGS70) to display a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and then performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. The initial operation control process also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). The initial operation control process executes control for initializing the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and performing predetermined operation checks.

In this embodiment, the terms "display" and "image" are sometimes used, for example, the "boot preparation display" described in the embodiment is referred to as a "boot preparation image" in the drawings. However, since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may also be referred to as "image" and "image" as "display."

Furthermore, the initialization process of step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display process of step SGS70 from being initialized. Furthermore, by displaying the startup preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and to confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) is executed to display a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the power outage recovery designation command received from the CPU 103, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) is executed to execute the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

The startup preparation display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received, and the power outage recovery display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

Furthermore, after the initial operation control processing, the performance control process processing is executed (step S76). The performance control process processing controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, judgments, decisions, and settings are made regarding the control content of performance operations using various performance devices in accordance with performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) for executing a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of each LED, and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on the background image designation command received from the CPU 103 to a background image corresponding to the received background image designation command are executed. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 29, the initial operation control process broadly includes two processes: an origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) that places the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101).

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in the origin placement control processing in Figure 29. In the origin placement control processing shown in Figure 30, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the startup origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132SGS402). If the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is time to start a demo performance (step 132SGS403). Whether it is time to start a demo performance can be determined by, for example, determining whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating or whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demo performance.

If it is not the start timing of the demo performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by determining whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is running, and whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start timing of the variable display. If it is not the start timing of the variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demo performance in step 132SGS403, or if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS411). If there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and movement control of the non-detected movable bodies toward the origin is initiated by means such as driving a motor corresponding to the non-detected movable body (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there are no movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, i.e., if all movable bodies are positioned at their respective origin positions, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413.

In step 132SGS414, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detected movable body (the movable body located at the origin position). Then, it sets the detection operation process data for the detected movable body (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection operation process timer, and starts operation control of the movable body (detected movable body), as well as display control of the image display device 5, sound output control of speakers 8L and 8Rk, and light emission control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS417).

Also, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of both the detection operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). It then determines whether the subtracted origin operation period timer has timed out (step 132SGS421). If the subtracted origin operation period timer has not timed out, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the subtracted detection operation process timer value, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

Also, if the origin operation period timer has expired in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423), and the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body to be controlled is identified (step 132SGS424). It is then determined whether there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensors (step 132SGS425).

If there are any movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG426), and if the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process ends (step 132SGS427). Note that if there are no movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process ends.

Figures 31 and 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in the operation confirmation control processing in Figure 29. As mentioned above, a cold start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 pressed down, i.e., the initialization processing (step S6) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. A hot start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 not pressed down, i.e., the recovery processing (step S4) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up.

In the operation confirmation control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmation execution flag is set (step 132SGS502). If the operation confirmation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132SGS503).

If the operation confirmation flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the operation confirmation flag is not set, it is further determined whether the startup origin placement control flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the startup origin placement control flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the startup origin placement control flag is set, the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether an undetected movable object is stored (step 132SGS506). If an undetected movable object is not stored, proceed to step 132SGS508. If an undetected movable object is stored, the operation of the undetected movable object is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the presentation control CPU 120 identifies the startup type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started as a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the startup type. Furthermore, in step 132SGS508, it identifies whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a cold start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the cold start; and if the hot start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a hot start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the hot start.

Then, the operation confirmation process timer (upper) starts counting, and the operation control of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED are started, and the operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation confirmation in progress flag is set in step 132SGS502, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation confirmation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS510) and identifies the process data corresponding to the value of the operation confirmation process timer after the subtraction (step 132SGS511). It then determines whether the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completion data, it further determines whether the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to the performance position, it proceeds to step 132SGS515. If the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position, it stores the performance results of the performance position sensor of the corresponding movable body and then proceeds to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the process switching flag is not set, the CPU 120 further determines whether it is time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed, the CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination of each LED based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511, and terminates the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS517).

Furthermore, if it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body effect is executed, the activation type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by a cold start or a hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 33 is identified according to the identified activation type (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 33, if the identified startup type is a cold start, image display control on the image display device 5 and LED light emission control are identified as the lower-level switching control types; if the identified startup type is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R are identified as the lower-level switching control types.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type to lower-level process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS518 (step 132SGS219) and sets the process switching flag (step 132SGS520). It also executes control based on the non-switched process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS218, and terminates the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detected positions of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body (step 132SGS530), and identifies malfunctioning movable bodies from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) and stores them as operation-restricted movable bodies (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the operation check in progress flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether the process switching in progress flag is set (step 132SGS533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132SGS534), and control is executed to switch all control process data to performance control process data (lower), terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the target type is a cold start, control is executed to switch the sound output control process data to performance control process data (lower) (step 132SGS536a). The chance button and on-board movable objects are identified as the movable objects to be operated, and post-confirmation operation process data (upper) is set (step 132SGS537). The post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) is started to count, and operation control and LED illumination control of the chance button and on-board movable objects are initiated (step 132SGS538). The post-confirmation operation execution flag is set, terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS539).

Also, if the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540) and identifies the process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value after the subtraction (step 132SGS541). It then determines whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to a presentation position (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to a presentation position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the identified process data is data corresponding to a presentation position, the detection results of the presentation position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and presentation position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Furthermore, if the identified process data is completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548; if the chance button 631B is not located at the origin position, the process stores the chance button 631B as a movement-restricted movable body and proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a movement-restricted movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to performance control process data (lower level). It then clears the operation check execution flag and terminates the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in Figure 34 (A), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start, movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control is executed based on the presentation control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (B), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, movable body control and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on the performance control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, operation control of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body (movable body control) and LED light emission control are executed based on post-confirmation operation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on performance control process data (lower order).

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 28 as the presentation control process. In the presentation control process shown in Figure 35, the presentation control CPU 120 first executes the advance notice setting process in this feature unit 132SG, based on the presentation control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning, to execute a hold display notice effect as an advance notice, which suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot based on the display mode of the hold display, and a panel image is displayed on the image display device 5 for one variable display of the second special pattern in time-saving state A and four variable displays of the second special pattern immediately thereafter, and a panel effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates depending on the display mode of these panel images. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a pending display preview effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be executed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132SGS194A, and if it is decided to execute a panel display effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display is set as the panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be executed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132SGS194A, thereby starting the display of these pending displays and panel displays (see Figure 10 (B)).

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a result effect execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result effect execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out since the first win occurs are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A is the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and control is returned to the normal state (during the pattern determination period), processing is performed to execute a result effect that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, when controlled to time-saving state C2, there are exceptional cases in which a result effect is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a break-in effect execution process (step 132SGS163). The break-in effect execution process executes a break-in effect that notifies players that the game has been controlled to a time-saving state, for example, during the ending effect of the jackpot game and during the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the processing of step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol hit waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3." In this special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the symbol fixation period indicated by the symbol fixation command, based on receiving a command (one of the first symbol fixation command, second symbol fixation command, third symbol fixation command, and fourth symbol fixation command) that specifies the static display of the fixed decorative symbol received in the variable display performance process.

Furthermore, at the end of the pattern determination period, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the small win presentation processing. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is determined that the display result in the special symbol game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special symbol hit waiting process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The small win presentation processing of step 132SGS176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." During this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, during the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "7," which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation processing of step 132SGS177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this small win end presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation processing is terminated.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 35. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special chart reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A is shifted up by one buffer number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605) and determines the decorative pattern to be stopped according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 132SGS606).

The effect control CPU 120 then executes a remaining time-saving count display process (step 132SGS608) for displaying on the image display device 5 the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state (remaining time-saving counts), a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132SGS609) for displaying on the image display device 5 a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown effect or time-saving end countdown) when the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display preview effect determination process (step 132SGS610) for executing a variable display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game status, and variable display result (step 132SGS611) and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and chance button 631B are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Note that, as described below, this characteristic unit 132SG illustrates an example in which the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during variable display, the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume during the variable display even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display (when the value of the time-saving play counter is updated). Also, even when power supply is stopped while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, but there is no reserved memory and variable display is not being executed (during customer waiting mode), the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving play counter is updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (132SGS614). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the variable display effects in this feature section 132SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 37, when the game state is normal, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol starts the reach effect of the super reach effect, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the reach effect (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach effect, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, the image display device 5 displays an information image informing the player that the variable display result has become a jackpot, and then a right hit information is displayed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to make them enter the big prize slot, and a round effect during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

If the jackpot game is a jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in Figures 38 and 39, when the jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is displayed, followed by a break-in effect A, indicating that the game has been controlled to time-saving state A. During the execution of break-in effect A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on this reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds). In addition to being controlled to time-saving state A, break-in effect A also includes a right-hit notification (A1-A4) that notifies the player that time-saving state A is in a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning slot and causing the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed.

When the player hits the gaming ball toward the right gaming area in accordance with entry effect A, the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player continues to hit the gaming ball toward the right gaming area and the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Note that a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories for the second special symbol ("4").

When one variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. During this variable display, if the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompt image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8-A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small win, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a small win. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") instructing the player to shoot the gaming ball toward the right gaming area to have the gaming ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024 is displayed on the image display device 5 (B1-B3).

When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable displays corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special design, the image display device 5 notifies the player of the remaining number of variable displays for the second special design, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special design is displayed (B6-B8).

If all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol are misses, during the final symbol determination period for the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol have ended (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END..."). Thereafter, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 10 times. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, when the player hits the game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special symbol ends, the game is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if power is interrupted and restored during the period shown in Figures 38(A1) to 38(A4), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display until Figure 38(A5), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored immediately before the end of Figure 38(A4) (within 5 seconds of the end), and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period shown in Figure 38(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display from Figure 38(A6) onward (the timing at which the "Restoring" display disappears is shown in Figures 39(B3) and 39(B7)), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored during Figure 38(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display until the variable display corresponding to the second panel is initiated, and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation (the first time-saving variable time is longer than 26 seconds). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 38 (A10) (more than 5 seconds until the end of the fluctuation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to Figure 38 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 39 (B6), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 39 (B7) (taking into account the button effects). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 38 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to Figure 39 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to Figure 39 (B2), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 39 (B3) (taking into account the "Aim for V"). Note that the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e when the under-board movable body 32B is operating differs between the initial operation and Figure 39 (B1).

Furthermore, if power is interrupted and restored in Figure 39 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the end of the variable display) and the display period of the start-up preparation display overlaps with the period of Figure 39 (B5), the image display device 5 will display "Aim for V" after the display period of the start-up preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the start-up preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (small win start command or small win open command) received in Figure 39 (B3). Furthermore, the large prize opening will begin opening during the display period of the start-up preparation display. Furthermore, if power is interrupted and restored in Figure 39 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds left until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display a recovery display in a special mode (notifying that a small win has occurred) until the open command (second round) is received after the V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the initial operation in the normal mode (which will end before the start of the next round), and the large prize opening will begin opening during the display period of the start-up preparation display.

When the game is controlled to time-saving state B after the end of a big win game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, as shown in Figure 40, first, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination indicating a small win as the variable display of the second special chart. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (the "FEVER" image) (C1-C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small jackpot ends, an ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game. Then, after the entry effect B is executed, in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the number of times already controlled in the time-saving state, the first variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state B begins. Furthermore, during the time-saving state B, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed while a background image of a city at night (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5-C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special symbol) end without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win in time-saving state B, a result effect will begin during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, if there is a reserved memory of a second special symbol when the result effect begins, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to four times in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds) according to the remaining reserved memory of the second special symbol (remaining reserved memory) (C9-C11).

If none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win or a small win, the image display device 5 begins displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12-C14).

Furthermore, when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game via a small win ends, i.e., when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game of jackpot E ends, the following actions are performed first, as when the time-saving mode B is entered: a stop display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win; the display of an image on the image display device 5 displaying "Aim for V!"; the display of an image announcing the occurrence of a V win during the small win game; the display of an image indicating that the game is entering a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image); the display of an image corresponding to the number of balls won in the jackpot game; a break-in effect B in which a portion of the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the game has already been entered into the time-saving mode; and the display of seven variable decorative symbols while the second background display is displayed (see C1-C9 in Figure 40).

As shown in Figure 41, when the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (seven variable displays of the second special pattern) ends without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win, a result effect begins during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, during the execution period of the result effect, three variable displays of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) are executed in an extremely short special pattern change time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win in the three variable displays of the decorative pattern (eighth to tenth variable displays), another variable display of the decorative pattern (eleventh variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result in the 11th variable display is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the on-board movable body 32A moves and an illumination effect image corresponding to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is displayed on the image display device 5. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to its standby position before falling (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B. When the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 executes a V-stock effect, informing the player that the number of time-saving control cycles in the time-saving state is 685, i.e., that the variable display result during the time-saving state is essentially a big win or a small win. Thereafter, when the V-stock effect ends with the completion of the eleventh variable display, the image display device 5 starts the twelfth and subsequent variable displays while displaying the second background display (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in Figures 41 (D2) to 41 (D8), in the transition from the result effect during time-saving state C2 to the V-stock effect, unlike the result effect corresponding to time-saving state B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden to prevent the player from noticing in advance that the time-saving control continues even after the result effect ends. The right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
37 to 41, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a first hold display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first hold memory is provided on the left side thereof. For example, in response to the execution of variable display of the first special pattern, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first hold memory count being 4, four first hold displays 132SG001 are displayed horizontally in the first hold display area 132SG011.

Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above that a second hold display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second hold memory is provided (see Figure 92). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special pattern being executed, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013 provided at the left edge of the display area, and in response to the value of the second hold memory count being 4, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in second hold display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order to consume winnings in order, if a second hold memory is stored in normal game mode, the second hold display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first hold display area 132SG011, and if a second hold memory is stored in time-saving mode, the first hold display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second hold display area 132SG012. However, for example, it may be possible to display both the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002 in the first hold display area 132SG011.

In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (for example, an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, right-hit prompt display 132SG430, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the effect images such as characters to prevent overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol can be used to perform effects such as a momentary disappearance of the effect content, including the variable display of the decorative symbol, from the screen, or an effect in which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, making it possible to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed, even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol. Upon receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, upon receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be explained based on Fig. 42 to Fig. 44. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-frame movable body and chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which they are located at the effect position.

As shown in Figures 42 and 43, an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B are provided on the front side of the gaming board 2. These above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B are also referred to as "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the gaming board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 44, an above-frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. These above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also referred to as "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it cannot be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it can be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state.

As shown in Figure 42, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32a with the letters "XXX" displayed on the front, and support sections 32b that support the performance section 32a from the left and right sides. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. In more detail, the on-board movable body 32A is movable between an origin position at the top front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 42(A), and a performance position approximately in the center front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 42(B); at the origin position, a portion (the lower part) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG124. Multiple on-board movable body LEDs 9d are also provided inside, and these on-board movable body LEDs 9d can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 43, the under-board movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a fist when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32c with decoration displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the performance section 32c from below. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. In more detail, the under-board movable body 32B is movable between an origin position at the front and bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 43(A), and a performance position at approximately the center of the front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 43(B). At the origin position, a portion (upper portion) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The under-board movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG134. Multiple under-board movable body LEDs 9e are also provided inside, and these under-board movable body LEDs 9e can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 44, the first effect unit 132SG100 has a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes upward and forward from the upper edge of the opening and closing door frame 3a, and a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 that is movable up and down on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) displayed in various effects on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and frame-mounted decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R that are shaped to resemble the character's wings are movably mounted on the back side.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-mounted decorative part 132SG It has a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits power to the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and a frame-top movable body LED 9f for illuminating the front of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R.

In this way, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is capable of moving vertically between the origin position shown in Figure 44(A) and the performance position shown in Figure 44(B) at the upper front (above the glass window) of the opening and closing door frame 3a. Furthermore, the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are capable of changing between a non-deployed state in which they are stored in the origin position on the left and right sides of the back of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and a deployed state in which they protrude to spread out to the performance positions on the upper left and right sides of the back. They change from the non-deployed state to the deployed state in response to the upward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and change from the deployed state to the non-deployed state in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101.

Also, as shown in Figure 44, the chance button 631B consists of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the top, and is arranged so that it can move up and down relative to the base part 600A formed on the top of the operation unit 600. In detail, the chance button 631B is movable up and down between an origin position (see Figure 44 (A)) where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base part 600A, and an operation detection position where the operation surface is lower than the origin position, and is biased upward so that it is always held in the origin position; when the player presses it, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, and the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B.

The chance button 631B can be moved up and down between an origin position (see Figure 44(A)) and an effect position where the operation surface is higher than the origin position, by a drive mechanism (not shown) including an advance/retract motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the advance/retract motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the advance/retract motor 635F between a first operable state in which it is located at the origin position and a second operable state in which it is located at the effect position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in either the first operable state or the second operable state.

The chance button 631B is detected by the origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, by the button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and by the protrusion position sensor 635D at the performance position. Multiple chance button LEDs 9g are also provided inside, and these chance button LEDs 9g allow the operation surface to emit light.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a is exemplified by the chance button 631B and the above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above, and the number, position, shape, and operating mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Figures 45 and 46. Figure 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. Figure 46 (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in Figure 45, the effect control CPU 120 can execute multiple effects. In more detail, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-reading movable object prediction" that suggests the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display (also called target variation) that is the subject of the pre-reading prediction before the variable display begins.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "start-time announcement," "pseudo consecutive announcement," "moving object announcement," "reach announcement," and "button announcement" as advance announcement effects that indicate that the variable display will be controlled to a jackpot.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "win/lose button presentation" as a deciding presentation that notifies players whether or not they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in a variable display based on a super reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the following jackpot effects during jackpot gaming: "fanfare effect," "round effect," "promotion effect," and "ending effect."

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving effects" and "result effects" as time-saving effects that can be executed in the special states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demo effect" as a standby effect that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in Figure 46 (A), the "Start Notice," "Moving Object Notice/Pseudo-Continuous Notice," and "Reach Notice/Button Notice" are effects that can be executed, for example, before the variable display mode becomes the N Reach mode and the N Reach effect is executed, or before the variable display mode becomes the SP Reach mode and the SP Reach effect is executed. In addition, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP Reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period from when control of the jackpot game state begins until the start of round play, when the large prize opening is opened; the "round effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play, where the large prize opening alternates between open and closed states; the "interval effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play; and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from when round play ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare periods, round play periods, and ending periods are managed by the CPU 103. Note that in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promotion effect" is executed during the special round interval period from the end of the third round opening period of the large prize slot for jackpots C, D, and E until the start of the fourth round opening period.

(Predictive moving object announcement)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pre-reading movable body announcement" is an effect in which the movable body 32A on the board operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to reserved memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect, which are executed before the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) of the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 47 (A1), if a start win occurs when the number of reserved memories for the first special pattern is "2" and the variable display is being executed, and a decision is made to execute a predictive movable body announcement because the variable display based on the reserved memory prior to the start win is a non-reach miss (i.e., the special pattern change time is 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display is stopped (see Figure 47 (A2)), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display starts, the on-board movable body 32A will vibrate up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A will be displayed and sound effects will be output (see Figure 47 (A3)), and it will then return to the origin position before the variable display is stopped (see Figure 47 (A4)). This action is performed when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance begins, and when the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance begins (see Figures 47 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading movable object announcement is shown as an example of a presentation pattern in which it continues across multiple variable displays until the target movement begins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to implement a presentation pattern with a low expectation level in which the pre-reading movable object announcement ends before the target movement begins. It may also be possible to implement multiple presentation patterns with different jackpot expectations depending on the movement speed of the on-board movable object 32A as it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Notice at the start)
As shown in Figure 45, the "start notice" is an effect that indicates whether the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is white as the base color and can change to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the start notice indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, an effect pattern that ends in white, an effect pattern that ends in blue, an effect pattern that ends in green, and an effect pattern that ends in red are executable, with the effect patterns having the highest likelihood of a jackpot being white, blue, green, and red, in that order.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 48 (B1), when it is decided to execute the start notice upon the start of the variable display, the entire display area is turned off or becomes dark with low brightness, and the character display 132SG402 "!!" is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see Figure 48 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become brighter (see Figure 48 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge, and when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), a "?" character display 132SG403 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be white (see Figure 48 (B3a)).

In the case of an effect pattern that ends in blue, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see Figure 48 (B4)). When a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings turned white in Figure 48 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be blue (see Figure 48 (B4a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in green, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white to blue to green and is enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) (B5)). After a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings turned white in Figure 48 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks up and the word "heat" 132SG405 is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be green (see Figure 48 (B5a)).

For a presentation pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surrounding area gradually changes from white to blue, green, and red in order, and is enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) to (B6)). After a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the word "Super Hot" 132SG406 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be red (see Figure 48 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" includes an introductory part (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)) that serves as a period during which the hold display will change or not, and a result notification part (see Figures 48 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)) that serves as a period during which the result of the hold display change is notified.

In this embodiment, the example shows how the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested by changing the display mode, such as the display color and size, of the active display 132SG003. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing display modes other than the display color and size. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003, but also the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002. Furthermore, the change patterns for the display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be possible.

(Movable object preview)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "movable object preview" is an effect in which the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates, before the pseudo consecutive effect described later is executed in the variable display. The effect patterns of the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small) and the likelihood of a jackpot is high, and either the "vibration (small) pattern" or the "vibration (large) pattern" is determined depending on the result of the variable display.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 49 (C1), when it is decided to execute a movable object preview upon the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the pseudo consecutive performance begins, the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see Figure 49 (C2)). In addition, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the on-board movable object 32A is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and performance sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a moving object announcement is made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving object announcement may also be made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed (for example, a non-reach variable pattern).

In addition, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (Pattern A) before the start of operation of the chance button 631B during the initial operation described below, or in conjunction with the advancement operation. Furthermore, as a performance during movement, the vibration motor 635E can be operated (Pattern B) to indicate the degree of expectation, or it can be operated (Pattern C) as decoration (entertainment) when a jackpot is hit or when the moving body is moving. Each of these Patterns A, B, and C has a different vibration pattern (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time), as well as a different lamp pattern (Pattern A: initial emphasis; Pattern B: rapid white flashing, rapid red flashing; Pattern C: rainbow colors, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when the moving body is moving) and sound output pattern (Pattern A: initialization notification or silence; Pattern B: background music during movement; Pattern C: celebratory sound upon jackpot, moving body performance sound).

As will be described later, the initial highlighting mode is a lighting pattern (brightness, lighting time, etc.) that is dedicated to initial actions, and is therefore not used in any performance action control (see Figure 56 (B)).

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is an effect that suggests whether or not the variable display will resume after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, that is, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive effects include a double pattern in which the variable display resumes twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display resumes three times, which has a higher probability of winning than the double pattern, and either the double pattern or the triple pattern is determined depending on the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed is initiated, if it is decided to execute a moving object prediction, the moving object prediction is executed (see FIG. 49 (C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 49 (C3)), and then a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C4)), and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is decelerated and displayed just before the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C6)), and then the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and a variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 49 (C10)).

Also, in Figure 49 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive announcement of a double pattern, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 49 (C8)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 49 (C9)), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode. Also, in Figure 49 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive announcement of a triple pattern, the sequence of Figures 49 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then the presentation develops into a reach mode in Figures 49 (C8) and (C9), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" includes an introductory part (see Figures 49 (C3) to (B5)) that serves as a period to tease whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9)) that serves as a period to notify the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed.

(Reach notice)
As shown in Figure 45, the "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L has been displayed in a stopped state, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), after the variable display begins and the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed as a static symbol (see FIG. 50 (D2)), a decelerating display of a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L begins just before the static display position in the variably displayed right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 50 (D3)). Then, if a player's operation is detected within a predetermined valid operation period after the decelerating display begins, or if no operation is detected and the valid operation period has elapsed, and a reach-win state is not reached, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L passes the static display position and the next decorative symbol is displayed as a static symbol (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), (D7)). If a reach-win state is reached, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed as a static symbol at the static display position (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

Note that a reach mode is a mode (also known as a reach effect) in which, from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed statically, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

(Button preview)
As shown in Figure 45, when the above-mentioned reach prediction is executed, the "button prediction" is executed during the period from when the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins in the right decorative pattern display area 5R until the specified operation valid period has elapsed, and is an effect that promotes button operation to determine whether or not the reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 50 (D4) to (D5), this is an operation prompt effect that encourages operation of the chance button 631B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the lapse of a specified valid operation period. It begins with the display of an operation prompt display and a button image that resembles the chance button 631B, and ends when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has lapsed without operation being detected, and the operation prompt display and button image are no longer displayed.

The button preview presentation patterns (operation prompting modes) include a "long press pattern" that prompts the player to press and hold the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, a "rapid press pattern" that prompts the player to repeatedly press the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that prompts the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, "long press pattern," "rapid press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation prompting display is "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "rapid press!" for the "rapid press pattern," and "Press!" for the "single hit pattern."

In this way, the "button announcement" includes an operation prompting part (see Figure 50 (D5)) that serves as a period for encouraging the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 50 (D6) and (D7)) that serves as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the operation has resulted in a reach state.

(Win/lose button effect)
As shown in Figure 45, the "win/lose button effect" is an effect that, at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, encourages button operation to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and notifies the user of the result of whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), a reach title, which is a type of SP reach presentation, is announced in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, and after the SP reach presentation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) has begun (see FIGS. 51 (E2) and (E3)), the presentation begins by displaying an operation prompt display 132SG411 consisting of the words "PRESS!!" to prompt the operation of the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B, from the time the battle is concluded until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed (see FIG. 51 (E4)).

Then, when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and button display 132SG412 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e lights up in a predetermined light color, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 132SG413 highlighting the under-board movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 51 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmation symbol combination is statically displayed, indicating that a jackpot has occurred (see Figures 51 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a display 132SG414 is displayed indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, after which a notification is given that the variable display result is a miss (see Figure 51 (E10) to (E12)).

Note that possible presentation patterns include one in which the chance button 631B remains in the origin position and an operation prompt is displayed, and one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to a presentation position and an operation prompt is displayed, resulting in a higher chance of winning than when the chance button 631B is in the origin position. Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/lose button effect" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 51 (E4)) that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 51 (E5) and (E10)) that serves as a period for notifying the user of the variable display result of whether or not the result is a jackpot by the under-board movable body 32B.

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that notifies information about the controlled jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game state is controlled to when the round game starts. Note that the information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the type of jackpot, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving states A, B, C1, C2), etc., and may also include other information.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F1), after a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols is displayed statically and the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot gaming state begins, and display 132SG420 indicating that a jackpot has started is displayed (see FIG. 52 (F2)). Furthermore, when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A1) and (A2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the presentation position, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is maintained in the presentation position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot type (jackpots A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that makes up "BIG BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (e.g., one character) at a time and moved to the center of the display screen (see Figure 52 (F3) to (F6)). Also, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character images that make up "SMALL BONUS!!" are framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (e.g., one character) at a time and moved to the center of the display screen (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG431 that encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area (see Figure 52 (F7)), after which the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG432 that indicates that the player should aim for the big prize slot (see Figure 52 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period during which information regarding a jackpot is announced (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)), and an operation direction announcement part that announces the operation direction of the ball-hitting control handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right (see Figures 52 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "round effect" is an effect in which winning information during a round is announced after the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and the fanfare period ends, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened during the round play.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 52 (F9) to (F11), during round play, the following are displayed: a character display 132SG450; a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds; a winning ball count display 132SG452 indicating the number of winning balls in that round; a ball count display 132SG453 indicating the number of balls paid out since the jackpot game state began up to the present; a consecutive jackpot count/total ball count display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls paid out during the jackpot streak; and a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 which prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation.

If a jackpot occurs during the time-saving mode, the "Aim for V!!" effect shown in Figure 40 (C2) will be executed during the operation direction notification part of Figure 52 (F8). The "Aim for V!!" effect will also continue during the round effect period of Figure 52 (F9).

The images displayed in the round presentation may also be moving images, and each round may include a picture-story presentation to explain the characters, explain the "FINAL BATTLE," or present a story. For example, if an explanation presentation for character A is being shown in the first round, an explanation presentation for character B will be shown in the second round. However, if power is lost during the first round and then restored, a "restoration" message will be displayed until the end of the first round, and then, when the second round begins, the explanation presentation for character A that was shown in the first round will be shown again. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by displaying it from the beginning in the second round, consideration can be given to players who want to see character A's explanation presentation to the end.

In addition, a promotional video corresponding to the selected song may be displayed during the round performance. For example, if a promotional video corresponding to selected song A (up to the chorus) was displayed during the first round, and there was no change in the song, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (chorus portion) would continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (the verse) will be displayed again. Also, if selected song A is changed to selected song B during the first round, a promotional video corresponding to selected song B will be displayed during the first round, and then promotional video corresponding to selected song B will continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A will be displayed. If the power is interrupted, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power interruption, so in the second round, a PV presentation based on the default selected song A will be displayed (for example, if the ball output display shows "150" during one round of play and the power is restored after a power interruption, the ball output display displayed during the next round of play will show "0").

(Promotion performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "promotion effect" is a round promotion effect that notifies whether or not the round play will continue (round promotion) (whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpot D or E (10 rounds), which has a larger number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)) during the round interval in the third round play of jackpot C to E, in other words, when the variable display result of the second special pattern becomes a jackpot display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned ball number counter display 132SG351, which indicates the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the promotion effect begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 53 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B, an operation prompt display 132SG355 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 132SG356 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 53 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 53 (F24)), the ally character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and the enemy character is displayed faded out (see FIG. 59 (F25)). Then, the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "1500," the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a static value, and it is announced that the jackpot has been upgraded to a 10-round jackpot (see FIG. 53 (F26)).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character has not been defeated, indicating that it was not a 10-round jackpot, i.e., that promotion to a 10-round jackpot has failed (see Figure 53 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" includes an introductory part that hypes up whether or not the player will be promoted (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that notifies the player of whether or not they have been promoted (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "ending presentation" is a presentation in which the end of the jackpot is announced and information about the game state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends is announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 52 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of play ends, a notification is displayed that the "FINAL BATTLE presentation" will begin after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A will be entered), and a right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is displayed, instructing the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area and aim for the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 52 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion effect (promotion failure) ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B will be entered) (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B or time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)).

In this way, the "ending performance" includes an introductory part as an introductory period (see Figures 52 (F12) and 53 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified (see Figures 52 (F13), 53 (F32), and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part in which the operation direction of the ball-hitting operation handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right, is notified (see Figure 52 (F14)).

(Performance during time-saving)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "time-saving effect" is an effect that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state (see FIGS. 38 and 40).

(Results presentation)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "result effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figs. 39 and 40). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figs. 54 (B1) and (B2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 descends from the effect position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Customer waiting demonstration)
As shown in Figure 45, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the device is in a customer waiting (waiting to play) state, and is an effect that starts when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 was received without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (G1), when the power is turned on, the initial operation is initiated in the initial operation control process, and when the initial operation is completed (see FIG. 55 (G2)), the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on in FIG. 55 (G1) without any variable display, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is no longer displayed, and a customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 55 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters A-D (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see FIG. 55 (G4)-(G7)), an image of allied characters A-D gathered together remains displayed (see FIG. 55 (G8)), while the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see FIG. 55 (G9)-(G10)). The first background display 132SG310, which shows a daytime city corresponding to the normal state as the background image, is displayed, and the performance ends (see FIG. 55 (G11)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G12)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed multiple times repeatedly while in standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, examples have been given of forms in which the various effects shown in Figure 45 can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executed. Furthermore, the execution mode of each effect can be changed in various ways, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than those described above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 (A) is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the lamp and sound modes according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in Figure 56 (A), the performance control CPU 120 is capable of performing initial operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to perform their initial operation (initial operation) when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), and performance operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance during various performances.

"Initial operation control" includes "origin placement control (short initial operation control)," which includes non-detection operation control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located other than the origin position, and non-detection operation control that temporarily moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position and then returns it to the origin position from that position away from the origin position; and "operation confirmation control (long initial operation control)," which is a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, in which the movable body is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then moved from the performance position to the origin position.

In more detail, if the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, that is, if the movable body is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a specified position between the origin position and the performance position) for some reason (for example, if the movable body has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the play area, if it was unable to return to the origin position during the previous operation (for example, if an operation error (abnormal operation) occurs during performance execution, such as the movable body being unable to return to the origin or becoming unable to operate due to a motor out-of-step, malfunction, or jamming), or if it has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine), the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to the origin position. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable body is located away from the origin position, so the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position.

In addition, if the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes detection operation control. For example, in cases where a predetermined range of movement (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time the movement of the movable body toward the origin position is restricted so that the movable body can be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection operation control is executed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection operation control requires the movable body to be moved away from the origin position to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, and then returned to the origin position. However, since it is not necessary to move it to the performance position, the movable body is moved from the origin position to a detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it is moved back and forth over a distance shorter than the long initial operation.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the initial operation process, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. The operation confirmation control processing is an operation control to confirm that the movable bodies are operating normally, and therefore it is an operation control to move each movable body from its respective origin position to the performance position farthest from the origin position, and then return it to the origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is the maximum advance operation. Furthermore, the operation confirmation control processing for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described below, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable body does not necessarily have to be the same as either of the performance operation controls.

"Performance operation control" is the operation control of movable bodies in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of target movable bodies and different operation modes. In more detail, 1. "Prediction" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the target change begins, such as in the pre-read movable body announcement. 2. "Applicable" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the applicable change, such as in the movable body announcement, and vibrates the chance button 631B with the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion" is operation control that moves the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position in the case of jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position during fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 5. "Jackpot game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the effect position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control that moves the chance button 631B from the origin position to the effect position during the win/lose button effect.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the movable body so that it always operates at a single (constant) operation speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable body, and are not common operation speeds when there are multiple movable bodies, so the minimum speed for each movable body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable body will differ. Furthermore, even if different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speed of the movable body will also differ. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the minimum speed optimal for it, making it possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different modes at the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing a movable body performance in which a movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-reading performance, preview performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in Figure 45), so the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in the performance operation control.However, as long as it is possible to check whether the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same speed.

(Operation confirmation control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in Figure 57 (A), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 in the game control main process, the presentation control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, upon receiving a power-on command from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification is initiated indicating that a cold start process has been performed. Also, upon a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) having elapsed since the initialization notification was initiated, initial operation control of the movable bodies (upper-board movable body 32A, lower-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper-frame movable body 132SG101) begins (see FIG. 57(B)). During the initialization notification, as described below, the lamps (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, upper-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and speakers 8L, 8R begin to emit a predetermined initialization notification sound (see FIG. 61).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101), followed by operation confirmation control. Below, illustrations of the operation modes based on short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation modes based on operation confirmation control will be explained.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(D)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(E)). Next, the below-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(F)), after which the on-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 57(G)). Next, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(H)), and then the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, approximately 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, during operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is initiated in the order of chance button 631B, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of above-board movable body 32A overlaps with part of the initial operation period of chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of above-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with part of the initial operation period of below-board movable body 32B, the operation confirmation control period of multiple movable bodies can be shortened.

In addition, when the initial movement control of one movable body is being performed while the movement control of another movable body is being performed, while one movable body (e.g., chance button 631B, below-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the performance position, the other movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A, above-frame movable body 132SG101) moves to the performance position or origin position, so even when the initial movement control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the movement of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, while an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on Figure 57, the operation confirmation control during hot start processing does not issue an initialization notification using a lamp or sound, but the operation confirmation control for the moving body is performed in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Also, as shown in Figure 56 (B), the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during operation confirmation control flashes red during cold start processing (during initialization notification), is turned off during hot start processing (during recovery), and lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image" during hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during performance operation control lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image." Note that the background image (background display) may have, for example, background images A and B, and if background image A is displayed and there is a power outage and then recovery, background image A will always be displayed, and the lamp will always light up in a mode corresponding to background image A.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position and during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in "white" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), hot start processing (during recovery), and hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, during performance operation control (for example, operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in the win/lose button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position lights up in a first light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals with extinguishing periods in between), whereas the movable body LED of the movable body during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in a second light-emitting mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is the same for both operation confirmation control and presentation operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body emits light in the same manner (white illumination) for advancing and retreating operations in operation confirmation control (the first and second light emission modes are the same), while it emits light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) for advancing and retreating operations in presentation operation control (the first and second light emission modes are different). This makes it possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in operation confirmation control, the light color and lighting mode do not constantly change, like rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to confirm the operation of the movable body.

Note that in Figure 56 (B), rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are shown as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable body LED in performance operation control, but these light emission modes may differ depending on the type of performance.

In addition, the light emission brightness during operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness during performance operation control, which reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the brightness of the movable body LED is set to a low level, preventing the movable body's operation from being difficult to confirm due to glare.

Also, as shown in Figure 56 (B), during cold start processing (during initialization notification) in operation confirmation control, a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound that indicates that initialization notification is being executed, and is a different sound from the effect sound output during other effect operation control. Furthermore, during hot start processing (during recovery or when variable display is stopped), no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R (silent).

In addition, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 (see Figure 55 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period when menu display and volume and light intensity adjustment operations are validly accepted. By operating the selection button 132SG35 while the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed, it is possible to display a specified menu screen (not shown) or adjust the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment are not controlled during the valid operation period. Therefore, even if the light intensity is adjusted using the selection button 132SG35 during operation confirmation control, the light intensity of the various lamps 9a-9g does not change, and they continue to emit light at the brightness currently being used. More specifically, during operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of a movable body that is operating while emitting light in "low brightness" "white" (initial highlighting mode).

Furthermore, during hot start processing, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed, allowing players to quickly adjust to an environment that suits their preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is not possible to display menus or adjust volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed. However, after the operation confirmation control is completed, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, so that if the selection button 132SG35 is operated during the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not brightness adjustment was performed as a result of that operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the display of a fanfare effect or a round effect may begin on a display layer lower than the recovery display 132SG510, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the display of the fanfare effect or round effect may become visible partway through on the lower layer.

Furthermore, if a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of play) is received.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 58 to 60, power outages can occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, or when a jackpot game is being executed. Although not shown in detail, at any time a power outage occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may start up using cold start processing or hot start processing, but the operating mode of each movable body, the light emission mode of each movable body LED, background sound, etc. may differ depending on the time the power outage occurred.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, a description will be given of a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start and a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start. Note that a hot start will be described assuming that the gaming state is in the normal state.

Mode 1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
61 and 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is started from the start timing on the image display device 5. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received a power-on designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in an initialization notification mode from the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, and the output of an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R starts.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable unit LED 9d, the below-board movable unit LED 9e, the above-frame movable unit LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG light up during initialization notification. After turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, or customer waiting demo command, they repeatedly turn on and off in red (light emission).

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing the variable display stopped in the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating (white) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and it returns to illuminating in the initialization notification mode (see Figures 63 (A) to (C)).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A performs a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d ends emitting light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlighting mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreating motion of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a cold start in this feature part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, 4 seconds (4,000 ms) after the completion of the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g cease to emit light in the initialization notification mode, and the output of the initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R ceases, and all initial operation control is completed. In other words, the initial operation control during a cold start in this feature part 132SG is executed for 30 seconds (30,000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 61, after initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, and above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped.

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

In the example shown in Figure 61, the movable object prediction is exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position, vibrating the chance button 631B, outputting a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and causing the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object prediction may be exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, and causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position. Furthermore, the movable object warning may involve the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object warning on the image display device 5, the reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, as well as one or more of the following: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object warning sound) corresponding to the movable object warning from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object warning.

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 62, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these on-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the on-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed (see Figures 63 (D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the movable object preview execution period in the variable display ends and all movable objects have finished moving, the up and down movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the movable object preview execution period, are executed from the timing at which the movement ends (Figures 63 (F)-(J) and 64 (K)-(L)). Note that while the on-board movable object 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable object preview (movable object preview sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 65 and 66, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. After 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 began displaying, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Based on this, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f each begin emitting light in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. Note that no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (silence) from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG emit light in accordance with the background image in the normal state, and after turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command, background image designation command, or customer waiting demo designation command, they emit light in an emission color (e.g., white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability variable state (high probability high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an emission color or emission pattern different from that in the normal state, corresponding to the background image in the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing a stopped variable display according to the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating in an initial highlight mode (white illumination) from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlight mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and the chance button LED 9g changes to its default illumination mode (e.g., white illumination).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes a retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and the illumination returns to a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode at the end of the retreating movement of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Note that the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start in this characteristic part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the chance button 631B begins advancing. Note that, unlike when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not illuminated in the form of an initialization notification, and the speakers 8L, 8R do not output an initialization notification sound. For this reason, the initial operation control during a hot start in this feature part 132SG is such that the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are executed over a period of 26 seconds, as shown in Figures 65 and 66.

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 65, after initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped (silent).

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 66, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these above-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed.

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable bodies ends (initial operation control ends), from the timing at which the operation ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would normally be executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed. Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, this feature unit 132SG operates the on-board movable body 32A (and the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) as initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body preview based on the start-up win is initiated, if the execution period of the movable body preview and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body preview are restricted as a performance operation for the movable body preview. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is initiated based on the start-up win, only the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is restricted as a performance operation for the movable body prediction.

By doing this, when a movable object prediction is executed using a variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable object during initial operation control, the initial operation control is not hindered by the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a performance operation of the movable object prediction, and the player can be notified that a movable object prediction has been executed by the display of a movable object effect on the image display device 5 and by the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in accordance with the movable object prediction.

In this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 66, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body preview is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A as the movable body preview is not executed during the execution period of the movable body preview. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including a winning effect (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the winning effect occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the below-board movable body 32B as the winning effect and the light emission (rainbow flash) of the below-board movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the winning effect may be restricted during the execution period of the winning effect. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the below-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a winning effect based on the light emission pattern of the below-board movable body LED 9e.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the presentation control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of variable display to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a start win occurs during the initial movement of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and variable display based on this start win is initiated, the initial movement of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the initial movement of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the effect control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of the customer waiting demo effect to place each movable body at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a starting winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting winning occurs, the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and the customer waiting demo effect starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 1)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the operation of the movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body prediction overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and after the initial operation control is completed, the operation of the movable body that is the target of the movable body prediction (in the case of this characteristic part 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, b. An example has been given of a form in which the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 67, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the operation of a movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the target movable body (the above-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, if the initial operation control period (operation control of each movable body, illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable body preview, as shown in FIG. 67, from the timing when the control of the initial operation ends to the timing when the movable body preview ends, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the movable body preview, and a sound corresponding to the movable body preview may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the initial operation control period, if the operation control of each movable body has ended but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in accordance with the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output an initialization notification sound, and a movable body preview is executed, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B in accordance with the movable body preview is executed, while the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g do not emit light in accordance with the movable body preview mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in accordance with the movable body preview, thereby making it possible to avoid reducing the dramatic effect of the movable body preview.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 2)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of movable body effects on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R have been described, but as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, In the case where a decision is made to execute a pre-read movable body preview due to multiple occurrences of variable display during the moving body confirmation operation, if the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period for each movable body, only the display of movable body effects is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview, and sound output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview are not executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the subject of the pre-read movable body prediction is executed after the initial operation control is completed, during the execution period of the movable body prediction during the variable display, the image display device 5 displays a movable body effect image, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction, and the speakers 8L, 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction.

By doing this, even if the period for executing the pre-read movable object prediction occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable object, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B as the pre-read movable object prediction will not be executed, making it possible to prevent confusion for the player caused by excessive operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B after the initial operation control has ended.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 3)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which a movable body preview can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the intermediate position as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a movable body preview (second movable body preview) can be executed again after the movable body preview (first movable body preview) as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the movable body preview is executed during the variable display (for example, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is higher when the second movable body preview is executed in addition to the first movable body preview than when only the first movable body preview is executed).

In addition, in cases where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display in this manner, as shown in FIG. 69 as a modified example, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the initial motion control ends (the first movable body announcement may be re-executed). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the second movable body announcement that is currently being executed may be executed with priority, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed, as shown in FIG. 69.

In this way, if the second movable body announcement is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement is given priority, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed even as the first movable body announcement, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the first movable body announcement.

In the example shown in Figure 69, a form in which the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview can be executed during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be the same (for example, the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview both involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be different (for example, the first movable body preview may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the preview position).

(Initial Operation Control Modification 4)
Furthermore, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display as shown in Figure 69, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 70, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement can be controlled not to be executed, while only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control can be controlled to be executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71, when a start winning occurs after the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway due to a loss of synchronism or the like during the execution period of the first movable body prediction, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start as the second movable body prediction during the execution period of the second movable body prediction.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the next movable body preview, the second movable body preview, is executed, so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 5)
In addition, in Figure 69, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body prediction overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body prediction can be executed after the initial operation control ends, while if the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction is within the execution period of the second movable body prediction, priority is given to the execution of the second movable body prediction and the first movable body prediction is not re-executed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 72, if the execution period of the second movable body prediction occurs during the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction, the re-execution of the first movable body prediction may be interrupted at the start of the execution period of the second movable body prediction, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body prediction.

In this way, if the execution period for the second movable body announcement begins during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect caused by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement interfering with the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 6)
Furthermore, in the characteristic section 132SG, an example has been given in which the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position as the initial operation control, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the intermediate position as the performance operation of the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A may be operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, in cases where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the movable body preview performance operation, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, the initial operation is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, whereas when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the on-board movable body preview performance operation, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped in accordance with the process data for the movable body preview, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 73(A) and 73(B) as a modified example, when operating the on-board movable body 32A as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a first period (1000 ms). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the performance position sensor 132SG124, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (when the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position), the reverse rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

73(B), for example, if a step-out or the like occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the presentation position, causing the on-board movable body 32A to stop between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period because the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of the initial operation control), the presentation control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the determination of the operation error. Then, when the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the driving motor 132SG122 is stopped.
74(A) and 74(B), when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance operation of the movable body preview, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body preview. At the same time, the performance position sensor 132SG124 detects the on-board movable body 32A. Then, while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body advance notice process data. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 74 (B), for example, if a step-out occurs while the on-board movable body 32A is moving toward the presentation position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the movable body preview process data until the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end of the second period, the presentation control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body preview process data, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the presentation position sensor 132SG124.

If the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period from the start of initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and from the timing of the operation error determination, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object prediction is executed during gameplay after the initial operation control has ended, even if the operation of the on-board movable object 32A corresponding to the movable object prediction is not performed normally, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as the initial operation control (confirmation operation) is not executed, making it possible to reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of an abnormally performed movable object prediction.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 7)
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned variant example 6, an example was given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A if the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as part of the initial operation control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A as part of the initial operation control, it may not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body preview execution period during variable display, but may only display the effect on the image display device 5, light up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movable body preview.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 75 for variant example 7, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 1000 ms as initial operation control, and is also capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position toward the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, if the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as part of the initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 will initially determine that this is an operation error, and then be able to execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes four initial motion controls and determines that all of them result in an error, it stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion-restricted movable body as a result of the fourth initial motion control (dead end determination). Then, as a special initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 3000 ms, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms.

After that, when a starting winning occurs and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on that starting winning is initiated, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is stored as an operation-restricted movable body, does not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body prediction execution period, and only displays effects on the image display device 5, lights up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As described above, by not operating the on-board movable object 32A that has been determined to be a dead end as a movable object preview, while displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable object preview from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object preview, while minimizing a decrease in the visual effect of the movable object preview.

The configurations described in Modifications 1 to 7 above may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations of Modifications 1 to 7. In other words, Modifications 1 to 7 above can be added or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment in any one of multiple forms, or in a combination of multiple forms.

Form 2 (Initial Operation Control Modification 8)
Furthermore, in the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 16, when variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demo designation command to the presentation control board 12, thereby executing a customer waiting demo presentation on the image display device 5, as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 78, in any of the cases where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), or where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-shortened state), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the customer waiting demo presentation itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) operating as the initial operation control from obstructing the image of the customer waiting demo performance (demo movie shown in Figures 76, 77, and 78) displayed on the image display device 5, which would reduce the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demo performance.

Note that Figures 76, 77, and 78 illustrate an example in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the initial operation of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demo performance may be set to 30 seconds or more, which is the period required for the initial operation of each movable body, thereby providing a sufficient period between the initial operation of each movable body and the customer waiting demo performance, and preventing the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance from being obstructed.

Furthermore, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start. Regardless of whether the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body, thereby preventing the customer waiting demo effect from being interrupted by the movable body operating as an initial operation.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 9)
In the above-described modified example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, but an effect is displayed on the image display device 5, LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are turned on, and sounds corresponding to the movable body notice are output from the speakers 8L, 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 79 as variant example 9, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, when the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, the on-board movable body 32A may not be operated, but effects corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit according to the customer waiting demo performance.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by forcing the on-board movable body 32A to operate excessively as part of the customer waiting demo performance when the on-board movable body 32A is not operating normally, while also reducing the performance effect of the customer waiting demo performance.

Form 3 (power cut just before the big hit fluctuation ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation.

As shown in Figure 80, after the variable display based on the jackpot variable pattern has begun, a combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot is statically displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as when the variable display resumes and a re-lottery effect is executed after the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot is temporarily statically displayed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are statically displayed in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the jackpot variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and control of the jackpot gaming state will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, the power outage recovery command and pattern confirmation command sent based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received, and then the fanfare effect is started based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the jackpot start command.

In more detail, until a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 1000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command and the pattern confirmation command were received, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the output of background music (BGM), are restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and background music (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the jackpot start command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will be displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (e.g., 1500 ms) has elapsed since its start.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is complete, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right-hit notification part) begins.

As shown in Figures 52 (F7) and (F8), in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, right-hit prompt displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area, and a right-hit operation prompt is performed. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the right-hit notification part starts, the movable body operating due to the initial operation will obstruct the visibility of the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, such as right-hit prompt display 132SG431, and there is a risk that the player will not perform the right-hit operation and will suffer a disadvantage.

Furthermore, in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (F7), when the right-hit prompt display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body effect is executed in which the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the effect position. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being executed when the right-hit notification part starts, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating as the initial operation or the right-hit operation prompt effect.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) that involves the operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins. This prevents the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the right-hit notification part in the fanfare effect, and prevents it from becoming difficult to distinguish whether the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion effect is operating.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed, the introductory part period and initial movement period of the fanfare effect are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-hit promotion effect (see Figure 52 (F1) to (F6)).

In addition, during the introductory part of the fanfare effect, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E has occurred, it is possible to display the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type being controlled, and the pre-jackpot type display introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed.In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in Figure 52 (F6), so even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare effect, it is possible to know which type of jackpot has been controlled.

In addition, when the fanfare effect is executed, the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are performing their initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are not operating under operation confirmation control, will light up in a light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) (for example, blue-based colors for a 3R jackpot, red-based colors for a 10R jackpot, etc.), but the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control even during the fanfare effect.

In addition, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an illumination mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is performing its initial operation even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare effect is being performed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), or the duty ratio may be reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlight mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlight mode, making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating due to the operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, the movable body LED of a movable body during initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white light) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Meanwhile, the movable body LED of a movable body operated by performance operation control can emit light in different modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during an advance operation, the movable body LED emits light in a first mode (e.g., a wave mode in which frame LEDs 9a, 9b, attacca LED 9c, movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc., are illuminated in stages from one side to the other at a predetermined cycle), and during a retreat operation, the movable body LED emits light in a second mode (e.g., a flash mode in which the LEDs flash at a fast cycle (e.g., every 30 ms)). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed based on the initial highlight mode (white light) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, the on-board movable body 32A operates in the same operating mode as the initial operation (descending from the origin position to the performance position), and in the initial operation, the movable body LED lights up in an initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and in the movable body performance, it lights up in a mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part that is different from the initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and when the movable body operates in the initial operation, sound output is limited, and in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right-hit notification part is output. In this way, it is easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed, based on the initial highlighting mode and the mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part is the same as the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation may only have some of the same operating mode, or may have all of the same operating mode. Furthermore, the operating modes of the two may all be different.

In addition, when a moving object effect is executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, the moving object can be operated by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the moving object effect can be displayed. If the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, it can be determined to be an action error and the action confirmation control can be performed again. If the action confirmation control has been performed over a specific period of time, the special action can be restricted when the moving object effect is executed, while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the initial action cannot be interfered with by the special action, and the player can be informed by the effect display that the moving object effect has been executed.

Form 4 (power cut immediately after fanfare begins)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect.

As shown in Figure 81, after the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern ends with the static display of a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol confirmation display period ends and the jackpot start command is received by the effect control CPU 120, which starts the jackpot fanfare effect. After a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the fanfare effect begins" refers specifically to the timing immediately after CPU 103 begins controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the effect control CPU 120, upon receiving the jackpot start command transmitted based on CPU 103's recovery, begins the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, since only the power outage recovery command is transmitted upon CPU 103's recovery after hot start startup, the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether or not it is in the fanfare period) until it receives the jackpot opening command. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a restoration display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power is being restored (see Figure 97), and the fact that the power is being restored is announced until the next command is received, that is, for the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, operation confirmation control is initiated during the remaining fanfare period announcing that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the fanfare period ends and the round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the large prize opening is open is received for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first time has started, and so the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music that will be output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner that indicates that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the remaining period of the fanfare, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the effect operation control (movable body effect in the win/lose button effect).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when the effect operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

Furthermore, upon receiving a command indicating that the large prize opening has opened, effects corresponding to round play (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music played during a jackpot) are initiated. Specifically, during the round play period, the large prize opening is open for an extended period, allowing a large number of game balls to enter. This period is more advantageous to the player than the fanfare period or ending period of a jackpot, and therefore a lively round play effect is provided using images, lights, and sounds. However, by ending the operation confirmation control before the round play effect corresponding to this round play begins, players can enjoy the round play effect without having to worry about the moving body performing its initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the fanfare effect period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, and upper frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). It is also possible to perform operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays a common recovery indicator 132SG510 in both cases: if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on. However, for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will not be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. However, if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences, as long as the display mode of at least the recovery indicator 132SG510 is the same, the display modes of the other indicators do not need to be the same.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed at the same time as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, only the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed when the power is turned on after a power outage, and it may not be necessary to determine whether or not to display the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and the power is then turned on, and whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode encourages a right-hit operation when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, such as the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, that are not performing their initial operations, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing initial operation to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), it controls the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies to light up at a lower brightness than the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (see Figure 56 (B)), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music played during a jackpot), so even if the fanfare effect was playing before the power outage, it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the operation mode of each movable body under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of each movable body under performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (power cut just before the fanfare ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect will be described with reference to Figs. 82 to 84. Fig. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect. Fig. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation confirmation control is executed during a fanfare effect. Fig. 84 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 82, after a power outage occurs just before the jackpot fanfare effect that started upon receiving a jackpot start command ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the fanfare effect" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving a jackpot start command, in other words, the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the time it starts controlling the jackpot until it starts controlling the round of play (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command sent when the CPU 103 recovers and the large prize opening open command corresponding to the first time. Based on this, throughout the round of play, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot, the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner suggesting music selection, and background music (BGM) will be output in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot.

When started with a hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, approximately 1000 ms), the CPU 103 will receive a power outage recovery command based on its recovery, and then after the remaining time of 1000 ms has elapsed, the first corresponding command to specify that the large prize slot is open will be received. During the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and background sound (BGM) will not be output. The movable body LEDs may also emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery period.

Furthermore, after operation confirmation control of each movable body begins with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control ends before the opening control of the large prize opening for that first game ends and the next round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, after receiving a command specifying after the large prize opening has been opened in the first round, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command specifying while the large prize opening is open in the second round. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will then light up in an open mode to emphasize the opening for a predetermined period of time, and then light up in a mode corresponding to the jackpot music that is output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a mode indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a mode corresponding to the opening.

In this way, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but they will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control. This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the event that the power is cut off and then turned back on just before the fanfare performance ends can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening for the first round of play ends, so even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the special prize opening opening control period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the special prize opening opening control for the first play ends (see Figure 52 (F8) to (F9)).

Also, as shown in Figure 83 (A), in round play where the large prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, images for the round effect are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball will be shot is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and round play-related displays related to the round game, such as the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, are displayed on the upper side of the display screen.

Also, as shown in Figure 83 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support section 32b can overlap, the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a and part of the support section 32b can overlap, and the number of winning balls display 132SG452 and the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable units 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained with reference to Figures 84(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 84 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 83 (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the presentation section 32a overlaps in front of the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Furthermore, the support section 32b overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 83 (B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because part of the consecutive wins/total balls dispensed display 132SG454 overlaps with the presentation section 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the consecutive wins/total balls dispensed display 132SG454. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, and number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 83 (C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 84 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

As shown in Figure 84 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, during round play, when the big prize opening is opened and the player has an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the prize by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other big prize information displays.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 84 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 83 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figures 83 (D) and (E)). Furthermore, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

As shown in Figure 84 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, while the initial operation is being performed, the under-board movable body 32B does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.), so it is visible to the player.

In other words, during round play, when the jackpot opening gives the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the jackpot by operating the right hand while the jackpot opening is open, which could put the player at a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is obscured for a shorter period of time by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B compared to other jackpot information displays, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body undergoing initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not undergoing initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies undergoing initial operation even during round play.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing its initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing its initial operation lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance).However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing its initial operation even during round play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends is the same as the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. is not limited to this, and in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and lighten the load.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of the first round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play.

As shown in Figure 85, after the jackpot fanfare has ended, a power outage occurs immediately after the round performance begins based on the reception of a command specifying that the jackpot opening is in progress, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state resumes.

"Immediately after the round effect has started" specifically includes the timing immediately after the effect control CPU 120 starts the round effect based on the receipt of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play has started, in other words, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the opening of the large prize opening in the round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after the hot start, only the power outage restoration command is sent upon recovery of the CPU 103. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether it is currently in a round of play) until it receives the command to restore the first large prize opening. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to a restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) is in a state corresponding to a restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, a restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97 ), displaying the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification is provided until the next command, the command to restore the first large prize opening, is received, i.e., until the first round of play ends.

Furthermore, operation confirmation control is initiated during the first round of play when it is announced that the power outage is being restored, and is completed before the end of the first round of play. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from an open state to a closed state is received, followed by a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from a closed state to an open state is received, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first round of play has ended and the second round of play has begun. As a result, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music output during a jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during that round of play, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then turned on immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening during the first round of play has begun, the operation confirmation control can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening during that first round of play ends. This means that even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the special prize opening in the first round of play has begun and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the opening control period of the special prize opening and the initial operation period for one round of play are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in that first round of play ends (see Figure 52 (F9)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the round performance (music played during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on, even if the round performance was in progress before the power outage.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10) has started, the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) has started as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power outage just before the end of the first round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play.

As shown in Figure 86, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the big prize slot is open, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big prize game state resumes.

More specifically, "immediately before the round effect ends" refers to the timing immediately before the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving the large prize opening open command indicating that the first round of play has begun ends, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the control of opening the large prize opening in one round of play ends (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the first round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the first large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the first round interval, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery in progress display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the first round interval ends.

After that, when a second command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round of play and ends before the end of the second round of play period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the first round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round of play that follows that round, and the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period for the special prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in the second round of play is completed (see Figure 52 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10), the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) began as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 8 (power interruption immediately after the start of a special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in all rounds of play is 0.5 seconds, whereas if the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in the third round of play is 30 seconds (see Figure 8), and during this special round interval period, a promotion effect (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in Figure 87, after a power outage occurs just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the third round of jackpots C to E" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round of jackpots initiated by the presentation control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the large prize opening opening command indicating that the third round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play (for example, the timing immediately before control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play ends (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), or the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the third large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the third special round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the third special round interval ends.

After that, when the fourth command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control begins during the third special round interval period and ends before the end of the third special round interval period. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the third special round interval, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the third round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)).

In the above-mentioned form 8, an example was given in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may also be set after the opening control of the large prize opening in a round of play other than the third has ended.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on, the effect control CPU 120 will display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and can execute an interval effect when the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during one round of play.In the interval effect, the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c, can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (interval effect), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, which are performing their initial operation, can be made to light up in an initial highlighting manner (white light). Then, if a power outage occurs at the same time the big prize opening is controlled to a closed state (special round interval) during the third round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that have not yet performed their initial operation (the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the third special round interval control, and the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval presentation (music during a big win). This makes it possible to notify that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage recovery command and a command to specify after the third large prize opening are received upon recovery of the CPU 103, during the third special round interval period, the image display device 5 displays the recovery indicator 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned on (for example, turned off) in a state corresponding to the recovery state, and the background music (BGM) is turned on in a state corresponding to the recovery state. In the example shown, the recovery state continues until the fourth command specifying that the large prize slot is open is received (for example, silent), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval presentation is made up of an introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control be performed before the result notification part starts. This makes it possible to avoid the movable body performing the initial operation interfering with the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a movable body presentation using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion presentation in the result notification part (see Figure 53 (F24)), and when the movable body presentation is executed, it is possible to control the presentation operation in a manner that is common to the operation manner of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under operation confirmation control, and it is preferable that sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates under operation confirmation control, and that when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body presentation, a sound corresponding to the movable body presentation is output. In this way, it is easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 53 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during a round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that begins when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If a promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation can prevent the operation confirmation control from being interfered with, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Furthermore, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion effect (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and in performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful promotion in the promotion effect), emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advancement operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended is an example in which the under-board movable body 32B rises to perform an advancement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various movable body effects can be applied in addition to the advancement effect described above.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the game state after the jackpot ends in a probability variable state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) based on the detection of the game ball passing through the second count switch 132SG024 during a specific round of play during a jackpot, as shown in Figure 88, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period may be such that the under-board movable body 32B rises, thereby performing a V promotion effect to notify the player that the jackpot in question is a probability variable jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends does not become a probability variable state).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88, if this V promotion effect is composed of an introductory part and a result notification part that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control ends before the result notification part of the V promotion effect starts.

Form 9 (power interruption immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a promotion effect (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize opening has ended in the third round of play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect described above may also be executable during a specific round of play period (for example, the period during which the opening control and closing control of the large prize opening are being performed in the third round of play), as shown in Figure 89.

In this case, the promotion effect is composed of an introduction part (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figures 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot A in a promotion-failed manner, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot B in a promotion-successful manner. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect be executable when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot (first hit).

Then, as shown in Figure 89, after a power outage occurs just before the start of the third round of jackpots A and B, which executes the promotion effects, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

The timing immediately before the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed refers, in more detail, to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the second round of play has started; in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the second large prize opening is about to begin. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the second round interval is about to begin, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to the state of recovery (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to the state of recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the third large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the second round interval ends.

After that, when the third command to specify that the large prize opening is open is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for an initial predetermined period of time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize opening during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round interval period (during recovery) or the third round of play, and ends before the part announcing the results of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the effect operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round interval period or the third round of play, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (promotion effect). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the second round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 9 illustrates an example in which the promotion effect is executed during the third round of play, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect may be executed during a round of play other than the third.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing an initial operation even during the promotion performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the initially operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body will end before the operation prompt part of the introductory part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, begins, so the visibility of the operation prompt effect in the introductory part will not be obstructed by the movable body operating under operation confirmation control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 ensures that the operating mode (the mode in which the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position) is the same when performing initial operation and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance; when performing initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlight mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited; and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode), while sound effects in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the initial operation or the promotion performance is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 53 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round presentation in which the promotion presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation does not interfere with the operation confirmation control, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Mode 10 (power outage just before the end of the final round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play.

As shown in Figure 90, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the 10th round of play (final round) for jackpots B, D, and E has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

More specifically, "immediately before the end of the round effect" refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect initiated by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the 10th round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the final round of play (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the 10th round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the 10th jackpot opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the 10th round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97). This notification continues until the next command, the jackpot end command, is received, i.e., until the 10th round interval ends.

After that, when a jackpot end command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g and attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the end of the ending period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the 10th round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light). However, since these emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), power consumption is reduced when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from becoming too bright to be easily confirmed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the tenth and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form 10 illustrates examples of operation for jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period. Furthermore, the final round is not limited to the above-mentioned 3 or 10 rounds, and can be modified in various ways.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies performing an initial operation even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body that is performing the initial operation will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will emit light at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition to the movable body LEDs, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are also designed to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation confirmation control period than when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). This makes it possible to reduce power consumption and lighten the load when the power is turned on without reducing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (power outage immediately after the beginning of the ending performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance.

As shown in Figure 91, after the round interval presentation ends in the 10th round (final round) of jackpots B, D, and E, a power outage occurs immediately after the ending presentation begins based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the ending presentation has begun" specifically includes the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 has begun the introductory part of the ending presentation based on the receipt of the jackpot end command, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has begun control of the ending period (for example, immediately after the completion of control over the closure of the jackpot opening in the final round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, only the power outage restoration command is received as the CPU 103 recovers. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (whether it is currently in the ending period, etc.) until it receives the next command (e.g., a customer waiting demo command). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 will be displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that the power outage is being restored will be notified until the next command is received.

After that, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off), and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during presentation operation control (movable body presentation in the win/lose button presentation).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while also preventing the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm their operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period.

In the above-mentioned form 10, examples of operation were given for jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed during the ending period before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)), in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified.

Also, while the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) were explained above as an example, the same operation applies to the ending periods for jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, and upper-frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending period, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable bodies performing initial operations. However, this light-emitting mode (turning off) is not used to control the performance operation (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). By doing this, it is possible to notify that recovery is underway when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms 12 and 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time reduction will be explained based on Figures 92 and 93. Figure 92 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 93 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 92 (A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a second background display 132SG320 depicting a night cityscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing off against each other. In addition, a presentation mode display 132SG221 consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. Additionally, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a remaining time reduction indicator 132SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 685) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display number controlled to the low probability/high base state, and in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 consisting of the text "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, a consecutive win count/total ball count indicator 132SG454 is displayed, which indicates the number of consecutive jackpot wins and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive wins.

In addition, the display area 5SL at the top left of the screen displays small symbols corresponding to the first and second pending memory counts and decorative symbols, and on the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory are arranged vertically; for example, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013, and four second pending displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second pending display area 132SG012, corresponding to the second pending memory count being 4.

As shown in Figure 92 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the second hold display area 132SG012, which displays the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and the second hold display 132SG002, is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b of the above-board movable body 32A can overlap, the display area 5SL, which displays the second hold memory count display, is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a and support part 32b can overlap, and the effect mode display 132SG221 is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201 are displayed in a position where they can overlap with the effect part 32c and part of the support part 32d of the below-board movable body 32B.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 93(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 93(A) and (B), the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 are omitted.

As shown in Figure 93 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following: right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 93 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the effect portion 32a overlaps the front side of the second pending memory count display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see Figure 92 (B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the second pending memory count display becomes visible, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 92 (C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible; however, because the presentation unit 32a overlaps the front side of part of the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the second hold display 132SG002. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second hold memory count display, consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the presentation unit 32a or the support unit 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 92 (D)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 93 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 93 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, or remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 92 (D)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), or presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see these displays. However, because the presentation part 32c and support part 32d overlap with part of the front side of the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 92 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).As a result, the visibility of the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) and second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), which have a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving mode where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) or second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) and second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) maintain visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, while the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving mode, the display mode of the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and second reserved display 132SG002 can change even during the time-saving mode due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices. Therefore, the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being obstructed compared to the unchanged consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454.

In addition, it is preferable that the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 due to the initial operation be larger than the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) due to the initial operation.By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second pending memory, which may change, from being obstructed more than the visibility of the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, which does not change, due to the on-board movable body 32A or the on-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to the predetermined performance operation control in the operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position), if a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the below-board movable body 32B is displaying jackpot information regarding the jackpot. If the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is approximately the same as or longer than the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454), the movable body 32A above the board and the movable body 32B below the board may be operated in such a way that the time during which the movable body 32A above the board overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the movable body 32B below the board overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).

For example, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can be configured to move from the origin position during initial operation to a position that overlaps with the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, but can be configured to move to an intermediate position and then return to the origin position. This prevents the movable body operating during initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start and then restored, the initial operation of each movable body is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. This makes it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on play than the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002, will be obstructed.

Furthermore, in embodiments 12 and 20, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the second hold memory count (display area 5SL), the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was explained. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Form 13 (power interruption immediately before the end of the change before the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the button notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the button notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 94, after a variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute a reach preview, which suggests whether a reach state will occur, and a button preview, which prompts the player to press a button to determine whether a reach state will occur. The variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the variation (background) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the button preview are notified.

As shown in Figures 50 (D6) and (D7), the button preview (result notification part) notifies the player of whether or not a reach state has been reached as a result of the player operating the chance button 631B. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as the reach state being reached, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation that results in the button preview, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button preview (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the visibility of the button preview (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notification is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the button notification (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the button notification (result notification part) starts (see Figures 50 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a specified variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more. Thereafter, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is determined that a button preview will be executed in that variable display. If it is determined that a button preview will be executed at the start of the variable display, the time from when the variable display starts to when the result notification part of the button preview is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the button preview is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button preview (result notification part) begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a button preview is executed is a specific variation pattern, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information related to the specific variation pattern (e.g., a winning presentation designation command specifying the execution of a button preview) is transmitted. Based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the button preview begins.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a button preview is executed will be used, a winning performance designation command (specific information) specifying that this is a specific variable pattern (with button preview) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with button warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, a light gathering effect (light gathering at the center of the screen to form the button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect. Because the light gathering effect uses a large portion of the screen (an image that starts from the edge of the screen), it can overlap with the execution period of the initial action, providing an appropriate indication that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in the action promotion effect, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off in 150 ms cycles), and the illumination pattern in this illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that highlights the moving body performing the initial operation.

In addition, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts (to check the vibration motor 635E and notify that the initial operation has started), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B together with the display of a button image in the operation promotion effect (to indicate the expected degree of change), and at least one of the vibration duration, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed.

Form 14 (power outage immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 95, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute the start preview, and the variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the specified display change in the start preview, and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start preview begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the start-up warning are reported.

As shown in Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a), the start notice (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the pending display has changed and what color it has changed to. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the movable body, which moves due to the initial movement, will interfere with the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the pending display has changed, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the start notice (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation for which the start notice is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the start of the start notice (result notification part) (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, a decision is made to execute a start notice for that variable display. If a decision is made to execute a start notice at the start of a variable display, the time from when the variable display begins to when the result notification part of the start notice is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the start notice (result notification part) is executed, the start notice (result notification part) is executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part begins, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a start warning is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a start warning) may be transmitted, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part begins as a result of the start warning.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a start warning is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that it is a specific variable pattern (with start warning) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with warning at start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with an operating period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (e.g., 5 seconds).

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation begins, and also to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold turns red in Figure 48 (B6) (for entertainment purposes), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the color changes to red. If the button vibration when the color changes to red is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and it is also possible to make a button vibration warning (indicating a different level of expectation than the warning at the start) as shown in Figure 48 (B1), with the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration warning differing in at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during vibration. If a button vibration warning is made during the initial operation, the button vibration warning is limited, and limited button vibration is made after the initial operation has finished.

Form 15 (power interruption just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed.

As shown in Figure 96, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display will begin in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo-consecutive) in which the pseudo-consecutive preview indicating whether the variable display will resume will be executed and the determined preview effect (movable object preview), and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable object LED 9d, lower board movable object LED 9e, upper frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the background (variation), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (variation) will begin. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the background (variation) will begin.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each moving body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each moving body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the pseudo-continuous preview are announced.

As shown in Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9), the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the variable display has resumed. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo-continuous prediction is executed, the initial operation period and the period from the start of the variation to the start of the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) starts (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, the execution of the movable object prediction is determined together with the execution of the pseudo consecutive prediction, so the movable object prediction is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display began. However, since operation confirmation control is being executed, as explained in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B at the timing of the execution of the movable object prediction may be restricted, and only the effect display and sound effect corresponding to the movable object prediction may be output (see Figure 66). Also, in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B are executed after the initial operation is completed, but since the pseudo consecutive prediction (introduction part) has begun, the performance operations of the movable object prediction are restricted, but the performance operations of the movable object prediction may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, it is decided that a pseudo-consecutive preview will be executed in that variable display.If it is decided to execute a pseudo-consecutive preview at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the pseudo-consecutive preview is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, approximately 20 seconds).Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before which the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) will be executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) is sent, and based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that this is the specific variable pattern (with pseudo consecutive announcement) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-consecutive warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

Also, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the one in which a moving object announcement or pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and then the power is turned on, the performance action in the moving object announcement that was executed or limited during the initial operation will be performed during the introductory part of the pseudo consecutive performance (a short initial operation is performed in Figure 49 (C4), and the performance action in the limited moving object announcement is performed in Figure 49 (C5)).

Form 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays when recovering from normal fluctuations)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation will be explained with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 98 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), if a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

If, while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, the game ball is detected by a detection switch such as the gate switch 21 located in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, and it is detected that the player is playing with a right-handed shot, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a left-handed shot promotion display 132SG530 in the upper right corner of the display screen, consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed shot" and a left-pointing arrow, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left-hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 98(A) and (B). Figures 98(A) and (B) show the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, and also allow comparison with the relationship with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figures 84 and 93), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in Figure 98 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 97 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, part of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b overlap in front of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figure 97(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the left hit prompt display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the effect position, part of the effect portion 32a overlaps in front of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 97(C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 98 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 98 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, recovery in progress display 132SG510, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 97 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the left hit prompt display 132SG530, the player can see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figures 97 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during normal variable display, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 only when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and does not overlap for the period during which the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the presentation position or origin position, so the visibility of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 98 (A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430. However, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed during time-saving states and jackpot game states that are advantageous to the player. If the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate a win by performing a right-hit operation and suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains better visibility than the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can display the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and output a left-hit prompt sound as a left-hit operation prompt notification. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a cold start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is restricted. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a hot start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is output. In this way, it is possible to provide an appropriate left-hit operation prompt notification that takes into account the situation at power-on.

In addition, in normal operation, a left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued when a gaming ball enters the gate switch 21, etc., located on the right gaming area side. In normal operation, a special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued, which has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification, based on a specific number of gaming balls (e.g., five) entering the gate switch 21. The special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued for a longer period than the period (e.g., 20 seconds) during which the movable body operates due to operation confirmation control. This prevents the special left-hit operation promotion notification from being obstructed by a movable body that operates due to operation confirmation control.

Forms 17 and 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained with reference to Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 100 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 99 (A), if a power outage occurs during a round of play in the jackpot game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

In addition, if a control command indicating a jackpot game state, such as an open command or an after-open command, is received along with a power outage recovery command, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable bodies 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained with reference to Figures 100(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 100 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 99 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 99 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 100 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 100 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 99 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it reaches the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 99 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 83 (A)) where information corresponding to the round play (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, thereby making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to round play (for example, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball count display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figure 83 (A)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it is superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, the time that the under-board movable body 32B spends in the presentation position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 during initial operation may be shorter than the presentation operation of the movable body presentation. For example, when a power outage occurs while the variable display is not being executed and then the power is turned on, the time T1 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation and the time T2 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during the movable body presentation are preferably longer than the time T3 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the variable display is being executed (T1 = T2 > T3). In this way, a movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during an advantageous state is not superimposed on the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not the machine is undergoing recovery.

Form 19 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction will be explained with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards.

As shown in Figure 101 (A), if a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving mode and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and notifying the user that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

As shown in Figure 101 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap (see Figure 101 (C)).

As shown in Figure 101 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of a symbol confirmation command, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. As the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the support portion 32b first overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation portion 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 101 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 101 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the front side, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 101 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the specific area (see Figure 101 (A)) in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 101 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, remaining time-saving display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed.As a result, when the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends and the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the presentation mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, in embodiments 17 to 19, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Forms 21 to 24 (Start-up order when initial operation control is executed)
In the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or hot start), an example is given in which the special symbol lamps that constitute the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are simultaneously lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the special symbol lamps are lit when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the timing at which each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 102 (A) to (G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 first begins to be displayed on the image display device 5. After a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds, as in Figures 61 and 62) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 began to be displayed, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 102 (A) and (B)).

At this timing, the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized again, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their power-off states. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and no normal win has occurred and then power is cut off and then power is started by a hot start, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then power is cut off during the interval period and then power is started by a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 are again in their closed states. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and then power is cut off and then power is started by a hot start while a normal win has occurred, the variable prize ball device 6B is in its open state. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then power is cut off and then power is started by a hot start while the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is open, the special variable prize ball device 7 is in its open state.

After these special chart lamps light up and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are in their power-off state, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

After this, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up in an initialization notification manner, and the speakers 8L, 8R start to output an initialization notification sound. After that, as initial operation control, confirmation operations are performed for the upper panel movable body 32A, lower panel movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B (Figures 102 (D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and starts up by a cold start while in normal mode or time-saving mode and no variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 103(A), after power is cut off, a power-on command is first sent from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command) three seconds after the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At this time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B to begin lighting up, and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to their initial state (closed state).

At this time, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B initially light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss or in the manner in which the variable display result is different from any other variable display result.

In addition, after these special chart lamps are lit and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are reset to their initial states, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power-on command (five seconds have passed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600, replacing the startup preparation display 132SG500. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins displaying, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin emitting light in an initialization notification mode, and confirmation operations are performed for the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations.

By doing this, the startup preparation display 132SG500 makes it easier for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to recognize that power has been turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it also enables players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to confirm that the special symbol lamp is lit, which has a significant impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the operation of checking each moving part.

Furthermore, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down in a normal state or a time-saving state with a variable display being executed and is then started up with a hot start, as shown in Figure 103 (B), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 begins to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, which starts the lighting of the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B (and the variable display of special symbols by the flashing of the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, which returns the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to the state they were in before the power was cut off. Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins to display the recovery in progress display 132SG510, replacing the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, the various LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up, and the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are checked as initial operations.

In addition, if the variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and a new variable display starts, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops, as shown in Figure 103 (B).

In other words, if the variable display of the special symbol is resumed when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 with a state in which the number of pending memories is 0, and the resumed variable display stops while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, when a new variable display begins due to a new start winning, the launch preparation display 132SG500 will switch to displaying the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in Figure 103 (B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed and the variable display is in progress, confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started as an initial operation.

As in Figure 103 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in the normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display that was running before the power was cut off does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, then as shown in Figure 104 (A), the image display device 5 will start displaying the recovery display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and then the variable display will stop (at the same time, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end).

Also, as in Figure 103 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, and the variable display that was running before the power was cut off stops while the image display device 5 is displaying the start-up preparation display 132SG500, if there is pending memory when the variable display stops, as shown in Figure 104 (B), a new variable display will start based on the pending memory while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and after the variable display stops. In this case, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 103(A), (B) and 104(A), (B), the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B will not be initiated when a background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5, so it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by the background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 104 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation are simultaneously started. The explanation is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation may start at different times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in normal or time-saving mode and the variable display is running, if the power is cut off and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (more precisely, for two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage restoration command from the CPU 103), and the initial confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B can be started while the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed.

In addition, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in a manner corresponding to the restoration in progress may continue even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended, and may be ended, for example, when the confirmation operation for each movable body has ended.

In the example shown in Figure 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off and hot started while the variable display is running in the normal state or time-saving state, if the variable display stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and a new variable display does not start, as shown in Figure 105(B), the image display device 5 will begin displaying a background image corresponding to the variable display being stopped from the time the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will be lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

In addition, the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105 describe a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start mode after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving, that is, when variable display can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power outages can also occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is in a jackpot gaming state in which variable display is not executed.

When a pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down during a jackpot game and starts up in a hot start mode, if the power outage occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open due to a round of play, as shown in Figure 106 (A), after the power outage, the CPU 103 first sends a power outage recovery command to the presentation control CPU 120 (the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command) three seconds after the start of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are powered up, which causes the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B to light up (and the special symbol lamps to flash to display the special symbols variably), and the solenoids 81, 82 are powered up, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state they were in before the power outage. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open.

Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage restoration command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 will begin displaying the restoration in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will begin lighting up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out.

While the recovery display 132SG510 is still displayed, confirmation operations are performed on the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operations.

After the initial operation is complete and the round of play ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in response to the end of the round of play. Then, in response to the start of the next round of play, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 begins to display an image corresponding to the round of play, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begins to light up in a manner corresponding to the round of play.

In the example of Figure 106 (A), a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends after the start preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 106 (B), when a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and the next round of play begins (special variable winning ball equipment In the case where the device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state and then to an open state again, even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has finished, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be lit in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress until the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation are completed.

106(A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during a round of play) during a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations for SG101 and chance button 631B are not executed, it is possible to prevent the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) from lighting up in a manner appropriate to the round of play, which would interfere with the work of checking whether the confirmation operations for above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being executed correctly.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105, we have described a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving. However, as shown in Figure 107 (A), if the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of Figure 107 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), If a game ball enters ball device 6B, that is, if a second start-up win occurs while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying, the image display device 5 will display the recovery display 132SG510 until the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the second start-up win is stopped, and while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, confirmation operations for the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B will be started as initial operation control.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 107 (A), the variable winning ball device 6B was in an open state before the power outage occurred, and a gaming ball entered the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed (in the example of Figure 107 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ended). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable display of normal symbols was being executed before the power outage occurred, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a hot start, and a normal symbol win occurred on the image display device 5 while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed, as shown in Figure 107 (B), the initial operation control can be performed by controlling the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state from the timing before the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B begin.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figures 107(A) and 107(B), it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example of Figure 107 (A), after a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 may also be switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 at the time when a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

Furthermore, Figures 106 (A) and (B) illustrate a case where the power is interrupted when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming state and starts up in a hot start, with the power interruption occurring when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 108, in a case where the power is interrupted when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start. As a result, while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in FIG. 108, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying), if the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again for the next round of play, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 should begin after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figure 108, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In addition, in form 3, a portion of the fanfare effect that starts while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed is invisible to the player, and when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the fanfare effect can be seen from the continuation of the portion that was not visible. In contrast, in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that started while the launch preparation display 132SG500 was displayed is made invisible because a restoration indicator is displayed. In other words, the variable display is intentionally made invisible because important information related to whether or not a jackpot will be hit must not be inaccurate. However, the fanfare effect is intentionally made visible because it includes an operation direction notification part that encourages right-hand hits, which are necessary for subsequent jackpot play.

Form 25 (Relationship between initialization notification image and initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. Figure 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control. Figure 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up using the cold start process after a power outage, a power-on command, a game status background command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo command are transmitted based on the CPU 103 being restored after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up timing and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5. Then, based on receiving these effect control commands, the presentation control CPU 120 determines that power-on with initialization has occurred (started up using the cold start process), and causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g to illuminate in a predetermined initialization notification manner, and begins outputting an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (see Figures 61 and 62).

In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is hidden and the first background display 132SG310 is displayed based on the game status background designation command (normal background). However, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization, the initialization notification display 132SG600 as described in Figure 102 is displayed when the initialization notification begins.

In this case, after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, the initial operation is initiated by the operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. This allows the user to quickly confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control, and prevents the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control from interfering with the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has ended.

In addition, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) until operation check control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation check control being performed immediately after power-on with initialization.

Furthermore, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (e.g., 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period has ended. Even if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not initiated. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if the execution period of the variable display that begins upon the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Furthermore, after power-on without initialization (startup using hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may not be displayed, and the background may be displayed based on the game status background designation command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing), the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, followed by initial operation via operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109, if a start-up win occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, while as shown in FIG. 110, if a start-up win occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, as described in embodiment 1, not only the performance operation due to the movable object preview but also the output of effect displays and sound effects are restricted during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, and the performance operation due to the movable object preview is carried out after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended.

Mode 26 (Operation Confirmation Control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the presentation control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figures 111 to 14. Figure 111 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. Figure 112 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A) to (J), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up through cold start processing (or hot start processing) first causes the chance button 631B to move upward from the origin position to the performance position and stop there (see Figure 57(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops there (see Figure 57(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 57(E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), after which the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(G)). Next, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), after which the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body can be changed in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 111(A), when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position, the distance L1 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter than the distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the performance position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the performance position, as shown in Figure 111(B).

In this modified example, the on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B, which have the above-mentioned relationship, may be configured such that during operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A simultaneously begin moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see Figure 111 (B)). Thereafter, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 111 (D)), so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap.

By doing this, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) can operate normally in the presentation position, and that the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) can operate normally in the presentation position, thereby simplifying the confirmation process, and at the same time making it possible to individually confirm the movement of the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) from the presentation position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position to when it stops at the performance position, the other starts moving from the origin position to the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of the form in which the movable body below the board 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position during the win/lose button performance, but it is also possible to use a first movable body (e.g., the movable body above the board 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., the movable body below the board 32B). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(A), in the win/lose button effect, when the operation prompt effect is being executed during the valid operation period or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the above-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 112(B)), and the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position to lift the above-board movable body 32A, so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B do not overlap (see FIG. 112(C)). After that, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the effect position to the origin position so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap (see FIG. 112(D)).

For the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap) in this manner, it is preferable that the initial operation be performed in the operation confirmation control in an operation mode that does not include the performance operations described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an advance operation separately). This makes it possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see Figure 2) is provided that can detect when a second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is positioned at the performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A) positioned at the performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started in the operation confirmation control, return control is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101), thereby enabling the operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Mode 27 (operation confirmation control)
Also, as shown in Figure 57, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a are capable of performing initial operations, and when the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position (see Figures 57 (G) to (I)).

By doing this, the first movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position during the operation confirmation control indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) when the first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) from being overlooked.

Specifically, frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they can be touched by players. Therefore, if they fail to operate normally, just like board-side movable bodies such as the board-top movable body 32A and the board-bottom movable body 32B, and the board-side movable body is forced to start over from its initial operation, the board-side movable body can be intentionally put into a dead-end state (see Figure 113 (A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 113 (B), if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally, the board-side movable body is retracted, and an error image regarding the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame-side movable body", which is erased once the frame-side movable body is able to operate normally) is displayed on the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally even after performing the initial operation (frame-side movable body only; operating mode is the same as when the power is turned on) upon error determination up to five times (more times than for the board-side movable body, and the conditions leading up to the dead end are stricter in consideration of the ease of tampering), only the frame-side movable body can be transitioned to a dead end state.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see Figure 2) is provided that can detect when a second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at a performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) positioned at a performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

In addition, while the above embodiment uses a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed and circulatable inside the gaming machine, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request from a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of gaming balls used in play is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, players are awarded scores or points rather than gaming balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the gaming value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when the variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

In addition, when the gaming medium passes through the starting gate or gate during the game, a process for storing a random number value and a win/loss determination process are executed. In this case, various settings are required for setting the range of the random number value and the win/loss determination process. Specific examples are explained below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 114 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are shot into this gaming area by being launched from a predetermined ball launching device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming board 2. In the example shown in Figure 114, they are provided on the right side of the gaming area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can each variably display special symbols as multiple types of special identification information. Special symbols are also called "special symbols." The variably displayed special symbols are also called "special symbol games." Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are constructed using 7-segment LEDs or the like. Special symbols are represented by numbers "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-," or any other lighting pattern. Special symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols. For other symbols, such as performance symbols, small symbols, and regular symbols, "variable display" also refers to the variable display of multiple types of symbols. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply "variation." Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, and deforming, enlarging, or reducing one or more symbols. Variations may also include flashing a symbol. In the variable display of special symbols or regular symbols, multiple types of special or regular symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of any symbol, a predetermined symbol is ultimately displayed as a static display. The static display is also called a derived display, or simply "derivation." The symbol that finally stops and is displayed in a variable display is also called the final stop symbol or the confirmed symbol. The symbol that finally stops in a special symbol game is also called the confirmed special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol change time, which is the time during which the special symbol changes, and is also called the variable display time. The special symbol change time can be set to a different time depending on the change pattern of the special symbol, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern." The special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game." A special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2. In the example shown in Figure 114, it is provided on the left side of the gaming area. The normal symbol display 20 can variably display normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Normal symbols are also called "normal symbols." The variable display of normal symbols is also called "normal symbol game." The normal symbol display 20 is constructed using 7-segment LEDs, etc. Normal symbols are represented by numbers "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-," or other arbitrary lighting patterns. Normal symbols may include patterns in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or patterns in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stopping symbol in a normal symbol game is also called a confirmed normal symbol. The display result of the normal symbol is also called a normal symbol display result. The execution time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed in a normal symbol game is also called a normal symbol fluctuation time. The normal symbol variation time can be set to a different time depending on the normal symbol variation pattern, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), organic EL (electroluminescence), dot matrix LED, projector and screen, 3D image projection device, or any other device. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various types of effect images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to effect images, and can also display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of effect symbols can be performed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The effect symbols are display symbols that show numbers or the like, and are multiple types of decorative identification information different from special symbols and normal symbols. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 114, effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left," "center," and "right" are provided, respectively. Variable display of effect symbols is performed, for example, by scrolling or updating the effect symbols vertically in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. Synchronization of the variable display may be achieved as long as the timing at which the symbol change begins and the timing at which the change ends and the symbol is finally displayed stationary are common for different types of symbols. The final stopped symbol in the variable display of effect symbols is also referred to as the confirmed effect symbol, confirmed decorative symbol, or confirmed decorative symbol. The variable display of the effect symbols is synchronized with the first and second special symbol games, so the variable display time of the effect symbols is the same as the special symbol variation time.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area capable of displaying effect images corresponding to pending displays and active displays. A pending display is a display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed and is on hold. An active display is a display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays that correspond to variable displays. A display area that displays a pending display is also referred to as a pending display area. A display area that displays an active display is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in Figure 114, there are provided a first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory number by the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal symbol display device 20 shown in Figure 114, there is provided a normal symbol reserve indicator 25C, composed of multiple LEDs. The normal symbol reserve indicator 25C displays the normal symbol reserve number by the number of lit LEDs. The normal symbol reserve number is the reserve memory number corresponding to the normal symbol game.

Below the image display device 5 are provided a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening that can be switched between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric device solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 115 as a normal electric device. The variable winning ball device 6B is equipped with, for example, an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When the normal electric device solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, causing the second starting winning opening to be in a closed state that prevents game balls from entering, or in a normal open state that makes it difficult for game balls to enter. When the normal electric device solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B tilts the movable wing piece to an open state where the second starting winning port can be entered by game balls, or to an expanded open state where the second starting winning port can be easily entered by game balls. The open state where the second starting winning port can be entered by game balls or the expanded open state where it can be easily entered by game balls is also referred to as the first variable state. The closed state where the second starting winning port cannot be entered by game balls or the normal open state where it is difficult for game balls to enter is also referred to as the second variable state. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device, as long as it can be changed between the first variable state and the second variable state.

The entry of a gaming ball into the first start entry port formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as a first start entry. The entry of a gaming ball into the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as a second start entry. A gaming ball that enters the first start entry port is detected by the first start entry port switch 22A shown in FIG. 115. A gaming ball that enters the second start entry port is detected by the second start entry port switch 22B shown in FIG. 115. Upon the occurrence of a first start entry, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three, are paid out, and the first reserved memory count can be updated to increment by one. However, if the first reserved memory count has reached its upper limit, the first reserved memory count will not be updated even if a first start entry occurs. When the first reserved memory count is incremented by one, the first start condition is met, and a first special symbol game in which special symbols are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A becomes playable. When a second start win occurs, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the second reserved memory count can be updated to increment by one. However, if the second reserved memory count has reached its upper limit, the second reserved memory count will not be updated even if a second start win occurs. When the second reserved memory count is incremented by one, the second start condition is met, and a second special symbol game can be played in which special symbols are variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming board 2, and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in Figure 1, general winning openings 10 are provided in two locations on the lower left of the gaming area. When a gaming ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as 10, are paid out.

In the play area formed by the playboard 2, a first path and a second path are provided as paths along which game balls flow down. The first path is mainly provided in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The area to the left of the image display device 5 is also referred to as the left play area or left play area. The area to the right of the image display device 5 is also referred to as the right play area or right play area. The left play area and the right play area may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 in the play area or the arrangement of the game pegs. Firing a game ball toward the left play area to cause it to flow down the first path is also referred to as a left hit. Firing a game ball toward the right play area to cause it to flow down the second path is also referred to as a right hit. The first path is also referred to as the left hit path. The second path is also referred to as the right hit path. The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared.

In response to operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball launching device, a gaming ball is launched from the ball launching device and launched into the gaming area. When a gaming ball launched into the gaming area is guided to the left gaming area and flows down the first path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the second path in the right gaming area. When a gaming ball launched into the gaming area is guided to the right gaming area and flows down the second path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the first path in the left gaming area.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first path in the left-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the second path in the right-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may also be able to accept game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area. The variable winning ball device 6B may also be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side play area have an easier time entering than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area.

The second path in the right-side game area is provided with a passing gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50. The passing gate 41 forms a passing area through which game balls can pass. Game balls that pass through the passing gate 41 are detected by the gate switch 21 shown in Figure 115. Based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, the number of normal reserved memories can be added and updated, and variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 can be executed as a normal symbol game. The passing gate 41 can be configured as a normal symbol activation port through which game balls can enter. In this case, the gate switch 21 can be configured as a normal symbol activation port switch that can detect game balls that have entered the normal symbol activation port.

The special variable prize ball device 50 is a special electric device that forms a large prize opening that can be switched between a closed and an open state by a large prize opening solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable prize ball device 50 has a guide passageway that is wide enough in the front-to-back direction to allow game balls to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from right to left, with walls provided on both the front and back sides of the extended passageway. A device entrance that serves as the large prize opening is formed in the center of the guide passageway. In the special variable prize ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front-to-back direction is provided as a large prize opening opening/closing member at a position where the large prize opening can be opened and closed. In the special variable prize ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passageway is provided in the portion of the guide passage where the large prize opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the large prize opening solenoid 82 and can move back and forth to open and close the special device entrance, which serves as the large prize opening. In the special variable prize ball device 50, game balls that enter the device through the large prize opening are detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a V prize area 51, which serves as a specific area and serves as a prize area through which game balls can pass, is provided. Also, inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a normal area different from the V prize area 51 is provided. Above the V prize area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member is provided as a V prize opening opening/closing member that can switch the V prize area 51 between an open state and a closed state. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move back and forth to open and close the V prize area 51. When the V prize area 51 is in the open state, game balls can pass through it, and when it is in the closed state, game balls cannot pass through it. Gaming balls that pass through the V winning area 51 are detected by the specific area switch 24. Gaming balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 pass through the normal area. Gaming balls that pass through the V winning area 51 and gaming balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 but pass through the normal area are both detected by the outlet switch 26 and then discharged outside the special variable winning ball device 50.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the gaming board 2 is equipped with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the gaming balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area is an outlet that takes in gaming balls that do not enter any of the winning holes. Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, and gaming effect lamps 9 are provided around the periphery of the gaming area to light up the effects. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2.

A ball operation handle is provided at the lower right of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by the player to launch gaming balls toward the playing area using the ball launching device. The ball operation handle is also called an operation knob. A ball supply tray is provided at a specified position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, which holds gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a specified ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. The ball supply tray is also called the upper tray. Below the upper tray is a prize ball storage tray into which prize balls dispensed when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A can be held by a player and tilted, and is provided with a trigger button that the player can push and pull. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 115. The push button 31B can be pressed by a player. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 115. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting player operations and other actions, but other detection means may also be used.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation of the ball-hitting control handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal game is initiated by the normal symbol display device 20. Note that, if the previous normal game is still being played, the normal game based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 cannot be immediately played. Therefore, the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit, such as "4." In the normal game, if a specific normal symbol, such as a normal winning symbol, is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal winning." In contrast, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol, such as a normal losing symbol, is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal losing." In the case of a "normal winning," opening control is performed to place the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state or an expanded open state for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second starting winning port is in an open state or an enlarged open state.

When a gaming ball passes through and enters the first start entry opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game can be initiated by the first special symbol display device 4A. When a gaming ball passes through and enters the second start entry opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game can be initiated by the second special symbol display device 4B. Note that even if a gaming ball enters the start entry opening and a start entry occurs during a period when a special symbol game is being played or during a period when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state, the special symbol game based on the start entry cannot be immediately executed. Therefore, the special symbol game based on the start entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit, such as "4." In a special symbol game, when a specific special symbol, such as a jackpot symbol, is displayed as a fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol is "jackpot." In contrast, when a predetermined special pattern different from a jackpot pattern, such as a small win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern will be "small win." Also, when a special pattern different from a jackpot pattern or a small win pattern, such as a loss pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern will be "loss." Furthermore, when a special pattern different from a jackpot pattern, small win pattern, or loss pattern, such as a time-saving pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time-saving." Special patterns may not include time-saving patterns. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include "time-saving."

In a special game, once the special symbol display results in a "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is advantageous to the player. In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed in the special variable prize ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever occurs first. The predetermined period during which the large prize opening can be controlled to be open is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, also referred to as the maximum opening period. In the jackpot game state, one cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round or round play. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined maximum number of times is reached, such as 15 or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can win prize balls by entering game balls into the large prize opening. Therefore, a jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds played in a jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit unlock period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

When the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot," this includes multiple jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the jackpot slot, such as the number of rounds or maximum opening period, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends, such as normal state, time-saving state, or probability variable state, can be set to multiple different types, and a jackpot type is specified corresponding to each setting. The multiple jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types with many prize balls, jackpot types with few prize balls, or jackpot types with almost no prize balls, or they may include jackpot types with similar numbers of prize balls that can be obtained. Controlling to a jackpot game state based on the display result of a special symbol being a "jackpot" is also called a pattern jackpot, a special symbol jackpot, a variable display jackpot, or a direct hit jackpot.

In a special game, after the display result of the special symbol indicates a "small win," the game is controlled to a small win game state. In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed in the special variable prize ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening may be opened in the same opening mode as the large prize opening in the large win game state for certain large win types. The large prize opening may be opened in the same opening mode by sharing the same number of openings and opening period. Alternatively, in the small win game state, the large prize opening may be opened in a different opening mode from the large win game state. As with the large win type, when the display result of the special symbol indicates a "small win," multiple small win types may be included. The large win type and small win type are also collectively referred to as the win type. The operation of opening and closing the large prize opening in the small win game state is also referred to as the start operation. When in the small win gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 50's role entrance, which serves as the large winning opening, is opened and the gaming ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the conditions for a big win are met and control to the big win gaming state is possible. When in the small win gaming state the gaming ball passes through the V winning area 51, causing a V winning, and the game is controlled to the big win gaming state, this is also called a small win via big win.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state depending on the type of jackpot. Also, in a special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "time-saving," the game state is controlled to the time-saving state instead of being controlled to the jackpot game state. The time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special symbol game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second start winning hole than in the normal state. Control of whether or not the game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning hole is also referred to as base control. Base control in the normal state is also referred to as normal base control or low base control. Base control in the time-saving state includes high base control. In addition to high base control, the time-saving state may also include medium base control. Medium base control is a base control that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than low base control, but makes it harder for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than high base control. A game state in which medium base control is performed is also called a medium base state. A game state in which high base control is performed is also called a high base state. High base control is also called high opening control.

In the normal state, medium base state, and high base state, it is possible for a time-saving symbol to be displayed as a static result of the display of a special symbol. However, in the medium base state and high base state, even if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a static result of the display of a special symbol, base control based on the time-saving symbol is not performed, and new control to transition to the medium base state or high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, it is possible to perform time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time more than in the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-shortening state.

The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, and therefore is included in special states that are advantageous to players and different from jackpot gaming states. When the gaming state is a probability variable state, in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is possible, which increases the probability that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also referred to as a probability variable state. The probability variable state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols is improved and a "jackpot" is more likely to occur, and therefore is included in special states that are advantageous to players and different from jackpot gaming states. The time-saving state and probability variable state continue until one of the predetermined termination conditions is met first, such as the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games or control to the next jackpot gaming state. The termination condition is the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games, and is also referred to as a count-cut state. A count-cut time-saving state is also referred to as a count-cut time-cut state. A count-cut probability variable state is also referred to as a count-cut probability variable state.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that are advantageous to the player, predetermined states such as a small jackpot game state, or special states such as a time-saving state or a probability variable state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot" are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is performed without executing the specified recovery process after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed.

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a probability variable state as a gaming state.

After the small win gaming state ends, there are cases where the game state is controlled to a big win gaming state based on the occurrence of a V win, and cases where a V win does not occur and the gaming state before the small win gaming state is entered remains unchanged. However, if the display result of the special symbol game is a "small win" and the specified number of special symbol games have been played in the count limit, control of the time-saving state and the probability variable state may end and the game state may return to normal. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a small win gaming state as a gaming state. In other words, the display result of the special symbol may not include a "small win."

When a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is met, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition may be a condition that can be met when, after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special game shows "time-saving," a new jackpot game state or control to a time-saving state is not performed even if the variable display is executed a specific number of times.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that add excitement to the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, and may be executed using any effect device.

Effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of effect symbols. In response to the start of the first or second special symbol game, variable display of effect symbols begins in the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the determined special symbol that will be the display result in the first or second special symbol game is displayed as a stopped symbol, the determined effect symbol that will be the display result is displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable display of effect symbols. The determined effect symbol is composed of a combination of three effect symbols corresponding to the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of effect symbols, the display mode in the variable display of effect symbols may become a reach mode. A reach mode is a mode in which, when the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continue to change. When the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols becomes a reach mode, it is also said that a reach has been achieved.

A reach effect can be executed in response to the variable display of the effect symbol reaching a reach state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach effects so that the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" varies depending on the effect state. The "jackpot" probability corresponding to the effect state is also referred to as the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Additionally, depending on the execution time of the reach effect, it may also include short reach and long reach, which has a longer execution time than short reach.

When the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot," a fixed effect symbol that forms a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a static display result on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, identical effect symbols, such as a symbol showing the number "7," are displayed statically on a predetermined valid line in the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered effect symbols, such as a symbol showing the number "7," may be displayed statically. In the case of a "non-probability jackpot" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered effect symbols, such as a symbol showing the number "6," may be displayed statically. A "non-probability jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot." In this case, odd-numbered effect symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols. Even-numbered symbols are also called non-variable symbols or normal symbols. After a non-variable symbol reaches a reach state, an upgraded symbol may be executed, ultimately resulting in a "variable jackpot."

When the display result of the special pattern is a "small win," a fixed effect pattern that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a stopped effect pattern display result on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same effect pattern, such as an effect pattern showing a number other than "7," may be displayed stopped on a predetermined valid line in the "left," "center," and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A common fixed effect pattern may be displayed when the display result of the special pattern is a "big win" and a "small win."

When the display result of the special pattern is a "miss," the display result may be a static display without the variable display of the effect pattern becoming a reach state. In this case, the display result of the effect pattern is a static display of the confirmed effect pattern of the non-reach combination. A display result in which the confirmed effect pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed without becoming a reach state is also called a non-reach miss. When the display result of the special pattern is a "miss," the variable display of the effect pattern may become a reach state, and the display result may be a static display after the reach effect is executed. In this case, the display result of the effect pattern is a static display of the confirmed effect pattern of the reach combination that is not a big hit combination or a small hit combination. A display result in which the confirmed effect pattern of the reach combination is displayed after becoming a reach state is also called a reach miss.

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include variable display compatible displays such as hold displays and active displays. In addition, for example, preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot can be executed while the display patterns are variable. Preview effects may include variable preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot corresponding to the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot corresponding to the variable display before execution, whose execution is on hold. Pre-read preview effects may be capable of executing change effects that change the display mode of variable display compatible displays such as hold displays and active displays to a mode that is different from normal.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to temporarily stop the effect symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive effect may be set so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed a large number of times, compared to when the number of times the variable display is reduced. The variable display of the effect symbols may include cases where the pseudo consecutive effect is executed before the reach state is reached, and cases where the pseudo consecutive effect is executed after the reach state is reached. Additionally, the pseudo consecutive effect may be executed at multiple times when the variable display of the effect symbols is displayed in a variable manner.

While controlling the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute a jackpot effect that notifies the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect that notifies the number of rounds and an advancement effect that suggests or notifies that the advantage of the jackpot gaming state is improving. While controlling the small jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute a small jackpot effect that notifies the player of the small jackpot gaming state. By executing a common effect during control of the jackpot gaming state and during control of the small jackpot gaming state, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot gaming state.

In a non-playing state where no special game or the like is being played and no game is in progress, a demonstration effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A demonstration effect image is also called a demo image. The display of a demo image is also called a demo display. The effect produced by a demo display is also called a customer waiting demo effect.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc., as shown in Fig. 115. In addition, various boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the ability to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The progress of play includes the execution of various games and transitions between game states, such as the execution of special games with reserved ball management, the execution of regular games with reserved ball management, jackpot game states, small jackpot game states, time-saving states, and probability variable states. The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and can be configured with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. Some or all of the ROM 101, RAM 102, and random number circuit 104 may be external to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches used for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches used for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, start port switches such as a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and turned on a switch. Transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply solenoid drive signals from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in ROM 101 includes table data constituting tables used for variation patterns, presentation control commands, and various other settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. RAM 102 may serve as backup RAM that stores the contents of some or all of the memory area so that they can be restored within a specified period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted. RAM 102 is also referred to as RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of RAM 102 includes memory areas capable of storing various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 can control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to the programs stored in the ROM 101.

The random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the progress of the game. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or they may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103.

Figure 116 shows an example of a gaming random number. The gaming random numbers include a random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, a random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for winning symbols, a random number MR2-1 for winning normal symbols, a random number MR2-2 that serves as the initial value for winning normal symbols, a random number MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, a random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern.

The random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols is used to determine the display result of a special symbol, such as whether the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot" or a "small hit." The random number MR1-2 for winning symbols is used to select a confirmed special symbol from multiple special symbols, such as a jackpot symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot," or a small hit symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "small hit." The random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is used to select a confirmed normal symbol from multiple normal symbols to be displayed when the display result of the variable display of normal symbols is a "normal hit." The random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR2-1. The random number MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern as one of several pre-prepared patterns. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect is used to select whether or not the variable display of the effect patterns will be in a reach state when the display result of the special symbol is a "miss." The random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is used to select the type of variation pattern for the special symbol. The variation pattern type for special symbols is a group that pre-classifies the variation patterns of special symbols based on, for example, the presentation state during the variable display of the effect patterns, and may be configured to include one or more variation patterns. The random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern is used to select the variation pattern for the special symbol.

When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, such as numerical data indicating the value of a gaming random number, the CPU 103 reads and references various tables from ROM 101. Even when random number values are not used, the necessary tables may be read and referenced from ROM 101 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

The I/O 105 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 includes an input port into which various signals are input and an output port from which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 may include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric gimmick solenoid 81, the large prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 transmits presentation control commands corresponding to the progress of the game to the presentation control board 12 as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game using the game control microcomputer 100. Presentation control commands are commands that specify or notify the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. Presentation control commands may include commands that specify various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display results of the special game, the type of win, and the variation pattern; commands that specify the status of the game, such as the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big prize slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, and the game status; and commands that specify the occurrence of an error, etc.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving effect control commands and controlling the effects based on the received effect control commands. The effects that can be controlled by the effect control board 12 include various effects that correspond to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, as well as various notifications such as error notifications and notifications when power is restored. The effect control board 12 comprises a effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121 to perform processing to control the execution of effects together with the display control unit 123. This processing is for realizing the various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determining the effects to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 uses various data stored in ROM 121, such as data from various tables, and also uses RAM 122 as its main memory. The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of mainly display-related effects based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays effect images on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates the on/off state of the game effect lamp 9. The supply of the sound designation signal and lamp signal enables sound output from speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on or off of the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the execution of various performances. Random numbers used when controlling the execution of performances are also called performance random numbers. Performance random numbers may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the performance control CPU 120. When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, such as numerical data indicating the values of performance random numbers, the performance control CPU 120 reads and references various tables from ROM 121. Even when random number values are not used, the performance control CPU 120 may read and reference the necessary tables from ROM 121 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

The I/O 125 includes an input port for receiving, for example, performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 may include an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on a sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, turning the game effect lamp 9 on or off in the manner designated by the lamp signal. In this way, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on signals from the display control unit 123. Note that the performance control CPU 120 may perform some or all of the control of audio output and lamp on and off, such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals, and the control of the movable body 32, such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, audio control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in Figure 115, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or, unlike the configuration example shown in Figure 115, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., 12V DC or 5V DC). The pachinko gaming machine 1 can switch between power-on and power-off by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 receives a reset signal, power-off signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 on the power supply board 17.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the CPU 103 executes main processing for game control.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing P_MAIN executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the game control main processing P_MAIN shown in Figure 117 starts, the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON (step S1), and then executes the RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK (step S2). The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON in step S1 can execute initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 may include initialization of output ports, setting of interrupt vectors, setting of internal device registers, and setting of specific registers. The RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK in step S2 includes a checksum calculation process, which compares the checksum data obtained as a result of the process with the data stored in the checksum buffer. If the two data match, it is determined that the contents stored in the RAM 102 are normal.

Next, it is determined whether a predetermined recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, the checksum buffer contains normal stored data, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 (which serves as backup RAM) are normal. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, if the clear switch 92, for example, located on the power supply board 17, is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The checksum buffer stores the checksum data calculated in the checksum calculation process when the backup monitoring timer measures the backup judgment time during the previous power outage. If the time value of the backup monitoring timer does not match the specific value corresponding to the backup judgment time, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data may be data stored in the gaming work area of the RAM 102 (which serves as backup RAM for gaming control). In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and data errors using the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3: Yes), the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET is executed (Step S4). The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET uses the backup command transmission table to enable the performance control commands corresponding to the backup time to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET also clears the process codes, timers, counters, and flags specified in the backup setting table, enabling them to be initialized.

If the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET is executed (Step S5). The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables the transfer of clear data to the game work area, which serves as a working area in RAM 102. This initializes the game work area in RAM 102. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET then uses the initialization command transmission table to enable the transmission of corresponding performance control commands from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 at the time of initialization. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET also clears the buffers, timers, pointers, and counters specified in the initialization setting table, enabling them to be initialized.

Then, the control start setting process P_STACON is executed (step S6). The control start setting process P_STACON may include a wait process. The wait process executes a loop process and waits until a set waiting time has elapsed, ensuring that sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be started. The control start setting process P_STACON may also include a specific count command transmission process or a command transmission process for individual chip number information. The specific count command transmission process enables a performance control command specifying the count value of a specific count counter to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific count counter is located at a specified address in RAM 102 and is sufficient as long as it can count the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number corresponding to the time-saving condition. The command transmission process for individual chip number information enables a performance control command specifying the stored value of a chip individual number register to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The chip individual number register is included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100, and is capable of storing a different value assigned to each chip as the chip individual number.

The control start setting process P_STACON may include startup out-of-area processing. The startup out-of-area processing is executed by reading a program stored in the non-game program area of ROM 101 in response to startup due to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The startup out-of-area processing may be, for example, performance display RWM initial value setting processing. The performance display RWM initial value setting processing makes it possible to set initial values for initial display using the 7-segment LEDs that make up the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor may be mounted, for example, on the main board 11, and may be capable of displaying content related to setting values and content related to the base. The setting value can be changed to one of multiple levels, such as six levels, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting change state in which the settings can be changed, making it possible to set the probability that the display result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot." The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through each prize slot, such as the start prize slot, general prize slot, or special prize slot, by the number of game balls launched into the game area.

After the control start setting process P_STACON in step S6, a timer interrupt counter is set (step S7). In step S7, the PTC counter output value is set so that a periodic timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time, such as every 4 ms (milliseconds). The game control main process P_MAIN then enters a loop. In this loop, interrupts are disabled (step S8), the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT is executed (step S9), the loop out-of-area process P_REGOUT is executed (step S10), interrupts are enabled (step S11), and the process returns to step S8. Then, whenever an interrupt request signal is input from the PTC to the CPU 103 while the interrupt is enabled, the CPU 103 is enabled to execute timer interrupt processing. This allows the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing every time a predetermined time, such as every 4 ms, has elapsed.

Figure 118 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control. In the timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 118, power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is executed (step S51). Next, it is determined whether the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is "0" (step S52). The fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "1", which corresponds to the ON state, when magnetism is detected by the magnet sensor or when radio waves are detected by the frame radio wave sensor. In all other cases, the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the OFF state.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "1" (Step S52: No), the game stop process P_GAME_STOP is executed (Step S53). The game stop process P_GAME_STOP simply initializes the output port and turns off the output of the connection confirmation signal. The connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board, and if it is turned off, the execution of the payout process on the payout control board is stopped.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "0" (Step S52; Yes), switch processing P_SW is executed (Step S54), switch error notification processing P_CON_CHK is executed (Step S55), random number update processing P_RANDOM is executed (Step S56), and initial value determination random number update processing P_TFINIT is executed (Step S57). Also, special symbol process processing P_TPROC is executed (Step S58), normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is executed (Step S59), information output processing P_JYOUHOU is executed (Step S60), prize ball processing P_PAY is executed (Step S61), and display processing P_HYOUZI is executed (Step S62). Furthermore, other timer interrupt response processing is executed (Step S63). After that, interrupt permission is set (Step S64), and timer interrupt processing P_PCT ends.

The power-off process P_POWER_OFF in step S51 judges the power confirmation signal transmitted from the power supply board 17, enabling checksum calculation processes and other processes to be executed when power is off. The switch process P_SW in step S54 judges the status of the input port, enabling updates to the switch-on buffer and other processes. The switch error notification process P_CON_CHK in step S55 can update the count value of a sensor-on counter specified, for example, by a switch error notification judgment table, and can display an error notification when the count value reaches a sensor abnormality error judgment value. The random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 enables software random numbers among the game random numbers to be updated by software. The random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination in step S57 enables software to update game random numbers used as random number initial values.

The special symbol process P_TPROC in step S58 includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and game states, such as managing the execution and reservation of special symbol games, controlling the jackpot and small jackpot game states, and controlling the game state. The normal symbol process P_FPROC in step S59 includes processing related to the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the state of the second start winning slot, such as managing the execution and reservation of normal symbol games based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 and controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The information output process P_JYOUHOU in step S60 sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Jackpot information indicates the number of jackpots that have occurred. Start information indicates the number of start wins. Probability fluctuation information indicates the number of times the probability variable state has occurred. The prize ball processing P_PAY in step S61 includes a prize ball command output counter increment process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter increment process uses a prize ball number table to determine whether a switch is on, and when on is detected, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects the process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the payout of prize balls based on the detection of game balls. The display process P_HYOUZI in step S62 sets the display for the first reserve indicator 25A, second reserve indicator 25B, regular reserve indicator 25C, and various other status indicator lights.

Figure 119 is a flowchart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S58 shown in Figure 118 as the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. In the special symbol process processing P_TPROC, the CPU 103 sets the first start winning corresponding flag (step S101). The first start winning corresponding flag is set by, for example, executing a logical operation instruction, reflecting the state of the first start winning port switch 22A contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, a zero flag in the flag register being in the on state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the off state. Conversely, a zero flag being in the off state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the on state. Next, a transfer instruction for setting the table pointer is used to set the first start winning corresponding flag (step S102). Then, it is determined whether the first start winning corresponding flag is on (step S103). If the first start winning flag is on (step S103; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S104).

If the first start winning corresponding flag is off in response to step S103 (step S103; No), or after the start winning switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104, the second start winning corresponding flag is set (step S105). The second start winning corresponding flag is set by executing a logical operation instruction or the like to reflect the state of the second start winning switch 22B contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, a zero flag in the flag register being on indicates that the second start winning corresponding flag is off. Conversely, a zero flag being off indicates that the second start winning corresponding flag is on. Next, a transfer instruction for setting the table pointer is issued to set the second start winning corresponding table (step S106). After that, it is determined whether the second start winning corresponding flag is on (step S107). If the second start winning flag is on (step S107; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S108).

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start port winning table set in step S102 to update the first reserved memory count and total reserved memory count by incrementing them by 1 if the first reserved memory count is less than the upper limit, extracts a random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, a random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern, stores these in their respective random number buffers, and then transfers them to the first special symbol reserved buffer. Additionally, the first reserved memory information designation command transmission table is used to enable a first reserved memory information designation command that specifies the first reserved memory count to be sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A value indicating "1" is then stored in the start port winning buffer as the start port winning designation value.

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start port winning table set in step S106 to update the second reserved memory count and total reserved memory count by incrementing them by 1 if the second reserved memory count is less than the upper limit, extracts the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern, stores these in their respective random number buffers, and then transfers them to the second special symbol reserved buffer. Additionally, the second reserved memory information designation command transmission table is used to enable the second reserved memory information designation command, which specifies the second reserved memory count, to be sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A value indicating "2" is then stored in the start port winning buffer as the start port winning designation value.

A common start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON can be executed in steps S104 and S108. Meanwhile, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start port winning table set in step S102, while the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start port winning table set in step S106. In this way, the common start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed using different start port winning tables. Therefore, different data settings and controls are possible when the gaming ball enters the first start port and when it enters the second start port, using common processing. The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON may also include winning performance processing using the extracted gaming random number.

If the second start winning flag is off in step S107 (step S107; No), or after the start gate switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the special symbol process processing jump table (step S109). The special symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code. The special symbol process code can be updated to any of 00 [H] to 0B [H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also called the special symbol process code. Here, [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. Note that [B] can also be used to indicate a binary number.

Following step S109, a transfer command to read stored data is used to load the special symbol process code (step S110). Next, the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC is executed (step S111) to obtain the address of the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code. The obtained address is set in a pointer. A subroutine call command is then issued to execute the process pointed to by the pointer (step S112), making the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code executable. When the selected process is completed and a return command is issued to return to the special symbol process process P_TPROC, this special symbol process process P_TPROC also ends, and a return command is issued to return to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

Figure 120 shows an example configuration TT01 of the special symbol process processing jump table used in the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The special symbol process processing jump table is configured to include table data that can be set in an internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer to the address of the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code. The special symbol process processing jump table of configuration example TT01 includes special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL when the special symbol process code is 00 [H], special symbol change processing P_TSTART when the special symbol process code is 01 [H], special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP when the special symbol process code is 02 [H], pre-small win opening processing P_TLFAN when the special symbol process code is 03 [H], small win opening processing P_TLOPEN when the special symbol process code is 04 [H], post-small win opening processing P_TLCLSF when the special symbol process code is 05 [H], and .... It includes table data that allows the pointer to be set to an address value corresponding to: small win ejection ball waiting process P_TLOUT when the other symbol process code is 06 [H]; small win end process P_TLEND when the special symbol process code is 07 [H]; pre-large prize opening process P_TINT when the special symbol process code is 08 [H]; large prize opening opening process P_TOPEN when the special symbol process code is 09 [H]; post-large prize opening process P_TCLSF when the special symbol process code is 0A [H]; and big win end process P_TEND when the special symbol process code is 0B [H].

The normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL determines whether to start a special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reserved information, determines the special symbol display result using the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol, determines the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in a static state in the variable special symbol display, and determines the special symbol variation pattern. The special symbol display result includes "jackpot," "minor hit," "miss," etc., and if it is determined to be a "jackpot," it is determined that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, if the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," it is determined which of several jackpot game states with different degrees of advantage to the player the game will be controlled to, depending on the jackpot symbol that becomes the confirmed special symbol. Therefore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine whether to control the state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can decide which of several advantageous states with different degrees of advantage to the player to control to. Furthermore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can decide on one of several types of variation patterns.

The special pattern change processing P_TSTART measures the time elapsed since the special pattern began to change on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, making it possible to determine whether the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed. The special pattern stop processing P_TSTOP measures the time elapsed since the special pattern stopped changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, making it possible to determine whether the pattern stop time has elapsed. The pattern stop time can be set as the time for which the special pattern is stopped and displayed when it is determined in the special pattern change processing P_TSTART that the special pattern change time has elapsed. When the pattern stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are made according to the special pattern display result. For example, if the special symbol display result is a "big hit," the special symbol process code can be updated to 08 [H]; if the special symbol display result is a "small hit," the special symbol process code can be updated to 03 [H]; and if the special symbol display result is a "miss," the special symbol process code can be updated to 00 [H].

Processing before small win opening P_TLFAN, processing during small win opening P_TLOPEN, processing after small win opening P_TLCLSF, waiting for small win balls to be discharged P_TLOUT, and processing after small win end P_TLEND are processes for controlling the progress of play in the small win game state. Processing before large win opening P_TINT, processing during large win opening P_TOPEN, processing after large win opening P_TCLSF, and processing after big win end P_TEND are processes for controlling the progress of play in the big win game state.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from the power supply board 17 or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process.

Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the main processing for performance control S_MAIN executed by the performance control CPU 120 on the performance control board 12. When the main processing for performance control S_MAIN shown in Figure 121 starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control initialization processing S_INIT (step S71). The performance control initialization processing S_INIT includes clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the timer circuit mounted on the performance control board 12. Next, the initial operation control processing S_SYOKI is executed (step S72). The initial operation control processing S_SYOKI enables control of the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and performing predetermined operation checks. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time, such as 2 ms (milliseconds), elapses based on the register settings for the timer circuit. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and the system waits.

When the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), command analysis processing S_COMMAND is executed (step S75), performance control process processing S_CPROC is executed (step S76), performance random number update processing S_RANDOM is executed (step S77), and performance output processing S_OUT is executed (step S78). Then, other timer interrupt response processing is executed (step S79), and the process returns to step S73.

The command analysis process S_COMMAND in step S75 enables the reading of the effect control commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer and the setting and control corresponding to the read effect control commands. By executing the command analysis process S_COMMAND, the effect control CPU 120 can update stored data indicating the status of flags, stored data in registers, and other stored data in the working area of RAM 122 in response to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11. The effect control process process S_CPROC in step S76 enables control of the execution of effects using various effect devices, including, for example, the display of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of decorative light sources such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and drive control of the movable body 32. The control content of effects using various effect devices can be determined, decided, and set based on the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the results of processing by the effect control CPU 120. The performance random number update process S_RANDOM in step S77 enables at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 to be updated by executing a software program.

Figure 122 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S76 shown in Figure 121 as the performance control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control CPU 120 executes the look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET in the performance control process processing (step S151). The look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET enables judgment, determination, and setting regarding the execution of a look-ahead preview performance, for example, based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. The look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET also makes it possible to update the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After the pre-read effect setting process S_SAKI_SET in step S151, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the effect control process jump table (step S152). The effect control process jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the effect control process code. The effect control process code can be updated to any value between 00 [H] and 0A [H] depending on the progress of effect control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also referred to as the effect process code. The effect control process code is loaded using a transfer command to read stored data (step S153). The address of the process selected corresponding to the effect control process code thus obtained is set in the effect control pointer (step S154). Therefore, by executing the process pointed to by the effect control pointer (step S115), the process selected corresponding to the effect control process code becomes executable.

Figure 122 (B) shows an example configuration TT02 of the performance control process jump table used in the performance control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control process jump table is composed of table data that can set the address of the process selected in accordance with the performance control process code in a register used as a performance control pointer. The effect control process processing jump table of configuration example TT02 includes table data that can set address values in the effect control pointer corresponding to: waiting for a change pattern command when the effect control process code is 00 [H]; start of effect pattern change processing when the effect control process code is 01 [H]; processing during effect pattern change when the effect control process code is 02 [H]; stop of effect pattern change processing when the effect control process code is 03 [H]; small win display processing when the effect control process code is 04 [H]; small win open processing when the effect control process code is 05 [H]; small win end effect processing when the effect control process code is 06 [H]; big win display processing when the effect control process code is 07 [H]; processing during a round when the effect control process code is 08 [H]; post-round processing when the effect control process code is 09 [H]; and big win end effect processing when the effect control process code is 0A [H].

The variation pattern command reception waiting process makes it possible to determine whether a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 has been received. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the presentation control process code is updated to 01 [H], which corresponds to the presentation pattern variation start process. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the demo display can be controlled. The presentation pattern variation start process makes it possible to start a variation-time presentation corresponding to a special game. For example, in response to a variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11, it makes it possible to select a presentation pattern to use to control the variation-time presentation and start updating the presentation process timer that measures the presentation execution time. The presentation pattern variation in progress process makes it possible to control the switching timing of each presentation element that makes up the presentation pattern and to determine whether the presentation execution time has elapsed based on the timing value of the presentation process timer. If it is determined that the presentation execution time has elapsed, the presentation control process code is updated to 03 [H], which corresponds to the presentation pattern variation stop process. The effect pattern change stop process enables control of the end of the effect during change and control of the display of the effect result corresponding to the confirmed special pattern based on the establishment of the end condition for the effect during change, such as the elapse of the effect execution time or the receipt of a effect pattern confirmation command. At this time, the effect control process code is updated and various settings are made in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, if the display result of the variable display is a "big hit," the effect control process code can be updated to 07 [H]; if the display result of the variable display is a "small hit," the effect control process code can be updated to 04 [H]; and if the display result of the variable display is a "miss," the effect control process code can be updated to 00 [H].

The small hit display process, small hit opening process, and small hit end presentation process are processes for controlling the progression of presentations corresponding to the small hit game state. The big hit display process, round process, post-round process, and big hit end presentation process are processes for controlling the progression of presentations corresponding to the big hit game state.

(Variations of the basic explanation, etc.)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operation described in the basic description and other explanations, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all of the technical features described in the embodiments, but may have some of the configurations described in the embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. When a subordinate concept is described in the embodiments, an invention of a generic concept using homologous or similar matters, or an invention of a generic concept using common properties, is included in the present invention, and may have some of the structure or characteristics described in the embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

Pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, or it may be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

During the variable display of the special symbol, only one type of symbol, such as a "-" symbol, may be displayed, and this symbol may be displayed and extinguished repeatedly. One type of symbol may be displayed during the variable display, and this symbol may not be displayed when the variable display stops. For example, the display result may not be a "-" symbol, and a non-display state may be displayed in which no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to change the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in response to multiple setting values. For example, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate may be changed by using a different jackpot determination value for each setting value. As a specific example, the setting values are divided into six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 representing the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this case, setting 6 as the setting value provides the highest advantage to the player, and the advantage gradually decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the payout rate may also change depending on the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot remains constant regardless of the setting value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a plurality of setting values that differ in the degree of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by a setting value designation command being sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. While the variable display is being executed, a setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate, suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The suggestion regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may, for example, suggest whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion effect may suggest the likelihood of a jackpot through any effect, and may also be able to provide suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In place of some or all of the suggestions regarding control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be made. For example, suggestions regarding a special state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends may be made. In addition, suggestions regarding whether or not a state in which any gaming value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be made, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention relating to gaming machines is not limited to pachinko gaming machines 1, but can also be applied to slot machines as appropriate. A slot machine can execute a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of a control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of a stop button, a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player if a specific combination of symbols is formed. In a slot machine, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include, for example, one or more of so-called bonuses, such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for implementing various controls, including game progress and performance effects, may be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as pachinko machine 1 via a removable recording medium, or may be distributed and provided by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the machine may be equipped with a communications processing unit that can connect to an external device on a network via a communications line or the like, and may distribute and provide programs and data by downloading them from the external device. Games and performance effects may also be executed by inserting a removable recording medium, or by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communications line or the like in internal memory or the like, or by directly using hardware resources in an external device on a network connected via a communications line or the like, or by exchanging data with other computers or the like via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as the decision percentage of processing or data, or the execution percentage of a performance, expressions such as "high," "low," and "different" may include cases where one is a "0%" or "100%" percentage. For example, for one decision result or execution content, this may include a "0%" percentage where there is no decision or execution, or a "100%" percentage where there is always a decision or execution.

(Explanation of characteristic part 01AK)
FIG. 123-1 shows an example of the configuration of a game control microcomputer 100 with respect to feature section 01AK. In addition to ROM 101, RAM 102, and CPU 103, the game control microcomputer 100 includes an external bus interface 131, a clock circuit 132, a unique information storage circuit 133, a reset controller 134, an interrupt controller 135, a timer circuit 136, an address decode circuit 137, a free-running counter 138, and a serial communication circuit 139. The random number circuit 104 shown in FIG. 115 includes a 16-bit random number circuit 104A and an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The I/O 105 shown in FIG. 115 includes a PIP (Parallel Input Port) 105A and a POP (Parallel Output Port) 105B.

The external bus interface 131 is a bus interface that has functions such as interfacing between the external bus and internal bus of the chips that make up the game control microcomputer 100, and directional control functions for the address bus, data bus, and various control signals. For example, the external bus interface 131 may be connected to an external memory or external input/output device attached to the game control microcomputer 100, and may be capable of sending and receiving address signals, data signals, various control signals, and the like, to and from these external devices. The external bus interface 131 may also include an internal resource access control circuit that controls access from external devices to the game control microcomputer 100's internal data.

The clock circuit 132 can generate an internal system clock SCLK using an oscillation signal input to the external control clock terminal EXC. A control clock generated by a control clock generation circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 may be input to the external control clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 132 can be supplied to various circuits in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the CPU 103, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The internal system clock SCLK can also be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, the internal system clock SCLK can be restricted from being output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100, making it difficult to externally identify the operating state of the game control microcomputer 100.

The unique information storage circuit 133 can store multiple types of unique information that become internal information of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. For example, the unique information storage circuit 133 may store a ROM code, an individual chip number, and an ID number as unique information that differs for each chip of the game control microcomputer 100. The ROM code is numerical data that can be generated from data stored in a specified area of ROM 101. The individual chip number and ID number are numbers assigned to the game control microcomputer 100 when it is manufactured, and represent different values for each chip. The individual chip number can be read by a user program such as a game program, while the ID number can be set so that it cannot be read by a user program. The unique information storage circuit 133 may be included in a specified area of ROM 101, or may be included in an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100.

The reset controller 134 can control various resets that occur inside or outside the game control microcomputer 100. Resets that can be controlled by the reset controller 134 include system resets and user resets. A system reset occurs when the input signal to the external system reset terminal XSRST remains low for a certain period of time. A user reset occurs due to certain factors, such as the generation of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer 134A or the occurrence of an IAT (Independent Autonomous Travel Away) alarm. The reset controller 134 includes a watchdog timer 134A. The watchdog timer 134A can set a timer value corresponding to the monitoring time and can count down by periodically decrementing the timer value by one. When the timer value reaches "0" and a timeout occurs, the watchdog timer 134A can output a timeout signal to reset the game control microcomputer 100 and restart it. This allows the watchdog timer 134A to measure the monitoring time and reset the game control microcomputer 100 when it determines that the monitoring time has elapsed. The watchdog timer 134A can be set to enable or disable operation, for example, according to the game program.

The interrupt controller 135 can control various interrupt requests generated inside and outside the game control microcomputer 100. Interrupts that can be controlled by the interrupt controller 135 include the non-maskable interrupt NMI and the maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that can be accepted unconditionally even when the CPU 103 is in an interrupt-disabled state, and is generated when the input signal to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as input port PI6) is at a low level for a certain period of time. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can allow or prohibit the acceptance of interrupt requests by a setting command from the CPU 103, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority levels. The maskable interrupt INT can be caused by any or all of the multiple types of interrupt causes, including the input signal to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as input port PI5) being low for a certain period of time, a timeout occurring in the timer circuit 136, or numeric data indicating a random number value being stored in the random number value register by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or 8-bit random number circuit 104B.

The timer circuit 136 includes a PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) that serves as a timer counter corresponding to three channels PTC0 to PTC2, enabling real-time interrupts and time measurement. Each of the timer circuit 136's channels PTC0 to PTC2 uses a count clock generated based on the internal system clock SCLK, and is only required to be able to update the timer value in response to signal changes in the count clock, such as the falling edge when the clock signal changes from high to low.

The address decode circuit 137 can decode various signals obtained from each functional block within the game control microcomputer 100, and can output a chip select signal, which is a decoded signal for external devices. The chip select signal selectively enables the internal circuits of the game control microcomputer 100 or external devices that serve as peripheral devices, allowing them to be accessed by the CPU 103. The output terminals that the address decode circuit 137 can use are multi-function terminals that can selectively output a parallel output signal from POP 105B, a serial transmission signal from the serial communication circuit 139, a clock output signal from the clock circuit 132, and the chip select signal generated by the address decode circuit 137.

The free-running counter 138 is configured to include counter circuits corresponding to four channels FRC0 to FRC3, and can update its count value independently of the operation of the CPU 103. Each channel FRC0 to FRC3 of the free-running counter 138 can be activated by an independent update clock, and its operation can be stopped or changed, for example, according to a gaming program. The count value of the free-running counter 138 can be stored in a hard latch register in response to a latch signal transmitted from an input terminal that serves as a latch signal input terminal in the PIP 105A. The count value stored in the hard latch register can be read by the CPU 103 and used when executing a gaming program, etc.

The serial communication circuit 139 is configured to include serial communication units corresponding to three channels, SCU0, SCU1, and STU2, enabling communication with external devices via serial communication. Each channel, SCU0, SCU1, and STU2, of the serial communication circuit 139, can process communication data in, for example, full-duplex, asynchronous, or standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. Channels SCU0 and SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 are included in a first channel transceiver circuit capable of bidirectionally transmitting and receiving serial data with an external circuit. Channel STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 is included in a second channel transmitter circuit capable of unidirectionally transmitting serial data with an external circuit. For example, channel SCU0 of the serial communication circuit 139 is used for data communication with the payout control board. Channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 is used for data communication with the performance control board 12. Instead of channel SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139, channel STU2 of serial communication circuit 139 may be used for data communication with the performance control board 12.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A is composed of random number generation units corresponding to four channels RL0-RL3, each of which operates independently to generate random numbers ranging from 0 to 65535 using numerical data representing 16-bit pseudo-random numbers. The maximum value of the random numbers generated by each channel RL0-RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A can be set to any value between 256 and 65535. Setting such a maximum value allows for initial setup to select a random number startup method so that the numerical data representing the random number value begins updating. Alternatively, each channel RL0-RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A can be initially setup to select a random number startup method so that it is automatically started when the gaming control microcomputer 100's operating mode transitions from security mode to user mode. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update the random number MR1-1 used to determine special symbols using channel RL0, and can update the random number MR3-2 used to select losing effects using channel RL2.

The 8-bit random number circuit 104B is configured with random number generation units corresponding to four channels RS0 to RS3, each of which operates independently to generate random numbers ranging from 0 to 255 using numerical data representing 8-bit pseudo-random numbers. The maximum value of the random numbers generated by each channel RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can be set to any value between 16 and 255. Setting such a maximum value allows for initial setup to select a random number startup method so that the numerical data representing the random number value begins to be updated. Alternatively, each channel RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B may be initially set to select a random number startup method so that it is automatically started when the operating mode of the game control microcomputer 100 transitions from security mode to user mode. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type using channel RS1, the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern using channel RS2, and the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern using channel RS3.

PIP105A incorporates, for example, an 8-bit wide input-only port, allowing various signals to be input from outside the game control microcomputer 100. PIP105A can use input terminals corresponding to input ports PI0 to PI7. Input port PI5 uses a multi-function terminal that can also be used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. Input port PI6 uses a multi-function terminal that can also be used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. Input port PI7 uses a multi-function terminal that can also be used as the receiving terminal for channel SCU0 in the serial communication circuit 139. POP105B incorporates, for example, an 11-bit wide output-only port, allowing various signals to be output outside the game control microcomputer 100. POP105B can supply parallel output signals corresponding to output ports PO0 to PO7 and PO10 to PO12 to the address decode circuit 137.

Figure 123-2 shows an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in Figure 123-2, the area from addresses 0000 [H] to 3FFF [H] is allocated to ROM 101 and includes a game program area, game data area, non-game program area, non-game data area, ROM comment area, program management area, and other unused areas. The area from addresses F000 [H] to F3FF [H] is allocated to RAM 102 and includes a game work area, game stack area, non-game work area, non-game stack area, and other unused areas. The area from addresses FE00 [H] to FEBF [H] is a function setting register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The area from addresses FF00 [H] to FFFF [H] is a function control register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100.

In ROM 101, the game program area can store game programs, which are computer programs related to the progress of games. The game data area can store game data used by game programs. The non-game program area can store non-game programs, which are computer programs related to control and processing other than the progress of games. The non-game data area can store non-game data used by non-game programs. These programs and data stored in ROM 101 were designed and created in advance by the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, who is the user of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, game programs and non-game programs are included in user programs. Game data and non-game data are included in user data.

ROM 101's storage area is divided into a game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and a non-game program area for control and processing unrelated to game progress. The area before the non-game program area, which is assigned a later address, is an unused area with a storage area equal to or greater than the boundary byte number, such as 16 bytes. This makes it easy to identify the game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and the non-game program area capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing unrelated to game progress, facilitating the design and management of programs and data stored in ROM 101.

The memory area of ROM 101 is provided with a separate game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and a game data area capable of storing game data used by the game programs. Of the game program area and game data area, the area before the game data area assigned a later address is an unused area with a memory area equal to or larger than the boundary byte number, for example, 16 bytes. This makes it easy to identify the game program area capable of storing game programs related to game progress, and the game data area capable of storing game data used by the game programs, facilitating the design and management of the programs and data stored in ROM 101.

The memory area of ROM 101 is provided with adjacent non-game program areas capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing unrelated to game progress, and non-game data areas capable of storing non-game data used by non-game programs. Of the non-game program area and non-game data area, the area behind the non-game program area assigned an earlier address is the non-game data area, and the area before the non-game data area assigned a later address is the non-game program area. This allows the non-game program area capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing unrelated to game progress and the non-game data area capable of storing non-game data used by the non-game program to be located in memory areas assigned consecutive addresses, thereby enhancing integration and facilitating the design and management of programs and data stored in ROM 101. An unused area of memory space equal to or greater than the boundary byte count may be provided between the non-game program area and the non-game data area to make it easier to identify the non-game program area and the non-game data area.

In the memory areas of ROM 101, unused memory areas may store data indicating a value of "0" in all areas. This makes it easy to distinguish between game program areas and game data areas, non-game program areas and non-game data areas, and unused areas. Furthermore, if invalid data is stored in an unused area, this data can be easily discovered. Note that unused memory areas may store data indicating a value of "1" in all areas. In other words, unused memory areas can simply have data indicating the same value stored in all areas. This makes it easy to distinguish between multiple types of memory areas, and to easily discover invalid stored data.

In RAM 102, the gaming work area can be used as a work area when CPU 103 executes a gaming program. The gaming stack area can be used as a stack area when CPU 103 executes a gaming program. The non-gaming work area can be used as a work area when CPU 103 executes a non-gaming program. The non-gaming stack area can be used as a stack area when CPU 103 executes a non-gaming program.

The game program area and game data area provided in the memory area of ROM 101, and the game work area and game stack area provided in the memory area of RAM 102 are included in the memory area for game control. The non-game program and non-game data area provided in the memory area of ROM 101, and the non-game work area and non-game stack area provided in the memory area of RAM 102 are included in the memory area for non-game control.

The ROM comment area provided in the storage area of ROM 101 stores data indicating arbitrary program-specific information, such as the program title and version. The program management area provided in the storage area of ROM 101 can store setting information necessary for the internal settings of the game control microcomputer 100 so that the CPU 103 can execute game programs and non-game programs.

Figure 123-3 shows a main setting example AKA01 of addresses included in the function setting register area among the addresses assigned to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The function setting register area is the first area for setting functions using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the watchdog timer 134A of the reset controller 134, the interrupt controller 135, the timer circuit 136, and the serial communication circuit 139.

In setting example AKA01, the setting values of the WDT start register at address FE1A [H] and the WDT clear register at addresses FE1B [H] to FE1C [H] are invalid values corresponding to unused status. As a result, the monitoring time measurement function using the watchdog timer 134A of the reset controller 134 is set to an unused state. Because the setting value of the interrupt mask register at address FE00 [H] is 7E [H], the interrupt control function using the interrupt controller 135 is set to an enabled state for maskable interrupt IR0. Because the setting values of the registers related to channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136 at addresses FE01 [H] to FE03 [H] are valid values, the time measurement function using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136 is set to an enabled state. Because the register settings for channels PTC1 and PTC2 of timer circuit 136 at addresses FE04[H] to FE09[H] are invalid values corresponding to unused channels, the timing function using channels PTC1 and PTC2 of timer circuit 136 is set to an unused state.

Since the register setting values for channels SCU0 and SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139 at addresses FE0A[H] to FE11[H] are valid, the serial communication function using channels SCU0 and SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139 is set to an available state. Since the register setting values for channel STU2 of serial communication circuit 139 at addresses FE12[H] to FE14[H] are invalid, corresponding to unused status, the serial communication function using channel STU2 of serial communication circuit 139 is set to an unused state.

When the register settings for the input ports of PIP 105A at addresses FE2C[H] to FE2E[H] are valid, the signal input function using each input port is enabled. When the register settings for the random number circuit 104 at addresses FE36[H] to FE4A[H] include valid and invalid values, the random number generation function using the random number circuit 104 is enabled for channels corresponding to valid values and set to unused for channels corresponding to invalid values. For example, of the four channels RL0 to RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, channels RL0 and RL2, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are valid, have their random number generation function enabled, while channels RL1 and RL3, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are invalid, have their random number generation function set to unused. Furthermore, of the four channels RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, channels RS1 to RS3 whose corresponding maximum value setting registers have valid settings have their random number generation function set to an enabled state, while channel RS0 whose corresponding maximum value setting register has an invalid setting has its random number generation function set to an unused state.

In this way, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 only need to be able to set the various functions using each circuit to either an enabled state or an unused state, corresponding to the setting value in the function setting register area. The function setting register area is not limited to the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, and may also be a first area for setting any function.

Figure 123-4 shows a main setting example AKA02 of the addresses included in the function control register area among the addresses assigned to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The function control register area is a second area for function control using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the RAM 102, random number circuit 104, PIP 105A, and serial communication circuit 139.

In setting example AKA02, the RWM access protect register at address FF00[H] corresponds to a setting value of 00[H] or 01[H], enabling function control to prohibit or allow access to the RWM RAM 102. The internal information register at address FF01[H] is set to an invalid value corresponding to unused status, and function control using the corresponding circuit is in an unused state. The internal information register can store data indicating internal information such as abnormal random number update status, abnormal random number update clock frequency, system reset occurrence, WDT timeout occurrence, and IAT occurrence, but in this embodiment it is not used in an unused state.

Each register at addresses FF25[H] to FF28[H] can store a setting value used to control the serial communication function when the serial communication function using channel SCU0 of serial communication circuit 139 is enabled. Each register at addresses FF29[H] to FF2C[H] can store a setting value used to control the serial communication function when the serial communication function using channel SCU1 of serial communication circuit 139 is enabled.

Each register at addresses FF60[H] to FF67[H] can store random numbers that can be obtained using the soft-latch random number acquisition function of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Of these, the RL0 soft-latch random number register at addresses FF60[H] to FF61[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch. The RL1 soft-latch random number register at addresses FF62[H] to FF63[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL1 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch. The RL2 soft latch random number register at addresses FF64[H] to FF65[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL2 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numeric data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch. The RL3 soft latch random number register at addresses FF66[H] to FF67[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RL3 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numeric data indicating that value is acquired by the soft latch.

Each register at addresses FF68[H] through FF6B[H] can store random numbers that can be obtained using the soft-latch random number acquisition function of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Of these, the RS0 soft-latch random number register at address FF68[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RS0 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft-latch. The RS1 soft-latch random number register at address FF69[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RS1 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft-latch. The RS2 soft-latch random number register at address FF6A[H] can store random numbers that can be generated by channel RS2 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating that value is acquired by the soft-latch. The RS3 soft latch random number register at address FF6B[H] can store the random numbers that can be generated by channel RS3 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when numerical data indicating the value is obtained by the soft latch.

RL0 hard latch random number register number "0" at addresses FF88[H] to FF89[H] and RL0 hard latch random number register number "1" at addresses FF98[H] to FF99[H] can store random numbers generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when numerical data indicating the value of the random number is acquired by the hard latch. Here, the RL0 hard latch random number register includes multiple storage areas corresponding to multiple register numbers, and different hard latch conditions can be set corresponding to the storage areas of different register numbers. For example, the RL0 hard latch random number register number "0," which is the RL0 hard latch random number register corresponding to register number "0," can establish a hard latch condition when the game ball detection signal from the first start switch 22A is in the ON state. In contrast, RL0 hard latch random number register number "1", which is the RL0 hard latch random number register corresponding to register number "1", can satisfy the hard latch condition when the game ball detection signal from second start switch 22B is in the ON state. As a result, RL0 hard latch random number register number "0" can store numerical data indicating the value of random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, which is obtained in response to the occurrence of a first start winning, when the hard latch acquires that value. RL0 hard latch random number register number "1" can store numerical data indicating the value of random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, which is obtained in response to the occurrence of a second start winning, when the hard latch acquires that value.

Each register with addresses FFF0[H] to FFF2[H] and FF35[H] can store the signal value input at each input port, corresponding to the enabled state of the signal input function using the input port of PIP 105A. Of these, the input port number "0" register with address FFF0[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "0" provided in PIP 105A. The input port number "1" register with address FFF1[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "1" provided in PIP 105A. The input port number "2" register with address FFF2[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "2" provided in PIP 105A. The input port number "3" register with address FF35[H] can store the signal value input for the input port with port number "3" provided in PIP 105A.

In this way, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 only need to be able to control their respective operating states in response to the values stored in the function control register area. Furthermore, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 may also be able to update the values stored in the function control register area in response to their respective operating states. The function control register area is not limited to the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, but may also be a second area for controlling any function.

Figure 123-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the settings in this embodiment for the gaming random numbers shown in Figure 116. The gaming random numbers shown in Figure 116 can be classified into random numbers used to determine the display results in the variable display of special symbols, random numbers used to determine the display results in the variable display of normal symbols, and random numbers used to determine the display mode in the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, depending on their respective uses.

Figure 123-5 (A) shows a setting example AKA11 of gaming random numbers used to determine the display result in the variable display of special symbols. The gaming random numbers in setting example AKA11 include a random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, and a random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for the winning symbol. For example, the random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols can be used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number MR1-2 for winning symbols can be used to determine the designated big hit symbol value or small hit symbol value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol when the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for the winning symbol can be used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2.

The range of random number MR1-1 is the range of values within which random number MR1-1 can be updated, from 0 to 65535. The magnitude of random number MR1-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-1, and is 65536, corresponding to the range of 0 to 65535 for random number MR1-1. Because the magnitude of random number MR1-1 is 65536, the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR1-1 is 2. The maximum value of random number MR1-1 is set by initializing a register associated with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number MR1-1 is updated by hardware updating using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The update condition for random number MR1-1 is the system clock input to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR1-1 include a hard latch corresponding to the start winning and software reading into the random number buffer corresponding to that start winning. The period of the random number MR1-1 is 4.369 ms.

The range of random number MR1-2 is the range of values within which random number MR1-2 can be updated, from 0 to 199. The magnitude of random number MR1-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-2, and is 200, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 199 for random number MR1-2. Because the magnitude of random number MR1-2 is 200, the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of random number MR1-2 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR1-2 is set by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random number MR1-2 is software update SA1. The update condition for random number MR1-2 is a timer interrupt after a specified time has elapsed. The acquisition condition for random number MR1-2 is reading it by software corresponding to the start winning. The period of the random numbers MR1-2 is 800 ms.

The range of random number MR1-3 is the range of values within which random number MR1-3 can be updated, and is the same as random number MR1-2, from "0" to "199." The magnitude of random number MR1-3 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-3, and is the same as random number MR1-2, "200," corresponding to the range of random number MR1-3, which is "0" to "199." Because random number MR1-3 has a magnitude of "200," the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. For random number MR1-3, the number of bytes of numeric data used to update its value is "1." The maximum value of random number MR1-3 is set by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random number MR1-3 is software update SA2. The update conditions for random numbers MR1-3 include a timer interrupt due to the passage of a predetermined time, and the presence of a loop process that serves as standby processing within the main game control process P_MAIN. The acquisition condition for random numbers MR1-3 is when random numbers MR1-2 have completed one cycle. The period for random numbers MR1-3 is indefinite due to the update conditions.

Figure 123-5 (B) shows setting example AKA12 of the gaming random numbers used to determine the display result in the variable display of normal symbols. The gaming random numbers in setting example AKA12 include random number MR2-1 for the symbol per normal symbol and random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the symbol per normal symbol. For example, random number MR2-1 for the symbol per normal symbol can be used to determine the normal symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol as the display result of the normal symbol. Random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the symbol per normal symbol, can be used when setting the initial value of random number MR1-2.

The range of random number MR2-1 is the range of values within which random number MR2-1 can be updated, from 0 to 198. The magnitude of random number MR2-1 is the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR2-1, and is 199, corresponding to the range of 0 to 198 for random number MR2-1. Because the magnitude of random number MR2-1 is 199, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of random number MR2-1 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR2-1 is set by immediate value setting in the program code. The method for updating random number MR2-1 is software update SA1. The update condition for random number MR2-1 is a timer interrupt upon the passage of a predetermined time. The acquisition condition for random number MR2-1 is a software readout in response to a gaming ball passing through pass gate 41, which can be configured as a normal symbol activation port. The period of the random number MR2-1 is 796 ms.

The range of random number MR2-2 is the range of values with which random number MR2-2 can be updated, and is the same as random number MR2-1, from "0" to "198." The magnitude of random number MR2-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR2-2, and is the same as random number MR2-1, "199," corresponding to the range of random number MR2-2, which is "0" to "198." Since random number MR2-2 has a magnitude of "199," the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR2-2 is "1." The maximum value of random number MR2-2 is set by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random number MR2-2 is software update SA2. The update conditions for random number MR2-2 include a timer interrupt due to the passage of a predetermined time, and the presence of a loop process that serves as standby processing within the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The acquisition condition for random number MR2-2 is when random number MR2-1 has completed one cycle. The period of random number MR2-2 is indefinite due to the update conditions.

Figure 123-5 (C) shows a setting example AKA13 of gaming random numbers used to determine the display mode in the variable display of special and normal symbols. The gaming random numbers in setting example AKA13 include a random number MR3-1 for a normal symbol variation pattern, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, a random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. For example, the random number MR3-1 for a normal symbol variation pattern can be used to determine a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variable display of a normal symbol. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect can be used to determine the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol where the special symbol display result is "miss." The random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type can be used to select a variation pattern type corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol. The random numbers MR3-4 for the variation patterns can be used to determine the variation patterns corresponding to the variable display of special symbols.

The range of random number MR3-1 is the range of values within which random number MR3-1 can be updated, from 0 to 232. The magnitude of random number MR3-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-1, and is 233, which corresponds to the range of random number MR3-1, from 0 to 232. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-1 is 233, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-1 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR3-1 is set by initializing a register associated with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number MR3-1 is updated by hardware updating using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for random number MR3-1 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The condition for obtaining the random number MR3-1 is the start of fluctuations in the variable display of normal symbols. The period of the random number MR3-1 is 0.249 [ms].

The range of random number MR3-2 is the range of values within which random number MR3-2 can be updated, from 0 to 65518. The magnitude of random number MR3-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-2, and is 65519, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 65518 for random number MR3-2. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-2 is 65519, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-2 is 2. The maximum value of random number MR3-2 is set by initializing a register associated with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number MR3-2 is updated by hardware updating using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The update condition for random number MR3-2 is the system clock input to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR3-2 include reading it into the random number buffer using software that corresponds to the initial winnings. The period of the random number MR3-2 is 139.774 [ms].

The range of random number MR3-3 is the range of values within which random number MR3-3 can be updated, from 0 to 240. The magnitude of random number MR3-3 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-3, and is 241, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 240 for random number MR3-3. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-3 is 241, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-3 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR3-3 is set by initializing a register associated with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number MR3-3 is updated by hardware updating using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for random number MR3-3 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR3-3 include reading it into the random number buffer using software that corresponds to the initial winnings. The period of the random number MR3-3 is 0.257 [ms].

The range of random number MR3-4 is the range of values within which random number MR3-4 can be updated, from 0 to 250. The magnitude of random number MR3-4 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR3-4, and is 251, which corresponds to the range of 0 to 250 for random number MR3-4. Because the magnitude of random number MR3-4 is 251, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numeric data used to update the value of random number MR3-4 is 1. The maximum value of random number MR3-4 is set by initializing a register associated with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number MR3-4 is updated by hardware updating using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for random number MR3-4 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The conditions for obtaining random numbers MR3-4 include reading them into a random number buffer using software that corresponds to the initial winnings. The period of random numbers MR3-4 is 0.268 [ms].

Software update SA1, which is the method for updating random numbers MR1-2 and MR2-1, can be updated by adding 1 to the previous value each time the software update process is executed. If the updated value exceeds the maximum random number value, it is changed to "0," the minimum random number value. Furthermore, if the updated value matches the random number initial value, the corresponding initial random number is used to set the current random number value and stored as the new random number initial value. For example, for random number MR1-2, if the updated value matches the random number initial value, random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the current random number value, and this random number value is stored as the new random number initial value. For random number MR2-1, if the updated value matches the random number initial value, random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is used to set the current random number value, and this random number value is stored as the new random number initial value.

Software update SA2, which is the method for updating random numbers MR1-3 and MR2-2, can update the previous value by adding 1 each time the software update process is executed. If the updated value exceeds the maximum random number value, it is changed to "0," the minimum random number value. In this case, unlike software update SA1, no initial random number value is used, so the updated value will be either the previous value plus 1, or the minimum random number value of "0."

Figure 123-6 is a diagram for explaining the random number update period when updating random numbers using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B included in the random number circuit 104. Here, the random numbers that can be generated by channels RL0 to RL4 provided in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A are referred to as 16-bit random numbers RLn. Also, the random numbers that can be generated by channels RS0 to RS4 provided in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B are referred to as 8-bit random numbers RSn. The period in which the 16-bit random number RLn that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A completes one cycle is determined by different relational expressions depending on whether the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is a specific maximum value expressed using a power of 2. The cycle in which the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, completes one cycle is determined by a different relational equation depending on whether the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn is a specific maximum value expressed using a power of 2.

Figure 123-6 (A) shows a 16-bit random number period setting example AKA21 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The 16-bit random number period is the period in which the 16-bit random number RLn, which can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, completes one cycle. In the 16-bit random number period setting example AKA21, if the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn corresponds to 2m-1 where m = 9 to 16, the period in which the 16-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., the count clock period. The value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, is a linear function where the magnitude of the 16-bit random number RLn is used as a variable. In contrast, if the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn does not correspond to 2m-1 when m is any value between 9 and 16, the period in which the 16-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., 32 times the count clock period. It is then a linear function of the maximum value plus 1, i.e., the magnitude of the 16-bit random number RLn, which can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Thus, when the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is a specific maximum value, the random number update period is shorter than when the maximum value is other than the specific maximum value, i.e., the random number value update speed is faster.

Figure 123-6 (B) shows an example AK22 of an 8-bit random number period setting for the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The 8-bit random number period is the period during which the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, completes one cycle. In the 8-bit random number period setting example AK22, if the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn corresponds to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8, the period during which the 8-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., the count clock period. The value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn, is a linear function with the variable being the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn. In contrast, if the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8, the period during which the 8-bit random number sequence completes one cycle is proportional to the inverse of the count clock frequency, i.e., 16 times the count clock period. The value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the value becomes a linear function when the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn is used as a variable. In this way, when the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B is a specific maximum value, the random number update period is shorter than when the maximum value is other than the specific maximum value, i.e., the random number value update speed is faster.

Figure 123-6 (C) shows a comparative random number example AKA23, which compares the random number values that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update the random number values corresponding to the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol and the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the random number values corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern.

The maximum value of random number MR1-1 is "65535," which corresponds to 2m-1 when m = 16. This results in a period of 4.369 ms, and an update rate of 15,000 times/ms. The maximum value of random number MR3-2 is "65518," which does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 9 to 16. This results in a period of 139.774 ms, and an update rate of 469 times/ms. The maximum value of random number MR3-3 is "240," which does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8. This results in a period of 0.257 ms, and an update rate of 938 times/ms. The maximum value of random number MR3-4 is 250, which does not correspond to 2m-1 when m is any value between 5 and 8. As a result, the period of random number MR3-4 is 0.268 ms, and the update rate at this time is 938 times/ms.

As such, the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A include random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols and random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. Both random numbers MR1-1 and MR3-2 have a numeric data byte count of "2," consisting of a specific number of bytes. Since the size of random number MR1-1 is "65536" and the size of random number MR3-2 is "65519," if the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR1-1 is a specific number, the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR3-2 is a predetermined number smaller than the specific number. The update rate of random number MR1-1 is 15,000 times/ms, and the update rate of random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms, meaning that random number MR1-1 has a faster update rate than random number MR3-2. This prevents random numbers from being generated synchronously, allowing for appropriate updates to random numbers.

Furthermore, the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A include the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B include the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. For all of these random numbers MR3-2 to MR3-4, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. The update rate for random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms, while the update rate for random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 is 938 times/ms. In other words, the update rate for random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 is twice the update rate for random number MR3-2, which is an integer multiple of that. Therefore, if random number MR3-2 is the first random number value and random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are the second random number values, the first random number value has an update speed of the first speed, and the second random number value has an update speed of the second speed, which is an integer multiple of the first speed. The update range for random number MR3-2 is "0" to "65518", the update range for random number MR3-3 is "0" to "240", and the update range for random number MR3-4 is "0" to "250". Therefore, the total number of random number values included in each update range is different for the first random number value and the second random number value, and the total number of random number values included in both update ranges is a prime number. This prevents synchronization of random number values and enables appropriate random number value updates.

The CPU 103 is provided with multiple registers, including a program counter, interrupt register, stack pointer, index register, flag register, address register, and general-purpose registers including an accumulator. The index register, flag register, and general-purpose register may be provided as main registers and sub-registers. The registers included in the main registers and sub-registers, and the stack pointer may be provided so that multiple register banks can be configured. The multiple register banks may include a first register bank for use within an area that can be used when executing a game program, and a second register bank for use outside an area that can be used when executing a non-game program. This eliminates the need to save and restore values stored in general-purpose registers, etc., to and from the stack area when switching between executing a game program and a non-game program, for example, thereby preventing an increase in program size and processing load.

The program counter, also known as the PC register, holds the address value of the next instruction to be executed by the CPU 103. The value stored in the program counter is counted up sequentially each time an instruction is executed, and is set to the address value of the branch destination of a branch instruction. The interrupt register, also known as the I register, can hold the upper address value of the interrupt vector table. The value stored in the I register is set in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The stack pointer, also known as the SP register, can hold address values corresponding to game stack areas and non-game stack areas. The value stored in the stack pointer can specify a destination address for saving and holding a stored value or immediate value in a predetermined register (including the program counter) or a register specified by an instruction in response to an interrupt occurrence, execution of a PUSH instruction, or execution of a subroutine call instruction such as a CALL instruction, a CALLF instruction, or a RST instruction. Upon saving, the value is updated to indicate the start address of the storage area holding the stored value. The value stored in the stack pointer can also specify a read address for restoring a saved register value in response to the end of interrupt processing, execution of a POP instruction, or the end of subroutine processing. Upon this restoration, the value is updated to indicate the address corresponding to the read value. The stack pointer can also be set to a stored value or immediate value in a register specified by a load instruction such as an LD instruction.

Index registers include the IX register and the IY register, each with 2 bytes of storage capacity capable of storing 16-bit data. The accumulator is also called the A register. Other general-purpose registers include multiple registers with 1 byte of storage capacity capable of storing 8-bit data, such as the B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register. The B register and C register can be used as the BC register of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data. The D register and E register can be used as the DE register of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data. The H register and L register can be used as the HL register of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data.

The internal registers of the CPU 103 can update stored values in response to calculation instructions and transfer instructions executed by the CPU 103, and are used to specify program addresses, data addresses, or built-in register addresses provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and to hold calculation data and transfer data.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the instruction set for causing the CPU 103 to execute a program is composed of transfer instructions such as load instructions, subroutine call instructions, jump instructions, other calculation instructions including arithmetic operation instructions and logical operation instructions, input/output instructions, etc. Computer programs such as game programs and non-game programs that can be executed by the CPU 103 are prepared in advance as program code that describes these various instructions and are stored in ROM 101.

The load instruction is a transfer instruction that can be used to store and set data read from a memory area or internal device area of ROM 101 or RAM 102 in an internal register of CPU 103, to write and store a value stored in an internal register of CPU 103 in a memory area or internal device area of RAM 102, and to set or store a numerical value specified by an operand as an immediate value in an internal register of CPU 103 or a memory area or internal device area of RAM 102. The target to which data is transferred by a load instruction can be specified according to the instruction code and operand, and generally includes the source and destination of the data. However, if an immediate value is specified by the operand, the source of the data is not included.

Load instructions include the normal LD instruction, the special LDQ instruction, the special LDF instruction, and the special ICPLD instruction. The normal LD instruction is also called the normal transfer instruction. The special LDQ instruction is also called the first special transfer instruction. The special LDF instruction is also called the second special transfer instruction. The special ICPLD instruction is also called the third special transfer instruction.

The LD instruction, which is a normal transfer instruction, is a normal transfer instruction that can transfer data by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address when transferring data to a storage area or built-in device area in ROM 101 or RAM 102. Furthermore, when transferring data to a storage area or built-in device area in ROM 101 or RAM 102, the LD instruction, which is a normal transfer instruction, can use a pair register such as the HL register as a pointer to specify the destination or source address using the pointer to transfer data.

The LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, can transfer data by specifying only the lower address using the Q register, a special register included in the internal registers of the CPU 103. A value indicating the upper address is preset in the Q register, and by combining this with the lower address specified by the LDQ instruction, it is possible to specify the destination or source address and transfer data.

The LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, can transfer data using less program code than the LD instruction, which is the normal transfer instruction. However, in programs that frequently change the value stored in the Q register, the amount of program code may actually be greater than with the normal LD instruction. Therefore, it is sufficient to be able to transfer data using the LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, in response to processes that require multiple transfers of various data to the game work area at addresses F000 [H] to F0D7 [H], the function setting register area at addresses FE00 [H] to FEBF [H], or the function control register area at addresses FF00 [H] to FFFF [H].

The second special transfer instruction, the LDF instruction, allows data to be transferred by specifying only the lower addresses of data stored in a specific address range. The specific address range is, for example, the range from address 1200 [H] to 1DFF [H]. Therefore, by pre-setting the game data area of ROM 101 to be included in this specific address range and combining it with the lower address specified by the LDF instruction, the source address can be specified and data can be transferred. Note that the game data area of ROM 101 is read-only and not writable, so the address of the game data area cannot be specified as the destination address.

The second special transfer instruction, the LDF instruction, can transfer data using a smaller amount of program code than the normal transfer instruction, the LD instruction. However, since the specific address range is fixed by specification, it is sufficient to set a storage area for frequently used data, such as the game data area of ROM 101, to be included in the specific address range, and then be able to transfer data using the second special transfer instruction, the LDF instruction.

The third special transfer instruction, the ICPLD instruction, compares the update target value with the comparison judgment value, and updates the update target value by adding 1 if the update target value is less than the comparison judgment value, but changes the update target value to the minimum value of "0" if the update target value is equal to or greater than the comparison judgment value. The update target value may be the value indicated by the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer, or the value stored in a register. The comparison judgment value may be the value stored in a register, or the value indicated by the operand of the ICPLD instruction.

In this way, the third special transfer instruction, the ICPLD instruction, is a single compare and add instruction that compares the update target value with the comparison judgment value, adds 1 to the update target value if the comparison result is less than the comparison judgment value, and changes the update target value to the minimum value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the comparison judgment value.

Note that setting a stored value in an internal register of CPU 103 using an immediate value from the operand of a transfer command is also referred to as "setting." Reading stored data from the game data area of ROM 101 or the game work area of RAM 102 and storing it in an internal register of CPU 103 is also referred to as "loading." Storing a stored value in an internal register of CPU 103 in a buffer, counter, timer, or any other storage area provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is also referred to as "storing."

Figure 123-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON is included in the processing that can be called from the main processing P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 117, and can be executed in step S1 in response to the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON, it disables interrupts (step AKS1), and then sets the in-area stack pointer initial value to the stack pointer (step AKS2). The in-area stack pointer initial value may be address F200 [H], which is the final address of the gaming stack area plus 1, corresponding to the initial state in which no saved data is stored in the gaming stack area.

Following step AKS2, a connection confirmation signal ON output value is set by a transfer instruction for setting the internal register of CPU 103 (step AKS3). The connection confirmation signal ON output value is a value indicating that the connection confirmation signal is ON, and may be, for example, 00 [H]. At this time, a function control register upper address is set to the Q register by a transfer instruction for setting the Q register contained in the internal register of CPU 103 (step AKS4). The function control register upper address is the value FF [H] indicating the upper address of the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 123-4. Once the function control register upper address is set in this way, a transfer instruction using the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register stores the connection confirmation signal ON output value (step AKS5). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register is set to the upper address of the function control register area by step AKS4. Therefore, by using a transfer command to write to a memory area at a specified address, such as a special 2-byte LDQ command that specifies a lower address, the connection confirmation signal ON output value set in step AKS3 can be stored in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area. In step AKS5, the connection confirmation signal ON output value is stored in the output port number "1" register provided in the function control register area. This sets the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the dispensing control board to the ON state.

When the connection confirmation signal is set to the ON state in step AKS5, the SCU0 command register clear output value is stored by a transfer instruction using the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register (step AKS6). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area in step AKS4. The SCU0 command register clear output value can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. Therefore, the SCU0 command register clear output value can be stored in the function control register at a specified address in the function control register area by a transfer instruction for writing to a memory area at a specified address, such as a 3-byte special LDQ instruction that specifies the lower address and the SCU0 command register clear output value. In step AKS6, the SCU0 command register clear output value is stored in the SCU0 command register located at address FF28 [H] in the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 123-4. This resets the serial communication function using channel SCU0 of the serial communication circuit 139 to its initial state.

After step AKS6, the SCU1 command register clear output value is stored using a transfer instruction that uses the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register (step AKS7). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area in step AKS4. The SCU1 command register clear output value can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. Therefore, the SCU1 command register clear output value can be stored in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area by a transfer instruction that writes to a memory area at a specified address, such as a 3-byte special LDQ instruction that specifies the lower address and the SCU0 command register clear output value. In step AKS7, the SCU1 command register clear output value is stored in the SCU1 command register located at address FF2C[H] in the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 123-4. This resets the serial communication function using channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 to its initial state.

When these serial communication functions are controlled to their initial state, a transfer command for setting the internal registers of CPU 103 sets the interrupt vector table upper address (step AKS8). The interrupt vector table upper address is the upper address of the interrupt vector table provided in the game program area of ROM 101. The interrupt vector table stores the top address at a table position corresponding to the interrupt priority for, for example, the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control, which is executed in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. This interrupt vector table upper address is set in the I register by a transfer command for setting the internal registers of CPU 103 (step AKS9).

After step AKS9, the value stored in the Q register is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS10). The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area in step AKS4. When this stored value is subtracted by 1, the upper address of the function setting register area in the setting example AKA01 shown in FIG. 123-3 becomes stored in the Q register. In this way, after the function control registers in the function control register area are set, the function setting registers in the function setting register area become configurable. At this time, a transfer command for setting the pointer is used to set the function setting register storage value table address (step AKS11). The function setting register storage value table address is the address of the function setting register storage value table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, a transfer command for reading the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is used to load the processing count (step AKS12). Furthermore, a function setting register store command is used to set the function setting register storage value table (step AKS13). The function setting register store instruction is merely an instruction that specifies the function setting register based on the data stored at the address obtained by adding 1 to the address pointed to by the pointer, stores the function setting register setting value indicated by the data stored at the address obtained by adding 2 to the address pointed to by the pointer in the specified function setting register, adds 2 to the value stored in the pointer, and subtracts 1 from the number of processes, repeating this process until the number of processes is 0. In this way, the function setting register can be initialized.

Once the initial setting of the function setting register is completed in step AKS13, an access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register (step AKS14). The access permission output value of the RWM access protect register is set to, for example, 01 [H] by a transfer command for setting an internal register of the CPU 103. This access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register by a transfer command for writing to the memory area at the top address in the function setting register area. The RWM access protect register enables function control to allow access to RAM 102, which is the RWM, in response to the setting of the access permission output value 01 [H]. Therefore, by storing the access permission output value in the RWM access protect register in step AKS14, access to RAM 102 is permitted in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After step AKS14, the upper address of the game work area, which serves as the working area of RAM 102, is set in the Q register (step AKS15), and the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON is then terminated. In this way, after access to RAM 102 is permitted in step AKS14, the value F0 [H] indicating the upper address of the game work area in RAM 102 is set in the Q register. After step AKS15, when the LDQ instruction, which is the first special transfer instruction, is executed, the value F0 [H] stored in the Q register can be used as the upper address of the transfer destination or transfer source without being specified by an operand. This reduces the program size for processing using the game work area in RAM 102, improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

Figure 123-8 shows an example configuration AKT01 of the function setting register storage value table used in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON. In the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON, for example, the function setting register storage table whose address was set in step AKS11 is used to load the number of processes in step AKS12, and the stored values of each function setting register are stored by a function setting register store command in step AKS13. The function setting register storage value table of example configuration AKT01 stores a value of 18 [H] indicating the number of processes at a starting address of 1200 [H]. In step AKS12, this table data is read and loaded into an internal register of the CPU 103. Thereafter, the function setting register store command in step AKS13 sequentially reads table data that combines the lower addresses and stored values of the function setting registers, making it possible to store the stored values in the function setting registers corresponding to each lower address.

In the function setting register storage value table of configuration example AKT01, the table data is configured so that the stored value of a function setting register with a smaller value indicating a lower address can be set first, and the stored value of a function setting register with a larger value indicating a lower address can be set later. As a result, in the function setting register area, the stored values of each function setting register are set in the order of the stored value of the function setting register closest to the first address being set first, and the stored value of the function setting register closest to the last address being set last. This makes it easier to design and manage the data indicating the stored values of the function setting registers, improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A corresponds to four channels RL0 to RL3 and can start updating from the channel whose maximum value setting register is set to a value indicating the maximum random number value. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B corresponds to four channels RS0 to RS3 and can start updating from the channel whose maximum value setting register is set to a value indicating the maximum random number value. The function setting register area for setting example AKA01 shown in Figure 123-3 includes an RL0 maximum value setting register at addresses FE3F[H] to FE40[H], an RL1 maximum value setting register at addresses FE41[H] to FE42[H], an RL2 maximum value setting register at addresses FE43[H] to FE44[H], and an RL3 maximum value setting register at addresses FE45[H] to FE46[H], each corresponding to the four channels RL0 to RL3 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Furthermore, this function setting register area includes an RS0 maximum value setting register at address FE47[H], an RS1 maximum value setting register at address FE48[H], an RS2 maximum value setting register at address FE49[H], and an RS3 maximum value setting register at address FE4A[H], which correspond to the four channels RS0 to RS4 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The function setting register storage value table of configuration example AKT01 is configured so that, of these maximum value setting registers, the stored value of the RL0 maximum value setting register is set first, then the stored value of the RL2 maximum value setting register, then the stored value of the RS1 maximum value setting register, then the stored value of the RS2 maximum value setting register, and finally the RS3 maximum value setting register. Therefore, updating of channel RL0 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A starts first, then updating of channel RL2 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A starts next, then updating of channel RS1 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B starts next, then updating of channel RS2 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B starts next, and finally updating of channel RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B starts last. In this way, because updates start in order from the random number value for which the maximum random number value is set, the uncertainty of the random number value is increased depending on the timing at which the update of the random number value starts, reducing the processing load and enabling appropriate updating of the random number value.

The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON is included in the processing that can be called from the game control main processing P_MAIN, which is a startup processing executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It uses the function setting register storage value table of the example configuration AKT01 to set storage values in the function setting register area, which serves as a storage area for functions. Since the maximum random number value updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can be set, the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON can be executed as a maximum value setting processing. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update a first random number value consisting of 16 bits, which corresponds to a specific number of bytes (2 bytes). The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update a second random number value consisting of 8 bits, which corresponds to a predetermined number of bytes (1 byte) smaller than the specific number of bytes. When the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON is executed, the function setting register storage value table of configuration example AKT01 is used to set the maximum random number value of the first random number value that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and then the maximum random number value of the second random number value that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. In this way, by setting the first random number value of a specific number of bytes and then setting the second random number value of a predetermined number of bytes, the first random number value and second random number value can be stably updated, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

Figure 123-9 shows an example of the configuration of the RWM access protection register. The RWM access protection register is located at address FF00[H] in the example configuration AKA02 of the function control register area shown in Figure 123-4. The value stored in the RWM access protection register will differ depending on whether access to the RAM 102 that serves as the RWM is permitted or prohibited.

Figure 123-9 (A) shows an example of the bit configuration of the RWM access protection register. The RWM access protection register can store 8-bit data RAP with bit numbers "0" to "7", and bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" can be set to 0 [B] or 1 [B]. In contrast, bit data with bit numbers "1" to "7" are always set to 0 [B] and represent fixed values that are never set to "1".

Figure 123-9 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of bit data RAP of the RWM access protection register. In bit data RAP, bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" is an RWM access control bit; setting it to 0 [B] prohibits access to the RWM, and setting it to 1 [B] allows access to the RWM. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins, bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" is set to its initial value, 0 [B]. This makes it possible to prohibit access to RAM 102, which serves as the RWM, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins.

Figure 123-10 is a flowchart showing an example of power-off processing P_POWER_OFF. Power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is included in the processing that can be called from the game control timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 118, and can be executed in step S51 each time a timer interrupt occurs. When power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is executed, the CPU 103 sets the backup monitoring timer address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS31). The backup monitoring timer address is the address of the backup monitoring timer located in the game work area of RAM 102.

Input port number "3" is input (step AKS32). Input port number "3" is an input port assigned port number "3" and includes a power check signal input bit. Therefore, a logical AND operation is performed using the input data for input port number "3" and the check data corresponding to the bit position of the power check signal input bit. At this time, whether the power check signal input bit is "0" is determined based on whether the zero flag is on (step AKS33). When the power check signal input bit's bit value is 0 [B], which corresponds to "0," it indicates that the power check signal is in the off state, and when the bit value is 1 [B], which corresponds to "1," it indicates that the power check signal is in the on state.

If the power check signal input bit is "1" rather than "0" (step AKS33; No), backup monitoring timer clear data is stored using a transfer command that can update the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS34). In step AKS34, by storing the clear data in the backup monitoring timer, the backup monitoring timer can be cleared when the power check signal is in the ON state, in response to a state other than power-off determination being made.

If the power check signal input bit is "0" in response to step AKS33 (step AKS33; Yes), the backup monitoring timer's time count is updated by adding 1 (step AKS35). The backup monitoring timer is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS36). Then, a calculation return command that compares the backup monitoring timer's time count with the judgment value corresponding to the backup judgment time (step AKS37) confirms that the backup monitoring timer does not indicate the backup judgment time (step AKS38). This calculation return command corresponds to a zero flag that turns off when the backup monitoring timer's time count differs from the judgment value corresponding to the backup judgment time, thereby terminating the power-off process and enabling a return to the special symbol process. Thus, if the backup monitoring timer does not indicate the backup judgment time (step AKS38; Yes), the power-off process is terminated.

If the backup monitoring timer indicates the backup determination time in response to step AKS38 (step AKS38; No), the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC is executed (step AKS39). The checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 may be common to the checksum calculation process included in the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2 in the main game control process P_MAIN shown in FIG. 117. By executing a common checksum calculation process in response to the start and stop of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, it becomes possible to determine whether recovery using backup data is possible based on whether the contents stored in the game work area of RAM 102 are retained unchanged. The checksum data created by the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 is stored in the checksum buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area at the address indicated by the pointer (step AKS40).

After step AKS40, an exclusive OR instruction is executed to set clear data to the output value data (step AKS41). This exclusive OR instruction executes an exclusive OR on the stored values of a single register, resulting in all bit values being the exclusive OR of the same value. This allows the stored value to be initialized to clear data 00 [H]. This clear data is stored in the RWM access protect register by a transfer instruction to write it to the memory area at the top address in the function setting register area (step AKS42). The RWM access protect register enables function control to prohibit access to the RWM RAM 102 in response to the setting of the clear data 00 [H]. Therefore, by storing the clear data in the RWM access protect register in step AKS42, access to the RAM 102 is prohibited in response to a power outage in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After step AKS42, output port numbers "0" through "10" are cleared (step AKS43). Output port numbers "0" through "10" are the output ports with port numbers "0" through "10," and represent all of the output ports in the gaming control microcomputer 100. Therefore, step AKS43 clears all of the output ports in the gaming control microcomputer 100 in response to the power supply cutoff in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a transfer command for setting an internal register in the CPU 103 sets a connection confirmation signal OFF output value (step AKS44). The connection confirmation signal OFF output value is a value indicating that the connection confirmation signal is OFF, and may be, for example, 01 [H]. This connection confirmation signal OFF output value is stored in the output port number "1" register by a transfer command for writing it to a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS45). As a result, the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board is set to OFF.

Following step AKS45, a PTC0 interrupt disable output value is set by a transfer command for setting an internal register in the CPU 103 (step AKS46). The PTC0 interrupt disable output value is an output value for disabling timer interrupts using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136. This PTC0 interrupt disable output value is stored in the PTC0 control register by a transfer command for writing to a function setting register at a specified address in the function setting register area (step AKS47). The PTC0 control register can set the usage state of the timing function using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136. In step AKS47, the PTC0 interrupt disable output value set in step AKS46 is stored in the PTC0 control register, thereby disabling timer interrupts for game control in response to a power outage in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Once this setting corresponding to the elapse of the backup determination time has been made, the system transitions to a standby state by executing a loop process. In this standby state, input port number "3" is input (step AKS48), and it is determined whether the power supply confirmation signal input bit is "0" (step AKS49). If the power supply confirmation signal is in the OFF state and the power supply confirmation signal input bit is "0" (step AKS49; Yes), the system continues the loop process returning to step AKS48. This allows the system to maintain a standby state until operation is halted due to a power outage in response to an interruption in the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby preventing inappropriate changes to stored data and runaway processing by the CPU 103.

If the power check signal input bit is "1" and not "0" in response to step AKS49 (step AKS49; No), the power interruption recovery vector table address is set to the stack pointer (step AKS50), and then the power interruption processing P_POWER_OFF is terminated by an interrupt return instruction. The power interruption recovery vector table address is the address of the power interruption recovery vector table provided in the game program area of ROM 101. The interrupt return instruction can use the stack pointer as a pointer to set the data stored in the memory area indicated by the address specified by the stored value of the stack pointer to the program counter. For example, the data stored in the memory area indicated by the address specified by the stored value of the stack pointer is set to the lower byte of the program counter, and the data stored in the memory area indicated by the address specified by the value obtained by adding 1 to the stored value of the stack pointer is set to the upper byte of the program counter.

Figure 123-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the data configuration related to the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF. In the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF, for example, step AKS38 executes branch processing using the time value of the backup monitoring timer, and step AKS40 saves checksum data using the checksum buffer. Furthermore, step AKS50 sets the power-off recovery vector table address, which enables the game control program to be executed from the beginning if the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not stop operating after a power-off interruption is detected and normal power supply is resumed. In this way, the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF uses the backup monitoring timer, checksum buffer, and power-off recovery vector table to enable control when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted.

Figure 123-11 (A) shows a configuration example AKB01 of a memory area that serves as a backup data area. The backup data area of configuration example AKB01 can store backup setting data that is used when backing up data stored in the game work area of RAM 102. This backup data area includes a backup monitoring timer at address F000[H] and a checksum buffer at address F0DE[H]. Address F000[H] is the starting address of the game work area, and address F0DE[H] is the ending address of the game work area. In this way, providing a backup data area at the starting address and ending address of the game work area enables appropriate backup of data stored in the game work area of RAM 102.

Figure 123-11 (B) shows an example configuration AKT11 of a power failure recovery vector table. The power failure recovery vector table of configuration AKT11 can specify a return address from power failure processing in response to an interrupt return command when normal power supply is resumed. The power failure recovery vector table is composed of table data containing lower address designation data 00 [H] stored at address 0016 [H] in the game program area of ROM 101 and upper address designation data 00 [H] stored at address 0017 [H] in the game program area of ROM 101. In step AKS50 of the power failure processing P_POWER_OFF, data indicating address 0016 [H] is set in the stack pointer as the power failure recovery vector table address. Thereafter, an interrupt return command is issued to set the stored value of the program counter to 0000 [H], thereby restoring processing and enabling the game control main processing P_MAIN to be executed from the beginning.

Figure 123-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number update process P_RANDOM is included in the processes that can be called from the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control shown in Figure 118, and can be executed in step S56 in response to the occurrence of a periodic timer interrupt after a predetermined time has elapsed, for example, 4 ms. On the other hand, the random number update process P_RANDOM is not included in the processes that can be called from the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 117, and is not executed in the loop process that is repeated until a timer interrupt occurs after step S7. Therefore, although the random number update process P_RANDOM is included in the first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is not included in the second process that can be repeatedly executed until the first process is executed. Furthermore, although the random number update process P_RANDOM can be called and executed in the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT that controls the progress of the game, it cannot be called and executed in the standby process that serves as a repeated loop process after startup processes such as the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1 in the game control main process P_MAIN that is executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The random number update process P_RANDOM uses internal registers of the CPU 103, such as the B register, DE register, and HL register, to update the numerical data indicating the values of the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol and the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used to determine the confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol in a special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is used to determine the confirmed normal symbol that results in the display of the normal symbol in a normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20. The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the random number values for both the winning symbol random number MR1-2 and the normal winning symbol random number MR2-1 using the B register, DE register, and HL register as common internal registers.

When the CPU 103 executes the random number update process P_RANDOM, it sets the winning symbol random number counter address using a transfer command to set the HL register used as a random number pointer (step AKS61). The winning symbol random number counter address is the address of the winning symbol random number counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. The random number pointer can store the address of the random number counter corresponding to the random number value to be updated, and the random number value to be updated can be specified by setting the stored value. In step AKS61, the LDQ command is used to store the address of the winning symbol random number counter in the random number pointer, thereby setting the winning symbol random number MR1-2 as the random number value to be updated.

Following step AKS61, a transfer command is issued to set register B, which is used as the random number maximum register, to set a random number maximum value corresponding to the maximum random number determination value for the winning symbol (step AKS62). The random number maximum register can store the maximum value that the random number to be updated can take, and the maximum random number value can be specified by setting the stored value. In step AKS62, for random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, the maximum value included in the update range of random number MR1-2, such as C7 [H] corresponding to "199", is stored in the random number maximum register using the LD command. This allows the maximum random number value for random number MR1-2, which was set as the random number to be updated in step AKS61, to be set.

After step AKS62, a transfer command is issued to set the DE register used as the initial value pointer, setting the random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol (step AKS63). The random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol is the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol located in the game work area of RAM 102. The initial value pointer can store the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated, and setting the stored value makes it possible to obtain or change the random number initial value. In step AKS63, the LDQ command is used to store the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol in the initial value pointer, thereby making the random number initial value obtainable and changeable corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 selected as the random numbers to be updated in step AKS61. Next, a subroutine call command is issued to execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP (step AKS64). The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 updates the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols, which are the random number values to be updated, and changes the random number initial value, based on the settings in steps AKS61-AKS63.

After the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64, a transfer command is issued to set the HL register used as a random number pointer, setting the random number counter address for the normal symbol (step AKS65). The random number counter address for the normal symbol is the address of the random number counter for the normal symbol located in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS65, the LDQ command is used to store the address of the random number counter for the normal symbol in the random number pointer, thereby setting the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol as the random value to be updated.

Following step AKS65, a transfer instruction is issued to set register B, which is used as the random number maximum value register, to set a random number maximum value corresponding to the random number maximum judgment value for the normal symbol per symbol (step AKS66). In step AKS66, for random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol, the maximum value included in the update range of random number MR2-1, such as C6[H] corresponding to the maximum value "198", is stored in the random number maximum value register using the LD instruction. This allows the maximum random number value of random number MR2-1, which was selected as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, to be set.

Following step AKS66, a transfer instruction is issued to set the DE register used as the initial value pointer, thereby setting the random number initial value data buffer address for the normal symbol (step AKS67). The random number initial value data buffer address for the normal symbol is the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal symbol provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS67, the LDQ instruction is used to store the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal symbol in the initial value pointer, thereby setting the random number initial value for random number MR2-1, which was set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, to be obtainable and changeable. Next, a subroutine call instruction, which is common to step AKS64, is used to execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP (step AKS68). The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 updates the random number value to be updated, MR2-1, for the normal winning symbol, and changes the random number initial value, based on the settings in steps AKS65 to AKS67.

Figure 123-13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the random number update process P_RANDOM. In the random number update process P_RANDOM, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 using the winning symbol random number counter whose address was set in the random number pointer in step AKS61 and the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer whose address was set in the initial value pointer in step AKS63. Furthermore, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 using the normal symbol winning symbol random number counter whose address was set in the random number pointer in step AKS65 and the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer whose address was set in the initial value pointer in step AKS67. The winning symbol random number counter is provided in the special symbol random number buffer area and is capable of storing numerical data corresponding to the winning symbol random numbers MR1-2. The random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols is provided in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number counter for winning normal symbols is provided in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for winning normal symbols. The random number initial value data buffer for winning normal symbols is provided in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number initial value of the random number MR2-1. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM enables software to update the random numbers MR1-2 and MR2-1 using the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer provided in the winning symbol random number data area, the normal symbol winning symbol random number counter, the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer, and the winning symbol random number counter provided in the special symbol random number buffer area.

Figure 123-13 (A) shows a configuration example AKB11 of a random number data area for winning symbols. The winning symbol random number data area of configuration example AKB11 includes a random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols at address F050 [H], a winning symbol initial value random number counter at address F051 [H], a random number counter for normal winning symbols at address F052 [H], a random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols at address F053 [H], and a normal winning symbol initial value random number counter at address F054 [H]. Of these, address F050[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols is set to the initial value pointer by step AKS63 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, address F052[H] of the random number counter for normal symbols is set to the random number pointer by step AKS65 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, and address F053[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for normal symbols is set to the initial value pointer by step AKS67 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The winning symbol initial value random number counter can store numerical data corresponding to random numbers MR1-3, which are the initial values for winning symbols. The normal symbol initial value random number counter can store numerical data corresponding to random numbers MR2-2, which are the initial values for normal symbols.

Figure 123-13 (B) shows an example configuration AKB12 of the special symbol random number buffer area. The special symbol random number buffer area of example configuration AKB12 includes a special symbol determination random number buffer at address F07F[H], a winning symbol random number counter at address F081[H], a variation pattern type selection random number buffer at address F082[H], a variation pattern random number buffer at address F083[H], and a losing effect selection random number buffer at address F084[H]. Of these, the winning symbol random number counter address F081[H] is set to the random number pointer by step AKS61 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The special symbol determination random number buffer is capable of storing numerical data corresponding to the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 obtained from the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type obtained from the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number buffer for variation patterns can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for variation patterns obtained from the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number buffer for selecting a losing effect can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect obtained from the 16-bit random number circuit 104A.

Figure 123-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is included in the processes that can be called from the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 123-12, and can be executed in step AKS64 after the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols have been set in steps AKS61 to AKS63, and can be executed in step AKS68 after the random numbers MR2-1 for normal and winning symbols have been set in steps AKS65 to AKS67. Such initial value change random number update process P_RANCP makes it possible to update the values of the random numbers MR1-2 using numerical data corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols in step AKS64. Additionally, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP uses the numerical data corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol in step AKS68 to update the value of the random number MR2-1.

When the CPU 103 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, it first executes a compare and add instruction (step AKS101). This compare and add instruction uses the stored data at the address indicated by the stored value of the HL register, which is a random number pointer, as the update target value, and the stored value of the B register, which is a random number maximum value register, as the comparison judgment value. It can be executed by a single ICPLD instruction, which is a third special transfer instruction. The stored value of the HL register, which is a random number pointer, indicates the address of the random number counter in which numerical data corresponding to the random number value to be updated is stored. The stored value of the B register, which is a random number maximum value register, indicates the random number maximum value set corresponding to the random number value to be updated. If the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated is less than the stored value of the random number maximum value register, the count value of the random number counter is updated to increment by 1, thereby incrementing the random number value to be updated by 1. In contrast, if the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated is equal to or greater than the value stored in the maximum random number register, the random number counter is cleared and initialized to "0," changing the random number value to the minimum random number value. Therefore, the compare and add instruction of step AKS101 is a single instruction that includes comparing the random number value to be updated with the maximum random number value, incrementing the random number value to be updated by 1 if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value, and changing the random number value to the minimum random number value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value. In this way, when updating the random number value to be updated using the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, a single compare and add instruction is executed first. By executing this single compare and add instruction first, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and update the random number value appropriately.

When the compare and add instruction is executed in step AKS101, a transfer instruction for reading stored data is used to load the random number value pointed to by the random number pointer (step AKS102). The random number pointer and initial value pointer are also exchanged (step AKS103). The random number value loaded in step AKS102 is then compared with the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS104). It is determined whether the compared random number value is different from the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105). The value stored in the DE register, which is the initial value pointer, indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated. Therefore, in step AKS104, after the compare and add instruction of step AKS101 is executed, the random number value to be updated after being updated by the compare and add instruction is compared with the random number initial value.

If the random number value corresponding to step AKS105 differs from the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105; Yes), the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends. When the compare and add instruction of step AKS101 is executed, the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated will indicate the updated random number value to be updated. Then, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends due to the judgment result of step AKS105, the stored value of the random number counter indicating the updated random number value to be updated is stored as the current random number value. Therefore, in step AKS105, if the updated random number value to be updated does not match the random number initial value, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends, allowing the updated random number value to be stored as the current random number value.

If the random number value is the same as the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer in response to step AKS105 (step AKS105; No), the initial value random number counter pointed to when the value stored in the initial value pointer is incremented by 1 is loaded (step AKS106). In the example configuration AKB11 of the winning symbol random number data area shown in Figure 123-13 (A), when 1 is incremented from address F050 [H] where the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer is located, the next address F051 [H] is provided with an initial value random number counter for the winning symbol. Furthermore, when 1 is incremented from address F053 [H] where the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer is located, the next address F054 [H] is provided with an initial value random number counter for the normal symbol winning symbol. Therefore, in step AKS106, if the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol, the count value of the initial value random number counter for the winning symbol is read out. Also, in step AKS106, if the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal winning symbol, the count value of the initial value random number counter for the normal winning symbol is read out. In this way, in step AKS106, the count value of the initial value random number counter can be read out as the initial value random number value.

When the initial value random number counter is loaded in step AKS106, the count value of the initial value random number counter read thereby is stored in the random number counter pointed to by the random number pointer (step AKS107). Since the stored value of the random number pointer indicates the address of the random number counter corresponding to the random number value to be updated, step AKS107 can store the count value of the initial value random number counter as the current random number value to be updated. Therefore, if the result of step AKS105 is that the updated random number value to be updated matches the random number initial value, step AKS107 can store the initial value random number value read in step AKS106 as the current random number value.

Following step AKS107, the count value of the initial value random number counter read in step AKS106 is stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS108), and then the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP ends. Because the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated, step AKS108 can store the count value of the initial value random number counter as a new random number initial value. Therefore, if the result of step AKS105 indicates that the updated random number value to be updated matches the random number initial value, step AKS107 stores the random number value for initial value as the current random number value, and step AKS108 can store the random number value for initial value read in step AKS106 as the new random number initial value. In this way, setting a new random number initial value increases the uncertainty of the random number value, and storing it as the current random number value also prevents an increase in data volume, enabling appropriate random number updating.

The random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 123-12 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 after setting the random number value to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value for the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbols in steps AKS61 to AKS63. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP enables the update of the random number value to be updated and the change of the initial random number value based on the settings for the random number value to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 enables the update of the random number value for the winning symbols MR1-2, which is set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS61, using the maximum random number set in step AKS62 and the initial random number value set in step AKS63. Additionally, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 allows the random number initial value to be changed for the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol that was set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS61 if that value matches the random number initial value set in step AKS63. In this way, appropriate random number values can be updated by updating the set random number value to be updated.

The random number update process P_RANDOM executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 after setting the random number value to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value for the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol in steps AKS65 through AKS67. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 enables the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol, which is set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, to be updated using the maximum random number value set in step AKS66 or the initial random number value set in step AKS67. Furthermore, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 enables the initial random number value to be changed for the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol, which is set as the random number value to be updated in step AKS65, if the value matches the initial random number value set in step AKS67. In this way, appropriate random number values can be updated by updating the set target random number values. Also, appropriate random number values can be updated by updating the set target random number values or changing the initial random number value.

The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is used when determining the display result of the special symbol, through a first update process consisting of steps AKS61 to AKS64, and can update the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which is used when determining the display result of the normal symbol, through a second update process consisting of steps AKS65 to AKS68. Steps AKS61 to AKS64 update the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol as the first random number value, and then steps AKS65 to AKS68 update the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol as the second random number value. The confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol corresponds to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening occurs during jackpot gaming. Additionally, the confirmed special symbol, which is the display result of the special symbol, may correspond to whether or not the game is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends, or the maximum number of variable display times that can be performed in the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. In contrast, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the display result of the normal symbol, corresponds to the opening time and number of times the second large prize opening is opened. Therefore, the display result of the special symbol attracts more attention from players than the display result of the normal symbol. The random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, updates the random number MR1-2 as the first random number value and then updates the random number MR2-1 as the second random number value. By updating the first random number value used to determine the display result that attracts the player's attention before the second random number value, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed and the random number value can be updated appropriately.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64 can update the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, and steps AKS65 to AKS68 can update the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of step AKS64 can be called and executed in response to the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, and the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of step AKS68 can be called and executed in response to the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, updates the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, and the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value, thereby making their initial values changeable. This common update process, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, prevents an increase in program size, stably updates the first random number value and second random number value, and enables appropriate random number value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64, which enable updating of random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, constitute the first update process, and steps AKS65 to AKS68, which enable updating of random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value, constitute the second update process. The first update process can be executed by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64, and the second update process can be executed by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM updates random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, and random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value, thereby enabling their initial values to be changed by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP as a common update process in both the first and second update processes. This common update process, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, prevents an increase in program size, stably updates the first random number value and second random number value, and enables appropriate random number value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64, which enable updating of random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, constitute the first update process, and steps AKS65 to AKS68, which enable updating of random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value, constitute the second update process. The first and second update processes use the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are common internal storage means, to enable updating of random number MR1-2, which will become the first random number value, and random number MR2-1, which will become the second random number value. In this way, the first and second random number values can be stably updated using the common internal storage means, enabling appropriate random number updating.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, before step AKS64 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, steps AKS61 to AKS63 store reference information such as the winning symbol random number counter address, the winning symbol random number maximum judgment value, and the winning symbol random number initial value data buffer address in the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are internal storage means. In addition, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, before step AKS68 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANDCP, steps AKS65 to AKS67 store reference information such as the normal symbol winning symbol random number counter address, the normal symbol winning symbol random number maximum judgment value, and the normal symbol winning symbol random number initial value data buffer address in the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are internal storage means. The instruction used to update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value in step AKS61, and the instruction used to update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value in step AKS65, are common instructions in that they set the HL register of CPU 103, and since step AKS61 sets the random number counter address for the winning symbol but step AKS65 sets the random number counter address for the normal symbol, different reference information can be set. The instruction used to update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and the instruction used to update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value in step AKS66 are common instructions in that they set the B register of CPU 103, and since step AKS62 sets the random number maximum value corresponding to the random number maximum judgment value for the winning symbol but step AKS66 sets the random number maximum value corresponding to the random number maximum judgment value for the normal symbol, different reference information can be set. The instruction used to update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value in step AKS63, and the instruction used to update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value in step AKS67, are common instructions in that they set the DE register of CPU 103. Step AKS63 sets the random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol, while step AKS67 sets the random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol, so different reference information can be set. These steps AKS61 to AKS63 and steps AKS65 to AKS67 use common instructions, such as the LD instruction and the LDQ instruction, which are transfer instructions for setting the internal registers of CPU 103, to enable different reference information to be set. Then, steps AKS64 and AKS68 call and execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP using a common subroutine call instruction. In this way, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, the instruction used to update the random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and the instruction used to update the random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value, are the same. By using a common instruction to make it possible to update the random number MR1-2 as the first random number value and the random number MR2-1 as the second random number value, the first random number value and the second random number value can be stably updated, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

The random number update process P_RANDOM enables updating of the random number MR1-2, which will be the first random number value, through steps AKS61 to AKS64, which constitute the first update process, and enables updating of the random number MR2-1, which will be the second random number value, through steps AKS65 to AKS68, which constitute the second update process. Steps AKS64 and AKS68 then call and execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP shown in FIG. 123-14 first executes a single compare and add instruction, making it possible to execute the compare and add instruction first in both cases of updating the random number MR1-2 as the first random number value and updating the random number MR2-1 as the second random number value. By executing this compare and add instruction first, it is possible to prevent errors from occurring in the first or second random number value and update the random number values appropriately.

When the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, it can update the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, and can change the random number initial value corresponding to the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol using the random number MR1-3, which becomes the initial value for the winning symbol. Furthermore, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, it can update the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, and can change the random number initial value corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol using the random number MR2-2, which becomes the initial value for the winning normal symbol. Therefore, the random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning symbol, is a first initial value random number value used when changing the random number initial value in response to the case where the random number value to be updated is the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which becomes the first random number value, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is a second initial value random number value used when changing the random number initial value in response to the case where the random number value to be updated is the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which becomes the second random number value, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM.

Figure 123-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values. The random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in the process that can be called from the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 117, and can be executed in step S9 of the loop process that is repeated after step S7 until a timer interrupt occurs. In addition, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in the process that can be called from the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control shown in Figure 118, and can be executed in step AKS57 in response to the occurrence of a periodic timer interrupt upon the lapse of a predetermined time, for example, 4 ms. Therefore, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in a first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt upon the lapse of a predetermined time, and a second process that can be executed repeatedly until the first process is executed. Furthermore, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT can be called and executed in the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT that controls the progress of the game, and can also be called and executed in step S9, which is included in the standby process as a repeated loop process, after startup processes such as the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1 in the game control main process P_MAIN that is executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the initial value determination random number update process P_IFINIT is included in processes that can be executed in response to periodic timer interrupts as initial value random number update process, and is also included in processes that can be executed repeatedly at irregular intervals. This makes the update period and update speed of the initial value random number variable uncertain, thereby increasing the uncertainty of the initial value random number variable and enabling appropriate random number value updating.

When the CPU 103 executes the initial value determination random number update process P_TINIT, it sets the winning symbol initial value random number counter address using a transfer instruction to set a pointer (step AKS81). The winning symbol initial value random number counter address is address F051 [H] assigned to the winning symbol initial value random number counter in the winning symbol random number data area configuration example AKB11 shown in Figure 123-13 (A). With the pointer set in this manner, the count value of the winning symbol initial value random number counter can be updated within the update range of "0" to "199" using a compare and add instruction (step AKS82). This compare and add instruction uses the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer as the update target value and the immediate value specified by the operand as the comparison judgment value. It can be executed by a single ICPLD instruction, which is the third special transfer instruction. The value stored in the pointer indicates the address of the random number counter where the numerical data corresponding to the initial value random number to be updated is stored. The immediate value specified by the operand indicates the maximum random number value for the initial value that is set corresponding to the random number value for the initial value to be updated. If the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value for the initial value to be updated is less than the maximum random number value for the initial value, the count value of the random number counter is updated to increment by 1, thereby incrementing the random number value for the initial value to be updated by 1. On the other hand, if the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number value for the initial value to be updated is equal to or greater than the value stored in the maximum random number register for the initial value, the random number counter is cleared and initialized to "0", thereby changing the random number value for the initial value to be updated to the minimum random number value. Therefore, the compare and add instruction in step AKS82 is a single instruction that sets random numbers MR1-3, which serve as the initial values for the winning symbols, to the random number value for the initial value to be updated, compares the random number value for the initial value to the maximum random number for the initial value, increments the random number value for the initial value to be updated by 1 if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value for the initial value, and changes the random number value for the initial value to the minimum random number if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value for the initial value. Note that the compare and add instruction is not limited to an ICPLD instruction in which the address of the stored data indicating the update value is specified by a pointer. For example, it could be an ICPLDQ instruction in which the upper address is set using the Q register and the lower address is set using an immediate value specified in the first operand of the compare and add instruction. In this case, the immediate value specified in the second operand of the compare and add instruction can be set as the comparison judgment value. Using such a compare and add instruction to update the random number value for the initial value to be updated reduces the occurrence of errors and enables appropriate random number updating.

After step AKS82, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the address of the initial random number counter for the normal symbol (step AKS83). The address of the initial random number counter for the normal symbol is address F054[H] assigned to the initial random number counter for the normal symbol in the example configuration AKB11 of the random number data area for winning symbols shown in Figure 123-13(A). With the pointer set in this manner, a comparison and addition command is issued to update the count value of the initial random number counter for the normal symbol within the update range of "1" to "198" (step AKS84), completing the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT. The comparison and addition command for step AKS84 may be the same as the comparison and addition command for step AKS82. However, in the compare and add instruction of step AKS84, random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the normal symbol, is set as the random number value for the initial value to be updated, and therefore the immediate value specified by the operand indicating the maximum random number value for the initial value is set to a different value than in the compare and add instruction of step AKS82. Therefore, the compare and add instruction of step AKS84 is a single instruction that sets random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the normal symbol, as the random number value for the initial value to be updated, compares the random number value for the initial value to the maximum random number value for the initial value, increments the random number value for the initial value to be updated by 1 if the result of the comparison is less than the maximum random number value for the initial value, and changes the random number value for the initial value to the minimum random number value if the result of the comparison is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value for the initial value. Using such a compare and add instruction to update the random number value for the initial value to be updated prevents malfunctions and enables appropriate random number updating.

The random number update process for determining initial values P_TFINIT updates random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning symbol, in steps AKS81 and AKS82 as an update to the random number value for the first initial value. At the same time, the random number update process for determining initial values P_TFINIT updates random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, in steps AKS83 and AKS84 as an update to the random number value for the second initial value. The random number MR1-3, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is the first random number value used to change the random number initial value when the random number value to be updated is the random number MR1-2 for the winning normal symbol, which is the first random number value. The random number MR2-2, which serves as the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is the second random number value used to change the random number initial value when the random number value to be updated is the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which is the second random number value. Steps AKS81 and AKS82 of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values constitute a first initial value update process that can update the random number value for the first initial value. Steps AKS83 and AKS84 of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values constitute a second initial value update process that can update the random number value for the second initial value. By updating the random number values for the first initial value and the second initial value in this way, it becomes possible to update the random number values appropriately so as to reliably increase the uncertainty of the first random number value and the second random number value.

In addition, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT updates random number MR1-3, which will be the initial value for the winning symbol, as the first initial value random number value in steps AKS81 and AKS82, and then updates random number MR2-2, which will be the initial value for the winning normal symbol, as the second initial value random number value in steps AKS83 and AKS84. Therefore, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT updates random number MR1-3, which will be the initial value for the winning symbol and the first initial value random number value in steps AKS81 and AKS82, which is the first initial value update process, and then updates random number MR2-1, which will be the initial value for the winning normal symbol and the second initial value random number value in steps AKS83 and AKS84, which is the second initial value update process.

Figure 123-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON. The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is included in the processes that can be called from the special pattern process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 119, and can be executed in step S104 if the first start winning corresponding flag is on in step S103, and can be executed in step S108 if the second start winning corresponding flag is on in step S107. When the CPU 103 executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON, it sets the start port winning memory counter address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS201). The start port winning memory counter address is the address of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS201, a different address in the game work area can be specified corresponding to the first or second starting gate winning table set by the special symbol process P_TPROC. For example, the upper address F0[H] of the game work area, which serves as the working area, is set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the starting gate winning memory counter stored in the first or second starting gate winning table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. As a result, the value indicating the address of the first or second starting gate winning memory counter is stored in the internal register of CPU 103, which serves as the pointer. Next, the starting gate winning memory counter is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS202).

Following step AKS202, a determination is made as to whether the count value of the start port winning memory counter is equal to or greater than the counter's maximum value (step AKS203). For example, a comparison and return command can compare the value loaded in step AKS202 with a counter maximum value, such as "4." If the value is equal to or greater than the counter maximum value (step AKS203; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON ends and the process returns to the special symbol process process P_TPROC. On the other hand, if the value is less than the counter maximum value (step AKS203; No), the count value of the start port winning memory counter is updated by adding 1 (step AKS204). In this case, an arithmetic and logic operation command that increments the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer can update the count value of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter by adding 1.

After step AKS204, the special symbol determination buffer address is set as the transfer destination (step AKS205). The special symbol determination buffer address is the address of the first special symbol determination buffer contained in the first special symbol reserve buffer or the second special symbol determination buffer contained in the second special symbol reserve buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS205, different addresses in the game work area can be specified corresponding to the first start port winning table or second start port winning table set by the special symbol process processing P_TPROC and the count value of the first start port winning counter or second start port winning counter loaded in step AKS202.

The first special symbol reserve buffer is a first reserve memory buffer comprising a first special symbol determination buffer, a first winning symbol buffer, a first variation pattern type selection buffer, a first variation pattern buffer, and a first losing effect selection buffer. It is allocated as a plurality of memory areas, for example, five memory areas corresponding to buffer numbers "0" to "4", corresponding to cases where the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed and the number of first reserve memories that have not yet been executed. The second special symbol reserve buffer is a second reserve memory buffer comprising a second special symbol determination buffer, a second winning symbol buffer, a second variation pattern type selection buffer, a second variation pattern buffer, and a second losing effect selection buffer. It is allocated as a plurality of memory areas, for example, five memory areas corresponding to buffer numbers "0" to "4", corresponding to cases where the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed and the number of second reserve memories that have not yet been executed.

In step AKS205, the value corresponding to the buffer size of the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer is multiplied by the count value of the start port winning counter, and the multiplied value is added to the lower address of the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1". By setting this added value as the transfer destination pointer, the special pattern determination buffer address can be set as the transfer destination.

Following step AKS205, the RL0 hard latch random number register address is set (step AKS206). The RL0 hard latch random number register address is the address of the RL0 hard latch random number register located in the function control register area. For example, the upper address FF[H] of the function control register area is set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register stored in the first start port winning table or second start port winning table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. The first start port winning table stores the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register, which has buffer number "0." The second start port winning table stores the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register, which has buffer number "1." As a result, different addresses are stored in the internal register of CPU 103, which serves as the pointer, as the address of the RL0 hard latch random number register for the first start port winning event and the second start port winning event.

After step AKS206, the RL0 hard latch random number register is loaded with a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AK207). The value thus obtained from the RL0 hard latch random number register is stored in the special symbol determination random number buffer with a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the gaming work area of RAM 102 (step AKS208). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RL0 hard latch random number register in the special symbol determination random number buffer, numerical data indicating the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 is extracted, and the value of the random number MR1-1 can be stored in the special symbol determination random number buffer.

After step AKS208, the RL2 soft latch random number register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS209). The value stored in the RL2 soft latch random number register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect by a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS210). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RL2 soft latch random number register in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect, numerical data indicating the value of random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is extracted, and the value of random number MR3-2 can be stored in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect.

After step AKS210, the RS1 soft latch random number register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS211). The value stored in the RS1 soft latch random number register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type by a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS212). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RS1 soft latch random number register in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type, numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is extracted, and the value of the random number MR3-3 can be stored in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type.

After step AKS212, the RS2 soft latch random number register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from a memory area at a specified address in the function control register area (step AKS213). The value stored in the RS2 soft latch random number register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for variation patterns by a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS214). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RS2 soft latch random number register in the random number buffer for variation patterns, numerical data indicating the value of random numbers MR3-4 for variation patterns is extracted, and the values of random numbers MR3-4 can be stored in the random number buffer for variation patterns.

Following step AKS214, a block transfer is performed from the random number buffer to the special symbol determination buffer (step AKS215). The random number buffer includes a special symbol determination random number buffer in which the value of random number MR1-1 is stored in step AKS208, a loss effect selection random number buffer in which the value of random number MR3-2 is stored in step AKS210, a variation pattern type selection random number buffer in which the value of random number MR3-3 is stored in step AKS212, and a variation pattern random number buffer in which the value of random number MR3-4 is stored in step AKS214. In step AKS215, the address of the special symbol determination random number buffer is set as the transfer source, and a value corresponding to the buffer size of the random number buffer is set as the number of transfers. The special symbol determination buffer address, which is the transfer destination, was set in step AKS205. Based on these settings, by executing a block transfer command, the values of each random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer can be stored as new reserved information in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer.

Once the new memory information is stored in step AKS215, it is determined whether the winning effect conditions are met (step AKS216). The winning effect conditions may be preset as conditions that enable the pre-reading effect. For example, if the starting gate winning designation value is "2," it is determined that the winning effect conditions are met. Furthermore, if the starting gate winning designation value is "1," it is determined that the winning effect conditions are met if the time-saving function flag is "0" corresponding to the non-time-saving state, and the special pattern process code is less than 03 [H] corresponding to the non-small win or big win game state. If it is determined that the winning effect conditions are met (step AKS216; Yes), the winning effect process P_GAME_CHK is executed (step AKS217). The winning effect processing P_GAME_CHK includes determining whether a special symbol has been hit, selecting effect specification values corresponding to the result of the determination, and enabling the sending of a winning effect command.

If it is determined in step AKS216 that the winning effect conditions are not met (step AKS216; No), or after executing the winning effect processing in step AKS217, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the effect memory information designation command transmission table address (step AKS218). The effect memory information designation command transmission table address is the address of the effect memory information designation command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, by executing the command set processing P_COM_SET (step AKS219), the first effect memory information designation command or the second effect memory information designation command can be transmitted as the start winning command. The first effect memory information designation command is a presentation control command that designates the first reserved memory number indicated by the count value of the first starting gate winning memory counter. The second effect memory information designation command is a presentation control command that designates the second reserved memory number indicated by the count value of the second starting gate winning memory counter. In this way, the command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 allows the performance control command, which becomes the command at the time of the initial winning, to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After step AKS219, a transfer command for setting a pointer is used to set the start port winning buffer memory counter address (step AKS220). The start port winning buffer memory counter address is the address of the start port winning buffer memory counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. In this way, the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter whose address has been set is updated by incrementing it by one (step AKS221). Furthermore, a composite transfer command for setting a register or pointer is used to update the pointer corresponding to the start port winning buffer memory counter (step AKS222). For example, the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter after update in step AKS221 is loaded into an internal register of CPU 103, and the stored value of the pointer is updated by incrementing it by one, thereby storing a value indicating the starting address of the start port winning buffer in the pointer. Furthermore, the count value of the loaded start port winning buffer memory counter is added to the stored value of the pointer, thereby making it possible to identify the storage area of the buffer number to be updated in the start port winning buffer.

After updating the pointer in step AKS222, the start port winning designation value is loaded (step AKS223). The start port winning designation value can be set to "1" indicating a first start port winning or "2" indicating a second start port winning, corresponding to the first start port winning table or second start port winning table set by the special pattern process processing P_TPROC. In step AKS223, a transfer command is issued to read table data from the first start port winning table or second start port winning table, making it possible to obtain the start port winning designation value. The start port winning designation value thus obtained is stored in the start port winning buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area indicated by the pointer (step AKS224), and the start port switch passing processing P_TZU_ON ends.

Figure 123-17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON. In the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON, various settings and controls are performed using the first start port winning table set in step S102 or the second start port winning table set in step S106 of the special pattern process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 119. For example, the first start port winning memory counter and the second start port winning memory counter, whose count values can be updated by step AKS204, are provided in the special pattern control data area and can store data corresponding to the first and second reserved memory numbers. The start port winning buffer memory counter, whose count values can be updated by AKS221, and the start port winning buffer, in which the start port winning designation value is stored by AKS224, are provided in the start port winning buffer area and can store the total number of first start port winnings and the order of occurrence of second start port winnings. Additionally, the command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 uses the first effect memory information designation command transmission table or the second effect memory information designation command transmission table whose address was set in step AKS218.

In this way, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON enables control of the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, using the first start port winning table or the second start port winning table, the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter provided in the special symbol control data area, the start port winning buffer memory counter or the start port winning buffer provided in the start port winning buffer area, and the first effect memory information designation command transmission table or the second effect memory information designation command transmission table.

Figure 123-17 (A1) shows a configuration example AKT21 of the first start port winning table. The first start port winning table of configuration example AKT21 is configured to include table data indicating the lower address of the first start port winning memory counter, the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register number "0", the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "1", the address of the first effect memory information designation command transmission table, and the start port winning designation value "1".

The first start gate winning memory counter is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and is capable of storing data corresponding to the first reserved memory number. RL0 hard latch random number register number "0" is an RL0 hard latch random number register with register number "0" located in the function control register area. It is capable of acquiring and storing numerical data indicating the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1, which can be generated by channel RL0 located in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, via hard latch. First special symbol determination buffer number "1" is a first special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1" in the first special symbol reserved buffer. The first effect memory information designation command transmission table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when transmitting a first effect memory information designation command that specifies the first reserved memory number. Start gate winning designation value "1" is a designated value that identifiably indicates that a first start win has occurred.

Figure 123-17 (A2) shows a configuration example AKT22 of the second start port winning table. The second start port winning table of configuration example AKT22 is configured to include table data indicating the lower address of the second start port winning memory counter, the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random number register number "1", the lower address of the second special symbol determination buffer number "1", the address of the second effect memory information designation command transmission table, and the start port winning designation value "2".

The second start gate winning memory counter is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and is capable of storing data corresponding to the second reserved memory number. RL0 hard latch random number register number "1" is an RL0 hard latch random number register with register number "1" located in the function control register area. It is capable of acquiring and storing numerical data indicating the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1, which can be generated by channel RL0 located in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, via hard latch. Second special symbol determination buffer number "1" is a second special symbol determination buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. The second effect memory information designation command transmission table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when transmitting a second effect memory information designation command that specifies the second reserved memory number. Start gate winning designation value "2" is a designated value that specifically indicates that a second start gate winning has occurred.

Figure 123-17 (B1) shows a configuration example AKB21 of the special symbol control data area. The special symbol control data area of configuration example AKB21 can store various data related to control by the special symbol process processing P_TPROC, such as the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, and the small hit game state and big hit game state that can be controlled based on the display results. This special symbol control data area includes a special symbol process timer at address F030[H], a win flag at address F032[H], a special symbol process code at address F033[H], a first start port winning memory counter at address F034[H], a big win symbol determination buffer at address F035[H], a small win symbol determination buffer at address F036[H], a large prize port winning number counter at address F037[H], a large prize port opening count counter at address F038[H], a large prize port opening pattern timer at address F039[H], a large prize port opening pattern table pointer at address F03B[H], a demo display flag at address F03D[H], and a second start port winning memory counter at address F099[H].

The special pattern process timer can store a timing value corresponding to the control time by the special pattern process processing P_TPROC. The special pattern process code can specify the processing selected in the special pattern process processing P_TPROC. The first start port winning memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the first reserved memory number. The jackpot pattern determination buffer can store data corresponding to the jackpot pattern specified value. The jackpot pattern specified value is a specified value corresponding to the confirmed special pattern displayed when the display result in the variable display of the special pattern is "jackpot", and makes it possible to set the type of jackpot game state. The small jackpot pattern determination buffer can store data corresponding to the small jackpot pattern specified value. The small jackpot pattern specified value is a specified value corresponding to the confirmed special pattern displayed when the display result in the variable display of the special pattern is "small jackpot", and makes it possible to set the type of alcohol in the small jackpot game state. The large prize opening number counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of game balls that have passed through the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 50. The large prize opening number counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of times the large prize opening has been opened in a small prize game state or a big prize game state. The large prize opening pattern timer can store a time value corresponding to the remaining time for controlling the large prize opening to an open state in a small prize game state or a big prize game state. The large prize opening pattern table pointer can specify a storage address in the large prize opening pattern table in which the opening time of the large prize opening is set. The demo display flag can store a flag value corresponding to an on or off state depending on whether a demonstration display is being executed. The second start opening memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the second reserved memory number.

Figure 123-17 (B2) shows a configuration example AKB22 of the start port winning buffer area. The start port winning buffer area of configuration example AKB22 can store various data related to the first start winning and second start winning that occur when the gaming ball enters the first start winning port or second start winning port. This start port winning buffer area includes a start port winning buffer memory counter at address F0BA[H] and start port winning buffer numbers "0" to "8" at addresses F0BB[H] to F0C3[H].

The start port winning buffer storage counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of valid start port winning designation values stored in the start port winning buffer area. Therefore, the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter indicates the total number of first start winnings and second start winnings. Start port winning buffer numbers "0" to "8" are start port winning buffers assigned buffer numbers "0" to "8", and can store start port winning designation values in the order in which the first start winnings and second start winnings occurred. As a result, the information stored in the start port winning buffer indicates the order in which the first start winnings and second start winnings occurred.

Figure 123-17 (C1) shows an example configuration AKT23 of the first effect memory information designation command transmission table. The first effect memory information designation command transmission table of configuration example AKT23 is configured to include table data indicating the upper byte of the first effect memory information designation command and the first start port winning memory counter reference designation value. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 enables the first effect memory information designation command to be transmitted when the first effect memory information designation command transmission table is used. The first effect memory information designation command can set the lower byte corresponding to the count value of the first start port winning memory counter. By transmitting such a first effect memory information designation command, the first pending memory number can be notified to the effect control board 12.

Figure 123-17 (C2) shows an example configuration AKT24 of the second effect memory information designation command transmission table. The second effect memory information designation command transmission table of configuration example AKT24 is configured to include table data indicating the upper bytes of the second effect memory information designation command and the second start port winning memory counter reference designation value. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 enables the second effect memory information designation command to be transmitted when the second effect memory information designation command transmission table is used. The second effect memory information designation command can set the lower bytes corresponding to the count value of the second start port winning memory counter. By transmitting such a second effect memory information designation command, the second pending memory number can be notified to the effect control board 12.

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON shown in Figure 123-16 stores the value stored in the RL2 soft latch random number register loaded in step AKS209 in the random number buffer for selecting a losing effect in step AKS210, thereby making it possible to extract numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. Furthermore, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RS1 soft latch random number register loaded in step AKS211 in the random number buffer for selecting a variation pattern type in step AKS212, thereby making it possible to extract numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type. Furthermore, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RS2 soft latch random number register loaded in step AKS213 in the variation pattern random number buffer in step AKS214, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data indicating the value of the variation pattern random number MR3-4. Here, if the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect is set to the first random number value, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is set to the second random number value, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern is set to the third random number value, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed in response to the occurrence of a start winning, and therefore can be extracted by the establishment of a common extraction condition, namely the occurrence of a start winning, for the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is included in the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern are included in the gaming random numbers that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range for both is a prime number. The update rate for the random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms, while the update rate for the random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 is 938 times/ms. In other words, the update rate for the random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 is twice the update rate for the random number MR3-2, which is an integer multiple. The update range for random number MR3-2 is "0" to "65518", the update range for random number MR3-3 is "0" to "240", and the update range for random number MR3-4 is "0" to "250", so the total number of random numbers included in each update range is different, and the total number of random numbers included in each update range is a prime number. In this way, when the update rate for the second random number value and the third random number value is an integer multiple of the update rate for the first random number value, the total number of random number values included in each update range is different, and the total number of random number values included in each update range is a prime number. This prevents synchronization between the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, enabling appropriate random number updating.

Figure 123-18 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. Special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL is included in the processing that can be called from the special symbol process processing P_TPROC shown in Figure 119, and can be executed in step S112 if the special symbol process code loaded in step S110 is 00 [H]. When special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL is executed, the CPU 103 sets the start port winning buffer memory counter address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS241). The start port winning buffer memory counter address is the address of the start port winning buffer memory counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In this way, it is determined whether the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter whose address has been set is "0" (step AKS242). For example, an arithmetic jump instruction branches processing depending on whether the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is 00 [H], which corresponds to "0," making it possible to execute different processing content when the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter is "0" and when it is other than "0."

If the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter is not "0" in response to step AKS242 (step AKS242; No), the count value of the start port winning buffer storage counter is updated to subtract 1 (step AKS243). A block transfer for shifting the start port winning buffer is also performed (step AKS244). In step AKS244, the destination address is set to the lower address BB[H] of start port winning buffer number "0," the source address is set to the lower address BC[H] of start port winning buffer number "1," and the number of transfers is set to "8," which is the buffer size of the start port winning buffer. Then, by executing a block transfer command, the contents of the start port winning buffer are shifted by transferring them one unit at a time to the previous buffer. Then, the memory area of start port winning buffer number "8" is initialized by clearing it.

After step AKS244, a transfer command for setting the table pointer is issued to set the second special symbol determination control table address (step AKS245). The second special symbol determination control table address is the address of the second special symbol determination control table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. At this time, a start port winning check process is executed to determine whether the start port winning designation value is "1" (step AKS246). For example, in the start port winning check process, if the start port winning designation value is "1," the zero flag is turned on, and if the start port winning designation value is "2," the zero flag is turned off. After this start port winning check process is executed, a jump command is issued to branch the process depending on whether the zero flag is off, allowing different processing to be executed depending on whether the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2."

If the start gate winning designation value is "1" in response to step AKS246 (step AKS246; Yes), a transfer command for setting the table pointer is issued to set the first special symbol determination control table address (step AKS247). The first special symbol determination control table address is the address of the first special symbol determination control table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS247, a transfer command for setting the table pointer is issued to overwrite the value of the table pointer. Thus, in the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL, after the second special symbol determination control table address is set in step AKS245, the start gate winning designation value corresponds to "1" in step AKS246, and the first special symbol determination control table address is re-set by overwriting in step AKS247. As a result, when the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the program capacity required for table setting can be reduced, improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, processing using jump commands as branch commands can be simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

If the starting gate winning designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS246 (step AKS246; No), after step AKS247, the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION is executed (step AKS248), and the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is executed (step AKS249), after which the normal special symbol processing ends.

If the count value of the start slot winning buffer memory counter is "0" in response to step AKS242 (step AKS242; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (step AKS250). The demo display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration display is being executed. If the demo display flag is on (step AKS250; Yes), the normal special pattern processing ends. In contrast, if the demo display flag is off (step AKS250; No), a transfer command to set the demo display flag is issued to store the demo display designated value 01 [H] in the demo display flag (step AKS251). This sets the demo display flag to the on state. In addition, a transfer command to set the pointer is issued to set the standby command transmission table address (step AKS252). The standby command transmission table address is the address of the standby command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS253), and the normal special symbol processing ends.

Figure 123-19 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL. In the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL, the special symbol determination processing in step AKS248 is executed using the second special symbol determination control table whose address was set in step AKS245 or the first special symbol determination control table whose address was set in step AKS247. Furthermore, the command set processing P_COM_SET in step AKS253 uses the standby command transmission table whose address was set in step AKS252. In this way, the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL enables control of the special symbol game, which is the variable display of special symbols, using the first special symbol determination control table, second special symbol determination control table, or standby command transmission table.

Figure 123-19 (A1) shows an example configuration AKT31 of the first special symbol determination control table. The first special symbol determination control table of the example configuration AKT31 is configured to include table data indicating the address of the first special symbol buffer shift control table, the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "0", the lower address of the first winning symbol buffer number "0", the lower address of the first special symbol buffer, and the address of the work setting table after the first special symbol win determination. The first special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when shifting the memory contents of the first special symbol reserve buffer. The first special symbol determination buffer number "0" is the first special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserve buffer. The first winning symbol buffer number "0" is the first winning symbol buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer. The first special symbol buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102 and is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values corresponding to the confirmed special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The first special symbol post-winning symbol determination work setting table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when initializing data in response to the end of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION.

Figure 123-19 (A2) shows an example configuration AKT32 of the second special symbol determination control table. The second special symbol determination control table of the example configuration AKT32 is configured to include table data indicating the address of the second special symbol buffer shift control table, the lower address of the second special symbol determination buffer number "0", the lower address of the second winning symbol buffer number "0", the lower address of the second special symbol buffer, and the address of the work setting table after the second special symbol win determination. The second special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when shifting the memory contents of the second special symbol reserve buffer. The second special symbol determination buffer number "0" is the second special symbol determination buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserve buffer. The second winning symbol buffer number "0" is a buffer for the second winning symbol included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. The second special symbol buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values corresponding to the confirmed special symbols stopped and displayed in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The second special symbol post-winning symbol determination work setting table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101, and is used when initializing data in response to the end of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION.

Figure 123-19 (B) shows an example configuration AKT33 of the standby command transmission table AKT33. The standby command transmission table of configuration example AKT33 is configured to include table data indicating the number of processes, the upper byte of the second specific count designation command, the specific count command buffer reference value, the upper byte of the background color designation command, the special symbol state designation code reference value, the upper byte of the customer waiting demo command, and the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS253 uses the standby command transmission table of configuration example AKT33 to enable the transmission of the second specific count designation command, the background color designation command, and the customer waiting demo command. The second specific count designation command can have its lower byte set to correspond to the value stored in the specific count command buffer. The background color designation command can have its lower byte set to correspond to the special symbol state designation code. The customer waiting demo command can have its lower byte set to the fixed value 03 [H].

Figure 123-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. The special symbol determination process P_TDECISION is included in the processes that can be called from the normal special symbol process P_TNORMAL shown in Figure 123-18, and can be executed in step AKS248 when variable display of special symbols is started. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, it sets the special symbol buffer shift control table address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS301). The special symbol buffer shift control table address is the address of the first special symbol buffer shift control table or the second special symbol buffer shift control table stored in the game data area of the ROM 101. In step AKS301, a different address in the game data area can be specified corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table set by the normal special symbol process P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the address 13C2[H] of the first special symbol buffer shift control table is set in the pointer. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the address 13C8[H] of the second special symbol buffer shift control table is set in the pointer.

Following step AKS301, special symbol buffer shift processing P_TBUFSHIFT is executed (step AKS302). The special symbol buffer shift processing P_TBUFSHIFT in step AKS302 can shift the contents of the first special symbol reserve buffer or the second special symbol reserve buffer using the first special symbol buffer shift control table or the second special symbol buffer shift control table whose address was set in step AKS301. For example, by setting the destination address, source address, and number of transfers, and then executing a block transfer command, the contents of the first reserve memory buffer of the first special symbol buffer or the second reserve memory buffer of the second special symbol buffer can be shifted by transferring them one unit at a time to the previous buffer.

Following step AKS302, the special symbol determination buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS303). The special symbol determination buffer with buffer number "0" is the first special symbol determination buffer or the second special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserve buffer. In step AKS303, the stored values of the special symbol determination buffer can be read from the first special symbol reserve buffer or the second special symbol reserve buffer in accordance with the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table set by the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. For example, the upper address F0 [H] of the game work area, which serves as the work area, can be set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the first special pattern determination buffer number "0" or the second special pattern determination buffer number "0" stored in the first special pattern determination control table or the second special pattern determination control table pointed to by the table pointer can be set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. Then, by reading the stored data at the address in the game work area pointed to by the pointer, it is possible to read the random number MR1-1 for special pattern determination stored in the special pattern determination buffer with buffer number "0".

After step AKS303, the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK is executed (step AKS304). The special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 can determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" by comparing the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 read in step AKS303 with the jackpot determination value. The determination of whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is also referred to as the special symbol jackpot determination, and is a determination of whether to control the game to a favorable jackpot gaming state. Then, if the special symbol jackpot determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," the jackpot designated value 01 [H] is stored in the hit flag. The hit flag is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032 [H]. The special symbol jackpot determination process of step AKS304 simply stores a designated jackpot value in the hit flag using a transfer command to write to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Note that the hit flag only needs to be able to be set to its initial value of 00 [H] using a clear command executed in response to the start of the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304.

The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK is executed in conjunction with the special symbol big win determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 (step AKS305). The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 can determine whether the special symbol display result is a "small win" by comparing the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1, read by loading the special symbol determination buffer in step AKS303, with the small win determination value. The determination of whether the special symbol display result is a "small win" is also referred to as the special symbol small win determination, and is a determination of whether to control the game to a predetermined small win gaming state. Then, if the special symbol small win determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "small win," the small win designated value 02 [H] is stored in the win flag. The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 simply stores the small win designated value in the win flag using a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a designated address in the game work area of RAM 102.

In the special symbol small hit determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305, the small hit determination value is included in a range different from the big hit determination value. Therefore, after the special symbol big hit determination determines the special symbol display result as a "big hit," the special symbol small hit determination will not determine the special symbol display result as a "small hit." However, if, for example, an error occurs, after the special symbol big hit determination determines the special symbol display result as a "big hit," the special symbol small hit determination determines the special symbol display result as a "small hit," the small hit specified value will be stored in the hit flag. Therefore, in the event of a conflict between the special symbol big hit determination determining the special symbol display result as a "big hit" and the special symbol small hit determination determining the special symbol display result as a "small hit," fraudulent behavior due to a malfunction in the determination process is prevented, enabling appropriate game control so that the game is not controlled to a big hit game state, which is more advantageous than a small hit game state.

When the special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step S305 is executed, the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS306). The winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is the first winning symbol buffer contained in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol buffer, or the second winning symbol buffer contained in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol buffer. In step AKS306, the stored value of the winning symbol buffer can be read from the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table whose address was set by the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL. For example, the upper address F0 [H] of the game work area, which serves as the working area, is set to the upper byte of the buffer pointer using a transfer command, and the lower address of the special symbol determination buffer stored in the first special symbol determination control table or second special symbol determination control table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the buffer pointer using a transfer command. Then, by reading the stored data at the address in the game work area pointed to by the buffer pointer, it is possible to read the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0".

After step AKS306, the special symbol buffer lower address is loaded (step AKS307). The special symbol buffer lower address is the address of the first or second special symbol buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS307, a different lower address can be specified corresponding to the first or second special symbol determination control table whose address was set by the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the lower address B8 [H] of the first special symbol buffer is set in the lower byte of the buffer pointer. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating the lower address B9 [H] of the second special symbol buffer is set in the lower byte of the buffer pointer. The upper address F0 [H] of the game work area has already been stored in the upper byte of the buffer pointer by step AKS306.

Following step AKS307, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is executed (step AKS308). The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET makes it possible to determine the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in the special symbol game and to store the special symbol pattern designation value corresponding to the determined result in the special symbol buffer. Following the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the post-special symbol hit determination work setting table address is set (step AKS309). The post-special symbol hit determination work setting table address is the address of the first special symbol hit determination work setting table or the second special symbol hit determination work setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS309, a different address in the game data area can be specified corresponding to the first special symbol hit determination control table or the second special symbol hit determination control table whose address was set by the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating address 12BB [H] of the work setting table after the first special symbol win determination is set in the pointer. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, a value indicating address 12C0 [H] of the work setting table after the second special symbol win determination is set in the pointer.

Following step AKS309, data set processing P_DATASET is executed (step AKS310), and the special symbol determination processing P_TDECISION is completed. Data set processing P_DATASET in step AKS310 uses the special symbol post-win determination work setting table whose address was set in step AKS309 to clear the special symbol determination buffer and the winning symbol buffer in the first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0," thereby enabling initialization. For example, when the first special symbol post-win determination work setting table is set, the first special symbol determination buffer and the first winning symbol buffer are initialized in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0," which is included in the first special symbol reserve buffer. Additionally, when the work setting table is set after determining that the second special symbol has been won, the second special symbol determination buffer and the second winning symbol buffer are initialized in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" included in the second special symbol reserved buffer.

Figure 123-21 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. In the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, the special symbol big hit determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol small hit determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 use the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 to determine whether the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" in response to the start of the variable display. Furthermore, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET in step AKS308 uses the special symbol buffer whose lower address was loaded in step AKS307. In this way, the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION enables control of the special symbol game, which is the variable display of special symbols, using the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 and the special symbol buffer.

Figure 123-21 (A) shows a special symbol determination example AKC01 by the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol minor jackpot determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305. The special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 enables a comparison operation to be performed with the jackpot determination value to determine whether the value of the random number MR1-1 used for special symbol determination is within the jackpot determination range. The jackpot determination value includes a jackpot lower limit determination value and an jackpot upper limit determination value. When the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the jackpot lower limit determination value, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is a value below the jackpot lower limit determination value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 is a value above the jackpot lower limit determination value. If the value of random number MR1-1 is equal to or less than the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, it is not within the jackpot determination range, and the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK is terminated, returning to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. On the other hand, if the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, the value of random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the upper limit of the jackpot determination value. At this time, if the carry flag is off, the value of random number MR1-1 is equal to or less than the upper limit of the jackpot determination value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper limit of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, if the value of random number MR1-1 is equal to or less than the upper limit of the jackpot determination value, it is within the jackpot determination range, and the value 01 [H], which is the designated jackpot value, is stored in the hit flag. If the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper jackpot judgment value, it is not within the jackpot judgment range, and the special symbol jackpot judgment process P_TFVR_CHK is terminated, returning to the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION.

As an example, the lower limit jackpot judgment value may be preset to "60000" and the upper limit jackpot judgment value to "60285." As a result, as in special symbol judgment example AKC01, when the starting slot winning designation value corresponds to "1" and "2" and the value of random number MR1-1 is within the jackpot judgment range of "60001" to "60285," the judgment result for the special symbol display result will be "jackpot."

The special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 enables a comparison operation to be performed with the small win determination value for the random number MR1-1 used for determining the special symbol to determine whether its value is within the small win determination range. The small win determination value includes a small win lower limit determination value and a small win upper limit determination value. When the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the small win lower limit determination value, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is a value below the small win lower limit determination value; if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 is a value above the small win lower limit determination value. If the value of the random number MR1-1 is below the small win lower limit determination value, it is not within the small win determination range, and the process terminates the special symbol small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK and returns to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. In contrast, if the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the small win lower limit judgment value, the value of random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the small win upper limit judgment value. At this time, if the carry flag is off, the value of random number MR1-1 is a value equal to or less than the small win upper limit judgment value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of random number MR1-1 is a value equal to or less than the small win upper limit judgment value. Therefore, if the value of random number MR1-1 is a value equal to or less than the small win upper limit judgment value, it is within the small win judgment range, and 02 [H], which is the small win designation value, is stored in the win flag. If the value of random number MR1-1 exceeds the small win upper limit judgment value, it is not within the small win judgment range, and the process returns to the special pattern small win determination process P_TDECISION by terminating the special pattern small win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK. The small win upper limit judgment value may be set to a different value depending on whether the start gate winning designation value is "1" or "2."

As an example, the small win lower limit judgment value may be preset to "21000," which is the same whether the starting port winning designation value is "1" or "2." The small win upper limit judgment value may be preset to "21285" when the starting port winning designation value is "1," and "29282" when the starting port winning designation value is "2." As a result, as in special symbol judgment example AKC01, when the starting port winning designation value corresponds to "1" and the value of random number MR1-1 is within the small win judgment range of "21001" to "21285," or when the starting port winning designation value corresponds to "2" and the value of random number MR1-1 is within the small win judgment range of "21001" to "29282," the judgment result for the special symbol display will be "small win."

Figure 123-21 (B) shows a configuration example AKB31 of the special symbol buffer area. The special symbol buffer area of configuration example AKB31 is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values corresponding to the confirmed special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the display of the special symbol. This special symbol buffer area includes a first special symbol buffer at address F0B8 [H] and a second special symbol buffer at address F0B9 [H]. The first special symbol buffer is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values when a first special symbol game is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A. The second special symbol buffer is capable of storing special symbol pattern designation values when a second special symbol game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol pattern designation value is a designation value for a display pattern corresponding to a confirmed special symbol that is the display result in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and includes a big win special symbol pattern designation value and a small win special symbol pattern designation value. The big win special symbol pattern designation value is a designation value for a display pattern corresponding to a confirmed special symbol that is displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the display result in the variable display of special symbols is a "big win." The small win special symbol pattern designation value is a designation value for a display pattern corresponding to a confirmed special symbol that is displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the display result in the variable display of special symbols is a "small win."

Figure 123-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is included in the processes that can be called from the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 123-20, and can be executed in step AKS308 after the special symbol big win determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol small win determination process P_LITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 are executed. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, it loads a win flag (step AKS321). The win flag is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032 [H]. In step AKS321, the hit flag is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Then, an arithmetic jump command that can compare the hit flag with a judgment value corresponding to the designated jackpot value is used to confirm that the hit flag is not the designated jackpot value (step AKS322).

If the hit flag is set to the jackpot specified value in step AKS322 (step AKS322; No), the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is set (step AKS323). The value stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" was loaded by step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20. This loaded content can be set as the processing target by transferring it to a processing register included in the internal registers of CPU 103. For the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" set in this way, the stored value is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS324). The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer whose lower address was loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20. As a result, for the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0," numerical data indicating that random number value is stored in the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer. Therefore, when the special symbol display result is "jackpot," the numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR1-2 corresponds to the special symbol whose confirmed special symbol is the jackpot symbol, and can be used as a jackpot special symbol pattern designation value.

Following step AKS324, the start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded to the start port winning designated value (step AKS325). The start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is located in the start port winning buffer area of the configuration example AKB22 shown in Figure 123-17 (B2), and is assigned address F0BB [H]. In step AKS325, the start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded using a transfer command to read stored data from the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS325, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is executed (step AKS326). The jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU determines the jackpot symbol designation value using the start-up winning designation value loaded by step AKS325 and the value stored in the winning symbol buffer loaded by step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20, and can set the jackpot information setting data corresponding to the determined result. The jackpot information setting data is data indicating the jackpot performance designation value, fanfare display designation value, and jackpot end display designation value. The jackpot symbol designation value determined by this jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer (step AKS327). The jackpot symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1), and is assigned address F035 [H]. In step AKS327, the jackpot symbol designation value is stored using a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS327, the jackpot information setting data is transferred (step AKS328). In this case, in the jackpot information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101, the storage address of the jackpot information setting data corresponding to the determined jackpot symbol designation value is set in a pointer specifying the transfer source. In addition, the address of the effect symbol information buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is set in a buffer pointer specifying the transfer destination. Furthermore, the data size of the jackpot information setting data is set in the number of transfers. Thereafter, the block transfer command is used to transfer and store the jackpot information setting data read from the jackpot information setting table to the effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer. At this time, the variable command designation buffer is set (step AKS329). The variable command designation buffer is located at the next address of the jackpot end display buffer in the game work area of RAM 102, and the stored value can be set using the destination address updated by the block transfer command of step AKS327. For example, the variable command designation value 01 [H], which corresponds to the special symbol display result being determined to be a "jackpot," can be set as the stored value of the variable command designation buffer. Note that the stored value may be initialized to 00 [H] by clearing the variable command designation buffer in accordance with the presentation state after the jackpot game state has ended, the stored value of the presentation symbol information buffer, etc.

After setting the variable command designation buffer in step AKS329, the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed is set (step AKS330). The maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed is set in the game work area of RAM 102 at the next address after the variable command designation buffer, and is capable of storing the maximum number of times the special prize opening is controlled to be open during a special prize game. In step AKS330, the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed can be determined using the jackpot symbol designation value determined in the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU in step AKS326 and the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. The value corresponding to the determined maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed can then be stored in the maximum number of times the special prize opening is performed buffer using a transfer command to write the value to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

If the hit flag is not the designated jackpot value in step AKS322 (step AKS322; Yes), an arithmetic jump instruction is used to compare the hit flag with a judgment value corresponding to the designated small hit value to confirm that the hit flag is not the designated small hit value (step AKS331). If the hit flag is the designated small hit value (step AKS331; No), a special small hit symbol pattern designation value is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS332). The special small hit symbol pattern designation value may be created by adding a preset small hit symbol addition value to the stored value read from the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0." The special small hit symbol pattern designation value may also be a value different from the special large hit symbol pattern designation value. The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer into which the lower address is loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20. In step AKS332, the small win special symbol pattern designation value created using the small win symbol addition value, etc., is stored in the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the designated address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After storing the small win special symbol pattern designation value in step AKS332, the small win symbol designation value is determined (step AKS333). The small win symbol designation value can be determined using the value stored in the winning symbol buffer loaded in step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 123-20 and the first small win state setting table or second small win state setting table set corresponding to the starting hole winning designation value. The small win symbol designation value determined at this time is stored in the small win symbol determination buffer (step AKS334). The small win symbol determination buffer is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1) and is assigned address F036 [H]. In step AKS334, the small win symbol designation value is stored using a transfer command to write it to a memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS334, a small win effect designation value is determined (step AKS335). The small win effect designation value can be determined using the small win information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and the small win pattern designation value determined in step AKS333. The small win effect designation value determined at this time is stored in the designation pattern information buffer (step AKS336). In step AKS336, the small win effect designation value determined in step AKS335 is stored in the designation pattern information buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Once the small win effect designation value is stored in step AKS336, the small win information setting data is transferred (step AKS337). The small win information setting data indicates the small win fanfare display designation value and the small win ending display designation value. In step AKS337, the storage address of the small win information setting data corresponding to the determined small win effect designation value in the small win information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101 is set as a pointer specifying the transfer source. The address of the small win fanfare display buffer provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is also set as the transfer destination. Furthermore, the data size of the small win information setting data is set as the number of transfers. Thereafter, the small win information setting data read from the small win information setting table is transferred and stored in the small win fanfare display buffer and small win ending display buffer using a block transfer command.

If the win flag is not the small win designated value in step AKS331 (step AKS331; Yes), the loss special symbol pattern designated value is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS338). The loss special symbol pattern designated value may be a value different from the big win special symbol pattern designated value or the small win special symbol pattern designated value, as long as it is prepared in advance. For example, F1 [H] may be set as the loss special symbol pattern designated value. The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer, whose lower address is loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20. In step AKS338, the loss special symbol pattern designated value prepared in advance is stored in the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer by a transfer command for writing it to the memory area of the designated address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS338, the effect symbol information buffer is cleared (step AKS339). The effect symbol information buffer can store effect specification values corresponding to when the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." On the other hand, when the special symbol display result is a "miss," the effect symbol information buffer is cleared, initializing the stored value to 00 [H]. In addition, the variable command specification buffer is cleared (step AKS340).

After steps AKS330, AKS337, and AKS340, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the pre-variation command transmission table address (step AKS341). The pre-variation command transmission table address is the address of the pre-variation command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS342), and the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET ends.

Figure 123-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. The jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is called in the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 123-22, and can be executed in step AKS326 if the hit flag is set to the jackpot specified value in step AKS322. When the CPU 103 executes the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU, it sets the second jackpot state setting table address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS401). The second jackpot state setting table address is the address of the second jackpot state setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101.

Following step AKS401, it is confirmed that the start gate winning designation value is not "1" (step AKS402). The start gate winning designation value is stored in an internal register of CPU 103 by step AKS325 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in FIG. 123-22. If this start gate winning designation value is "1" (step AKS402; No), a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the table address for setting the first jackpot state (step AKS403). The table address for setting the first jackpot state is the address of the table for setting the first jackpot state stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS403, the value of the pointer is overwritten by a transfer command for setting a pointer. Thus, in the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, after setting the second jackpot state setting table address in step AKS401, the starting gate winning designation value corresponds to "1" in step AKS402, and the first jackpot state setting table address is overwritten in step AKS403. This reduces the program capacity required for table setting when the second jackpot state setting table is used more frequently than the first jackpot state setting table, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the second jackpot state setting table is used more frequently than the first jackpot state setting table, processing using a jump command as a branch command is simplified, facilitating confirmation at the design stage and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

If the starting gate winning designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS402 (step AKS401: Yes), or after step AKS403, a winning symbol buffer is set (step AKS404). The winning symbol buffer is the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" whose stored value was loaded in step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20. This loaded content can be set as the processing target by transferring it to a processing register included in the internal registers of CPU 103. The stored value of the winning symbol buffer set in this way is used together with the second jackpot state setting table set in step AKS401 or the first jackpot state setting table set in step AKS403 to execute the second allocation determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 (step AKS405).

The second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 sets the stored data at the top address of the table as the start number data, the stored data at the next address as the processing count data, and initially sets the start number data as the allocation result data. It then compares the numeric data set as the comparison value with the allocation judgment value indicated by the stored data at the address after the processing count data, in increasing order from the top to the bottom of the table addresses, until the allocation judgment value exceeds the comparison value. If the allocation judgment value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the allocation result data is updated by incrementing it by one and the next comparison is performed. If the allocation judgment value exceeds the comparison value, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 ends. If the number of comparisons corresponds to the processing count data but the allocation judgment value does not exceed the comparison value, the process can be repeated using the stored data at the next address and subsequent addresses, starting with setting the start number data and processing count data. In the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is the stored value in the winning symbol buffer, is set as a comparison value, and the jackpot symbol designated value indicated by the allocation result data can be determined as the type of jackpot game state corresponding to the display result by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the stored data in the first jackpot state setting table or the second jackpot state setting table. The second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 only needs to be executable when the small jackpot symbol designated value is determined by step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. In this case, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is the value stored in the winning symbol buffer, is set as the comparison value, and the small win designation value indicated by the allocation result data can be determined as the type of small win game state corresponding to the display result by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the stored data in the first small win state setting table or the second small win state setting table.

When the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405 is completed, data for setting jackpot information is determined (step AKS406). The data for setting jackpot information can be selected from multiple types of pre-prepared data sets using the jackpot information data designation table selected corresponding to the stored value in the presentation state selection buffer and the jackpot symbol designation value determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405. The presentation state selection buffer can be set to a stored value corresponding to the presentation state after the jackpot game state has ended.

Figure 123-24 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration corresponding to the control of the jackpot game state in relation to the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET and the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. If the hit flag is set to the jackpot designated value in step AKS322 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU can be executed in step AKS326. In this jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 is executed using the second jackpot state setting table whose address is set in step AKS401 or the first jackpot state setting table whose address is set in step AKS403, thereby making it possible to determine the jackpot symbol designated value. Then, in step AKS328 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the jackpot information setting data read from the jackpot information setting table corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified value can be transferred and stored in the effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer. The effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer are provided in the effect symbol information area and can store setting data when controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Additionally, in step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the maximum number of times the jackpot opening slot can be opened can be determined corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified value using the maximum number of times the jackpot opening slot can be opened.

In this way, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU uses the first jackpot state setting table or the second jackpot state setting table to determine the jackpot symbol designation value. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can set the storage values of the effect symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot display buffer provided in the effect symbol information area, and can determine the maximum number of times the large prize opening will be opened corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value.

Figure 123-24 (A1) shows an example configuration of the first jackpot status setting table AKT41. The first jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT41 stores a value of 00 [H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value "1" at the first address 1AFD [H], and a value of 0A [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1AFE [H]. The stored data from address 1AFF [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation values "1" to "10." When using the first jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT41, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405 can determine one of the jackpot symbol designation values "1" to "10" in accordance with the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the jackpot symbol designation value "1" is determined.

Figure 123-24 (A2) shows an example configuration of the second jackpot status setting table AKT42. The second jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT42 stores a value 0A[H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated value "11" at the first address 1B09[H], and a value 04[H] indicating the processing number at the next address 1B0A[H]. The stored data from address 1B0B[H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated values "11" to "14." When using the second jackpot status setting table of the example configuration AKT42, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS405 can determine one of the jackpot symbol designated values "11" to "14" in accordance with the winning symbol random number MR1-2 indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the jackpot symbol designation value "11" is determined.

Figure 123-24 (B) shows an example configuration AKB41 of the effect symbol information area. The effect symbol information area of configuration AKB41 can store various data related to game control and effect control, including variable display of effect symbols, in response to control in either the big win game state or the small win game state. This effect symbol information area includes a effect symbol information buffer at address F056 [H], a fanfare display buffer at address F057 [H], a big win end display buffer at address F058 [H], a variable command specification buffer at address F059 [H], a maximum number of large prize openings buffer at address F05A [H], a small win fanfare display buffer at address F05F [H], and a small win ending display buffer at address F060 [H].

Figure 123-24 (C) shows an example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed. Step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET determines the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed corresponding to the designated jackpot symbol value determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 of the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. In example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be determined to be one of the following values: 02 [H] corresponding to "2," 04 [H] corresponding to "4," 07 [H] corresponding to "7," and 0A [H] corresponding to "10." The first jackpot status setting table of example AKT41 is used when the designated starting hole entry value is "1," allowing the designated jackpot symbol value to be determined to be one of "1" to "10." In contrast, the second jackpot status setting table of the configuration example AKT42 is used when the starting slot winning designation value is "2," and allows the determination of any of the jackpot symbol designation values "11" to "14." Meanwhile, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 00 [H] to 09 [H], corresponding to "1" to "10," the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened can be determined to be either 04 [H], corresponding to "4," or 0A [H], corresponding to "10." Meanwhile, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 0A [H] to 0D [H], corresponding to "11" to "14," the maximum number of times a jackpot slot is opened can be determined to be either 02 [H], corresponding to "2," 04 [H], corresponding to "4," 07 [H], corresponding to "7," or 0A [H], corresponding to "10."

In this way, in example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, when the jackpot symbol designated value is 00 [H], which corresponds to "1," the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed is 04 [H], which corresponds to "4." This corresponds to the smaller of the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, "4" or "10," which can be determined when the starting prize opening designated value is "1." The jackpot symbol designated value "1" can be determined when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer, is the smallest random number, "0." Furthermore, in example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed, when the jackpot symbol designated value is 0A [H], which corresponds to "11," the maximum number of times a large prize opening can be performed is 02 [H], which corresponds to "2." This corresponds to "2," the smallest of the maximum possible values of "2," "4," "7," and "10" for the number of times the jackpot opening slot can be opened when the starting slot winning designation value is "2." The jackpot designation value "11" can be determined when the random number MR1-2 for the winning slot, indicated by the value stored in the winning slot buffer, is the minimum random number value of "0." Therefore, among special slot games in which special slots are displayed variably on the first special slot display device 4A or the second special slot display device 4B, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning slot is the minimum random number value of "0," a more advantageous display result is not determined compared to when the random number is other than the minimum random number value. This allows for the appropriate random number value to be updated to prevent fraudulent activity due to a malfunction of the first random number value when the random number MR1-2 for the winning slot is set to the first random number value.

Figure 123-25 is a diagram to explain an example of the use of data configuration corresponding to the control of the small win game state, with regard to the special pattern information setting process P_TZU_SET, etc. If the win flag is a small win designated value in step AKS331 of the special pattern information setting process P_TZU_SET, step AKS333 makes it possible to determine the small win pattern designated value. In this case, if the starting gate winning designated value is "1", the small win pattern designated value is determined using the first small win state setting table. On the other hand, if the starting gate winning designated value is "2", the small win pattern designated value is determined using the second small win state setting table. Then, in step AKS339 of the special pattern information setting process P_TZU_SET, the small win effect designated value determined in step AKS338 is stored in the effect pattern information buffer. Then, in step AKS340 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the small win information setting data read from the small win information setting table corresponding to the small win symbol designation value can be transferred to and stored in the small win fanfare display buffer and small win ending display buffer. The effect symbol information buffer, small win fanfare display buffer, and small win ending display buffer are provided in the effect symbol information area shown in Figure 123-24 (B), and can store setting data when controlled to a small win gaming state. Also, in step S112 of the special symbol process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 119, when the special symbol process code corresponds to 03 [H] and the small win opening pre-processing P_TLFAN is executed, the opening time and number of times the large prize opening can be opened can be determined using the small win opening work setting table, etc.

In this way, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can determine the small win symbol designation value using the first small win state setting table or the second small win state setting table. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can also set the storage values of the effect symbol information buffer, small win fanfare display buffer, and small win ending display buffer provided in the effect symbol information area. Furthermore, the small win pre-opening process P_TLFAN, which is executed in response to control to the small win gaming state, can determine the opening time and number of times the large prize opening will be opened.

Figure 123-25 (A1) shows an example configuration of the first small win status setting table AKT43. The first small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT43 stores the value 00 [H] corresponding to the small win symbol designated value "1" at the first address 1B0B [H], and stores the value 01 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B0C [H]. The stored data at address 1B0D [H] indicates the allocation judgment value corresponding to the small win symbol designated value "1." When using the first small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT43, step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can only determine the small win symbol designated value "1" in accordance with the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. Therefore, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the small winning symbol designation value "1" is determined.

Figure 123-25 (A2) shows an example configuration of the second small win status setting table AKT44. The second small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT44 stores the value 01 [H] corresponding to the small win symbol designated value "2" at the first address 1B0E [H], and stores the value 06 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B0F [H]. The stored data from address 1B10 [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the small win symbol designated values "2" to "7." When using the second small win status setting table of the example configuration AKT44, step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can determine one of the small win symbol designated values "2" to "7" in accordance with the winning symbol random number MR1-2 indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the small winning symbol designation value "2" is determined.

Figure 123-25 (B) shows example AKD02 of determining the large prize opening mode. The small prize opening pre-processing P_TLFAN can determine the large prize opening mode corresponding to the start prize opening designated value. The large prize opening mode can be determined to be one of multiple modes with different opening times and number of times the large prize opening is opened. In example AKD02 of determining the large prize opening mode, a large prize opening mode with an opening time of 36 ms and 15 openings is determined in response to a start prize opening designated value of "1." Also, in example AKD02 of determining the large prize opening mode, a large prize opening mode with an opening time of 1600 ms and 1 opening is determined in response to a start prize opening designated value of "2."

In this way, the large prize opening mode during a small win game state can be determined to have different opening times and different opening times for the large prize opening, depending on the starting prize opening designated value, regardless of the small prize symbol designated value. The small prize symbol designated value can be determined in accordance with the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. If the starting prize opening designated value is the same, a common large prize opening mode is determined whether the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is the minimum random number value of "0" or any other random number value. Therefore, among special symbol games in which special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is the minimum random number value of "0," a display result with a higher degree of advantage is not determined compared to when the random number is any other random number value. This makes it possible to update the random number value appropriately to prevent fraudulent activity due to a malfunction in the first random number value when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used as the first random number value.

Figure 123-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET. The variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is included in the processing that can be called from the normal special symbol processing P_TNORMAL shown in Figure 123-18, and can be executed in step AKS249 when variable display of special symbols is initiated. When the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is executed, the CPU 103 loads the hit flag (step AKS361). The hit flag is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032 [H]. In step AKS361, the hit flag is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Then, an arithmetic jump command that can compare the hit flag with a judgment value corresponding to the specified jackpot value is used to confirm that the hit flag is not the specified jackpot value (step AKS362).

If the hit flag is set to the jackpot specified value in step AKS362 (step AKS362; No), the jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded (step AKS363). The jackpot symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1) and is assigned address F035 [H]. In step AKS363, the jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. At this time, a transfer command to set a pointer is used to set the state-specific jackpot selection table address (step AKS364). The state-specific jackpot selection table address is the address of the state-specific jackpot selection table stored in ROM 101. Then, the hit-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed (step AKS365). The winning variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA in step AKS365 makes it possible to select a variation pattern type allocation table when the special chart display result corresponds to a "jackpot."

If the hit flag is not the designated value for a big hit in step AKS362 (step AKS362; Yes), an arithmetic jump instruction is used to compare the hit flag with the judgment value corresponding to the designated value for a small hit, confirming that the hit flag is not the designated value for a small hit (step AKS366). If the hit flag is the designated value for a small hit (step AKS366; No), the variable command designation buffer is set (step AKS367). The variable command designation buffer is located in the performance symbol information area of the configuration example AKB41 shown in Figure 123-24 (B) and is assigned address F059 [H]. In step AKS367, a transfer instruction is used to write to the memory area of the designated address in the game work area of RAM 102, and 01 [H] is stored in the variable command designation buffer. The small hit symbol judgment buffer is also loaded (step AKS368). The small win symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 123-17 (B1) and is assigned address F036 [H]. In step AKS368, the small win symbol determination buffer is loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. At this time, a transfer command to set a pointer is used to set the status-specific small win selection table address (step AKS369). The status-specific small win selection table address is the address of the status-specific small win selection table stored in ROM 101. Then, the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed (step AKS370). The win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA in step AKS370 enables selection of a variation pattern type allocation table in response to the special symbol display result being "small win."

If the hit flag is not the small hit designated value in response to step AKS366 (step AKS366; Yes), the miss fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is executed (step AKS371). The miss fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH of step AKS371 corresponds to the special chart display result being "miss," and enables the selection of a fluctuation pattern type allocation table.

After steps AKS365, AKS370, and AKS371, the variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS372). The variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is the first variation pattern type selection buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer, or the second variation pattern type selection buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. In step AKS372, after setting the address of the second variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0," a start gate winning check process is executed. If the start gate winning designation value is "1," the address of the first variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then a transfer command for reading the stored data at the set address is issued, allowing the variation pattern type selection random number MR3-3 stored in the variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" to be read.

When the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type is read in step AKS372, the variation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL is executed (step AKS373). The variation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL in step AKS373 makes it possible to select a variation pattern allocation table using the variation pattern type allocation table selected in either step AKS365, AKS370, or AKS371 and the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type read in step AKS372.

Following step AKS373, the variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS374). The variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is the first variation pattern buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer, or the second variation pattern buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. In step AKS374, after setting the address of the second variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0," a start gate winning check process is executed. If the start gate winning designation value is "1," the address of the first variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then a transfer command is issued to read the stored data at the set address, allowing the variation pattern random numbers MR3-4 stored in the variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" to be read.

When the random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern are read in step AKS374, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS375). The second allocation judgment value comparison process in step AKS375 makes it possible to determine a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern allocation table selected in step AKS373 and the random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern read in step AKS374. At this time, fluctuation pattern designation data corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is stored in the effect symbol fluctuation pattern buffer (step AKS376). The effect symbol fluctuation pattern buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and is capable of storing different fluctuation pattern designation data corresponding to the result of the fluctuation pattern determination.

Following step AKS376, a variable command transmission table is selected (step AKS377). In step AKS377, a variable command transmission table is selected using the variable command transmission table selection table and the value stored in the variable command designation buffer. This allows different variable command transmission tables to be selected, for example, when the special symbol display result is a "big hit" or "small hit," and when it is a "miss." The variable command transmission table is configured to include table data indicating the number of processes, the upper byte of the pattern information designation command, the pattern information designation code reference designation value, the upper byte of the performance symbol designation command, the performance symbol designation code reference designation value, the performance symbol variation command, and the variation pattern designation data reference designation value. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS378). The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS378 uses the variation command transmission table selected in step AKS377 to enable the transmission of pattern information specification commands, performance pattern specification commands, and performance pattern variation commands. This command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS378 enables the transmission of performance control commands, which serve as variation start commands, from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When step AKS378 enables the transmission of the fluctuation start command, the special symbol fluctuation time is set (step AKS379). In step AKS379, a time data expansion process is executed using the special symbol fluctuation time table and fluctuation pattern designation data, making it possible to set different special symbol fluctuation times corresponding to the result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Next, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the post-fluctuation pattern setting work table address (step AKS380). The post-fluctuation pattern setting work table address is the address of the post-fluctuation pattern setting work table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Next, data set process P_DATASET is executed (step AKS381), and the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET is completed. The data set processing P_DATASET in step AKS381 uses the post-variation pattern setting work table whose address was set in step AKS380 to set the special pattern process code to 01 [H], which is the special pattern variation processing designated value, and sets the value stored in the special pattern variation display buffer to 01 [H], which is the special pattern variation display data. Additionally, the special pattern display update timer, the loss effect selection buffer with buffer number "0", the variation pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0", and the variation pattern buffer with buffer number "0" are cleared to enable initialization. By referencing different tables when the start gate winning designated value is "1" and "2", different buffers and timers can be set and cleared.

Figure 123-27 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the hit time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA. The hit time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is included in the processes that can be called from the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, and can be executed in step AKS365 if the hit flag is set to the designated value for a big hit in step AKS362, and can be executed in step AKS370 if the hit flag is set to the designated value for a small hit in step AKS366. When the CPU 103 executes the hit time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA, it loads the presentation state selection buffer (step AKS421). The presentation state selection buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and can be set to a storage value corresponding to the presentation state after the end of the big hit game state. In step AKS421, it is sufficient that the value stored in the performance state selection buffer can be read using a transfer command to read the stored data at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS421, a fluctuation pattern type selection table is determined (step AKS422). In step AKS422, the fluctuation pattern type selection table can be determined using the state-specific jackpot selection table or state-specific small jackpot selection table and the stored value of the presentation state selection buffer read in step AKS421. The address of the state-specific jackpot selection table is set in step AKS364 when the win-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in FIG. 123-26. The address of the state-specific small jackpot selection table is set in step AKS369 when the win-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in FIG. 123-26. The state-specific big hit selection table and state-specific small hit selection table are configured to include table data that enables different variation pattern type selection tables to be determined in accordance with the value stored in the presentation state selection buffer. Therefore, step AKS422 enables different variation pattern type selection tables to be determined in accordance with the value stored in the presentation state selection buffer when the special chart display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit."

Once the variation pattern type selection table is determined in step AKS422, a winning symbol designation value is set (step AKS423). In step AKS423, the contents loaded from the jackpot symbol determination buffer or the small win symbol determination buffer are set as the processing target by transferring them to a processing register included in the internal registers of CPU 103. The jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded in step AKS363 when the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in FIG. 123-26. The small win symbol determination buffer is loaded in step AKS368 when the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in FIG. 123-26. The value stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer indicates the jackpot symbol designation value. The value stored in the small win symbol determination buffer indicates the small win symbol designation value. The set win symbol designation value, along with the variation pattern type selection table determined in step AKS422, is used to execute the allocation determination value comparison process P_HANTEI (step AKS424).

The allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTE compares the numerical data set as the comparison value with the allocation judgment value indicated by the table storage data, in increasing order from the top to the bottom of the table address, until the allocation judgment value exceeds the comparison value. At this time, if the allocation judgment value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it proceeds to the next comparison, and makes the table storage data readable as designated data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value. The allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS424 sets the big hit symbol designated value or small hit symbol designated value as the comparison value, and reads out the designated data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value from the data stored in the variation pattern type selection table.

When the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS424 is completed, the fluctuation pattern type allocation table is determined (step AKS425), and the hit-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is completed. In step AKS425, the specified data read by the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS424 is added to the starting address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table, and the address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table to be used is set as a pointer, making it possible to determine the fluctuation pattern type allocation table.

Figure 123-27 (B1) shows an example AKD11 of a variation pattern type allocation table determination where the special symbol display result corresponds to "jackpot." When the special symbol display result is "jackpot," the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 can determine one of the values 00 [H] to 0D [H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value "1" to "14." When the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, it can determine a variation pattern type allocation table in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot symbol designation value. In the variation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD11, one of the variation pattern type allocation tables AKU01 to AKU03 can be determined in accordance with the values 00 [H] to 0D [H] indicating the jackpot symbol designation value.

Figure 123-27 (B2) shows an example AKD12 of a variation pattern type allocation table determination where the special symbol display result corresponds to a "small win." When the special symbol display result is a "small win," step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 123-22 can determine one of the values 00 [H] to 06 [H] corresponding to the small win symbol designation values "1" to "7." When the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, it can determine a variation pattern type allocation table in accordance with the determination result of the small win symbol designation value. In the example of the variation pattern type allocation table AKD12, it is possible to determine either the variation pattern type allocation table AKU11 or AKU12 in response to the small win symbol designation values 00 [H] to 06 [H].

Figure 123-28 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the loss-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH. The loss-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is included in the processes that can be called from the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, and can be executed in step AKS371 if the hit flag is not set to the small hit designated value in step AKS366. When the loss-time fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is executed, the CPU 103 sets the state-specific loss selection table address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS441). The state-specific loss selection table address is the address of the first state-specific loss selection table or the second state-specific loss selection table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. In step AKS441, different addresses in the game data area can be specified corresponding to whether the starting gate winning designated value is "1" or "2." This allows the address of the first status-specific miss selection table to be set when the start port winning designation value is "1," and the address of the second status-specific miss selection table to be set when the start port winning designation value is "2." The presentation state selection buffer is then loaded (step AKS442). The presentation state selection buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and can be set to a value corresponding to the presentation state after the jackpot game state ends.

Following step AKS442, a pending miss effect allocation selection table is determined (step AKS443). In step AKS443, the pending miss effect allocation selection table is determined using the first state-specific miss selection table or the second state-specific miss selection table whose address was set in step AKS441 and the stored value of the effect state selection buffer loaded in step AKS442. The first state-specific miss selection table or the second state-specific miss selection table is configured to include table data that enables a different pending miss effect allocation selection table to be determined in accordance with the stored value of the effect state selection buffer. Furthermore, the pending miss effect allocation selection table is configured to include table data that enables a different miss effect allocation table to be determined in accordance with the count value of the start port winning memory counter. Therefore, step AKS443 determines a different pending miss effect allocation selection table depending on whether the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2," in accordance with the value stored in the effect status selection buffer.

Following step AKS443, the start port winning memory counter is loaded (step AKS444). The start port winning memory counter is the first start port winning memory counter when the start port winning designation value is "1" or the second start port winning memory counter when the start port winning designation value is "2." In step AKS444, the second start port winning memory counter address is set to the memory pointer, and then the start port winning check process is executed. If the start port winning designation value is "1," the first start port winning memory counter address is set to the memory pointer, and then a transfer command is issued to read the stored data at the address set in the memory pointer, making it possible to obtain the count value of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter.

After step AKS444, allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS445). In allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS445, the count value of the first start port winning memory counter or the second start port winning memory counter obtained in step AKS444 is set as a comparison value, and designated data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value is read out using the stored data of the pending miss effect allocation selection table determined in step AKS443.

When the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS445 is completed, a miss effect allocation table is determined (step AKS446). In step AKS446, the specified data read by the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS445 is added to the starting address of the miss effect allocation table, and the address of the miss effect allocation table to be used is set as a pointer, making it possible to determine the miss effect allocation table.

Following step AKS446, the losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS447). The losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" is the first losing effect selection buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserved buffer, or the second losing effect selection buffer included in the second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserved buffer. In step AKS447, after setting the address of the second losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0," if the starting gate winning designation value is "1" as determined by the starting gate winning check process, the address of the first losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then a transfer command is issued to read the data stored at the set address, allowing the losing effect selection random number MR3-2 stored in the losing effect selection buffer with buffer number "0" to be read.

When the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is read in step AKS447, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS448). The allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 uses the losing effect allocation table determined in step AKS446 and the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect read in step AKS447 to determine the offset value of the variation pattern type allocation table. In this case, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect read in step AKS447 is set as the comparison value, and the stored data of the losing effect allocation table determined in step AKS446 makes it possible to read the offset value of the variation pattern type allocation table indicated by the specified data corresponding to the allocation judgment value that exceeds the comparison value.

When the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS448 is completed, the fluctuation pattern type allocation table is determined (step AKS449), and the miss fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is completed. In step AKS449, the offset value indicated by the specified data read by the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI of step AKS448 is added to the starting address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table, and the address of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table to be used is set in the pointer, making it possible to determine the fluctuation pattern type allocation table.

Figure 123-28 (B1) shows an example AKD21 of determining a miss effect allocation table corresponding to a first special symbol miss. A first special symbol miss occurs when the start port winning designation value corresponds to "1" and the special symbol display result is "miss" in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the start port winning designation value is "1," step AKS444 of the miss time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH can obtain the count value of the first start port winning memory counter. The count value of the first start port winning memory counter indicates the first reserved memory number. Then, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445 reads out the designated data corresponding to the count value of the first start port winning memory counter, and step AKS446 can determine a miss effect allocation table corresponding to the first reserved memory number. In the example of determining the miss effect allocation table AKD21, one of the miss effect allocation tables AKV01 to AKV04 can be determined according to the first reserved memory count "0" to "3".

Figure 123-28 (B2) shows an example AKD22 of determining a miss effect allocation table corresponding to a miss on the second special symbol. A miss on the second special symbol occurs when the start port winning designation value corresponds to "2" and the special symbol display result is "miss" in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the start port winning designation value is "2," step AKS444 of the miss time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH can obtain the count value of the second start port winning counter. The count value of the second start port winning memory counter indicates the second reserved memory number. Then, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445 reads out the designated data corresponding to the count value of the second start port winning memory counter, and step AKS446 can determine a miss effect allocation table corresponding to the second reserved memory number. In the example of determining the miss effect allocation table AKD22, only the common miss effect allocation table AKV11 can be determined for the second reserved memory counts "0" to "3".

Figure 123-28 (C) shows an example AKD23 of a variation pattern type allocation table determination for the miss effect allocation table AKV01. The miss effect allocation table AKV01 can be determined when the first pending memory count is "0" in the example AKD21 of the miss effect allocation table determination when the starting port winning designation value is "1." When the starting port winning designation value is "1," step AKS447 of the miss time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH can read the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect from the first miss effect selection buffer with buffer number "0." Then, the allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 reads the designation data corresponding to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect, and the variation pattern type allocation table can be determined in step AKS449. In the variation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD23, one of the variation pattern type allocation tables AKU21 to AKU25 can be selected in response to the random number MR3-2 used to select the losing effect.

Figure 123-29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern type allocation table. When the winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA shown in Figure 123-27 (A) is executed in step AKS365 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, it can determine one of multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables, such as one of the fluctuation pattern type allocation tables AKU01 to AKU03 in the fluctuation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD11 shown in Figure 123-27 (B1), in accordance with the result of determining the jackpot symbol designation value. When the winning fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA shown in Figure 123-27 (A) is executed in step AKS370 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, it can determine one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern type allocation tables, such as one of the fluctuation pattern type allocation tables AKU11 and AKU12 in the fluctuation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD12 shown in Figure 123-27 (B2), in accordance with the determination result of the small winning symbol designation value. Step AKS449 of the losing fluctuation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH shown in Figure 123-28 (A) can determine one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern type allocation tables, such as one of the fluctuation pattern type allocation tables AKU21 to AKU25 in the fluctuation pattern type allocation table determination example AKD23 shown in Figure 123-28 (C). The fluctuation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL, which is executed in step AKS373 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, can select a fluctuation pattern type by referencing the fluctuation pattern type allocation table using the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type read out in step AKS372, and can select a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the selection result.

Figure 123-29(A) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol designation value. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01 in Figure 123-29(A) is configured so that the table data can be determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern types CPA01 to CPA05 in accordance with the random number MR3-3 used to select the fluctuation pattern type.

Figure 123-29 (B1) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the small win symbol designation value. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11 in Figure 123-29 (B1) is configured so that the table data can be determined to only the common fluctuation pattern type CPB01 in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 used to select fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 123-29 (B2) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the small win symbol designation value. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12 in Figure 123-29 (B2) is configured so that the table data can be determined to be only the common fluctuation pattern type CPB02 in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 used to select fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 123-29 (C1) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21 in Figure 123-29 (C1) has table data configured so that it can be determined to be either the fluctuation pattern type CPC01 or CPC02 in response to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type.

Figure 123-29 (C2) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22 in Figure 123-29 (C2) is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern type CPC03 can be determined in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 123-29 (C3) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23 in Figure 123-29 (C3) is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern type CPC04 can be determined in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types.

Figure 123-29 (C4) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24 in Figure 123-29 (C4) has table data configured so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern types CPC05 to CPC07 in response to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a fluctuation pattern type.

Figure 123-29 (C5) shows an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25 is included in multiple fluctuation pattern type allocation tables that can be determined in response to the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect. The fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25 in Figure 123-29 (C5) is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern type CPC08 can be determined in response to all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types.

Figures 123-30 to 123-32 are diagrams illustrating example configurations of fluctuation pattern allocation tables that can be used in accordance with fluctuation pattern types. In the fluctuation pattern allocation table selection process P_TPATTBL executed in step AKS373 of the fluctuation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 123-26, a fluctuation pattern allocation table is selected in accordance with the result of the selection of the fluctuation pattern type using the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. Thereafter, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS375 uses the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern read out in step AKS374 to refer to the fluctuation pattern allocation table, thereby making it possible to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Figure 123-30 (A1) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA01. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA01 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (A1), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PA01 to PA03, PA51, or PA52 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA01 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PA01 to PA03, PA51, or PA52.

Figure 123-30 (A2) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA02. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA02 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (A2), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA04 to PA11, PA21 to PA23, or PA54 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA02 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA04 to PA11, PA21 to PA23, or PA54.

Figure 123-30 (A3) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA03. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol designation value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA03 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (A3), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA31 to PA38, PA24 to PA26, or PA55 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA03 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA31 to PA38, PA24 to PA26, or PA55.

Figure 123-30 (A4) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPA04. When using fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, fluctuation pattern type CPA04 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to random number MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (A4), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PA41 can be determined in accordance with random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that fluctuation pattern type CPA04 can only be determined to fluctuation pattern PA41.

Figure 123-30 (A5) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPA05. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the jackpot symbol specified value, the fluctuation pattern type CPA05 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (A5), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PA42 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPA05 can only be determined as fluctuation pattern PA42.

Figure 123-30 (B1) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPB01. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU11, which can be determined in accordance with the small win symbol designation value, the fluctuation pattern type CPB01 can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-3 for selecting all fluctuation pattern types. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (B1), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PB01 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPB01 can only be determined as fluctuation pattern PB01.

Figure 123-30 (B2) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPB02. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU12, which can be determined in accordance with the small win symbol designation value, fluctuation pattern type CPB02 can be determined in accordance with all fluctuation pattern type selection random numbers MR3-3. In the configuration example of Figure 123-30 (B2), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can determine one of fluctuation patterns PB11 to PB14 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that fluctuation pattern type CPB02 can be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PB11 to PB14.

Figure 123-31(A) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC01. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC01 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-31(A), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PC01 can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC01 can only be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PC01.

Figure 123-31(B) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC02. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU21, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC02 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-31(B), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that the fluctuation pattern type can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC12, PC13, PC15, PC16, PC24, PC27, PC33, or PC49 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC02 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC12, PC13, PC15, PC16, PC24, PC27, PC33, or PC49.

Figure 123-31(C) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC03. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU22, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC03 can be determined in accordance with all of the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting fluctuation pattern types. In the configuration example of Figure 123-31(C), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC11 to PC18, or PC101 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC03 can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC11 to PC18, or PC101.

Figure 123-31(D) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CPC04. When using fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU23, which can be determined in accordance with random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, fluctuation pattern type CPC04 can be determined in accordance with all fluctuation pattern type selection random numbers MR3-3. In the configuration example of Figure 123-31(D), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PC19 to PC27, or PC102 in accordance with fluctuation pattern random number MR3-4. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that fluctuation pattern type CPC04 can be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PC19 to PC27, or PC102.

Figure 123-32(A) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC05. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC05 can be determined at a first ratio corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 123-32(A), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC28 to PC43 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC05 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC28 to PC43.

Figure 123-32(B) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC06. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC06 can be determined at a second rate different from the first rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. The second rate is a rate lower than the first rate. In the configuration example of Figure 123-32(B), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC44 to PC59 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC06 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC44 to PC59.

Figure 123-32(C) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC07. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC07 can be determined at a third rate, which is different from the first rate and second rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for selecting the fluctuation pattern type. The third rate is a rate lower than the first rate and the second rate. In the configuration example of Figure 123-32(C), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that it can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC60 to PC75 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC07 can be determined as one of the fluctuation patterns PC60 to PC75.

Figure 123-32(D) shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type CPC08. When using the fluctuation pattern type allocation table AKU25, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the fluctuation pattern type CPC08 can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-3 for selecting all fluctuation pattern types. In the configuration example of Figure 123-32(D), the fluctuation pattern allocation table is configured so that only the common fluctuation pattern PC02 can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for all fluctuation patterns. In this way, the allocation judgment value is set by the stored data of the fluctuation pattern allocation table so that the fluctuation pattern type CPC08 can only be determined as the fluctuation pattern PC02.

Figure 123-33 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. Normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is included in the processing that can be called from the game control timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 118, and can be executed in step AKS59 each time a timer interrupt occurs. When normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is executed, the CPU 103 sets the gate switch passing response flag (step AKS501). The gate switch passing response flag is set by executing a logical operation instruction or the like to reflect the state of the gate switch 21 contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, a zero flag in the flag register being in the on state indicates that the gate switch passing response flag is in the off state. Conversely, a zero flag being in the off state indicates that the gate switch passing response flag is in the on state. It is then determined whether the gate switch passing response flag is on (step AKS502). If the gate switch passing flag is on (step AKS502; Yes), the gate switch passing process P_FZU_ON is executed (step AKS503).

If the gate switch passing flag is off in step AKS502 (step AKS502; No), or after the gate switch passing process P_FZU_ON in step AKS503, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the normal symbol process processing jump table (step AKS504). The normal symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the normal symbol process code. The normal symbol process code can be updated to any of 00 [H] to 04 [H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also called the normal symbol process code.

Following step AKS504, a transfer command to read stored data is used to load the normal symbol process code (step AKS505). Next, the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC is executed (step AKS506) to obtain the address of the process selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code. The address obtained at this time is set in a pointer. Then, a subroutine call command is issued to execute the process pointed to by the pointer (step AKS507), making the process selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code executable. When the selected process is completed and a return command is issued to return to the normal symbol process process P_FPROC, this normal symbol process process P_FPROC also ends, and a return command is issued to return to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

Figure 123-33 (B) shows an example configuration of the normal symbol process processing jump table AKT51 used in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The normal symbol process processing jump table is configured to include table data that allows the address of the processing selected in accordance with the normal symbol process code to be set in an internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer. The normal symbol process processing jump table of configuration example AKT51 includes table data that allows the pointer to be set to address values corresponding to normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM when the normal symbol process code is 00 [H], normal symbol change processing P_FSCRL when the normal symbol process code is 01 [H], normal symbol stop processing P_FSTOP when the normal symbol process code is 02 [H], normal electric role activation pre-processing P_FINT when the normal symbol process code is 03 [H], and normal electric role activation processing P_FOPEN when the normal symbol process code is 04 [H].

Normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM determines whether to start a normal symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored normal symbol pending information, determines the confirmed normal symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable normal symbol display, and determines the normal symbol change pattern, which is the normal symbol change pattern. Normal symbol change processing P_FSCRL measures the elapsed time since the normal symbol began to change on the normal symbol display device 20, and determines whether the normal symbol change time corresponding to the normal symbol change pattern has elapsed. Normal symbol stop processing P_FSTOP measures the elapsed time since the normal symbol stopped changing on the normal symbol display device 20, and determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed. When the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, the normal symbol process code can be updated and various settings can be made in accordance with the normal symbol display result. In this embodiment, it is sufficient that the normal symbol process code can be updated to 03[H] in accordance with all normal symbol display results. The normal electric device pre-activation processing P_FINT and the normal electric device activation processing P_FOPEN are processes that enable the second starting winning port formed in the variable winning ball device 6B to be changed from a closed state to an open state by controlling the normal electric device solenoid 81.

Figure 123-34 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to the control of a normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols. For example, the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 123-33 (A) uses the normal symbol process code loaded in step AKS505 to execute the 2-byte data selection processing P_ABXEXEC in step AKS506, thereby enabling step AKS507 to execute the processing selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code. The normal symbol process code is provided in the normal symbol control data area, and its stored value can be updated corresponding to the control status of the normal symbol game and the second start winning slot. The gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON in step AKS503 can read the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol, and for the read random number MR2-1, the numerical data indicating its value can be stored in the normal symbol buffer for saving. The normal symbol buffer is located in the normal symbol buffer area and can store numerical data indicating the value of the read random number MR2-1 until the normal symbol reserve memory number reaches the upper limit. In this way, the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC and the processes executable in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC use stored data in the normal symbol control data area and the normal symbol buffer area to enable control of the normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols.

Figure 123-34 (A) shows an example configuration AKB51 of the normal symbol control data area. The normal symbol control data area of configuration AKB51 can store various data related to control by the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC, such as the normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols, and the closed/open state of the second start winning gate, which can be controlled based on the display results. This normal symbol control data area includes a normal symbol process code at address F03E[H], a gate passage memory counter at address F03F[H], a normal symbol buffer at address F040[H], a normal electric feature release pattern timer at address F041[H], a normal electric feature release pointer at address F043[H], a normal electric feature winning number counter at address F045[H], and a normal symbol process timer at address F04A[H].

The normal symbol process code can specify the processing selected in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The gate passage memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The normal symbol buffer can store data corresponding to the normal symbol designation value. The normal symbol designation value is a designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 20, and includes a normal symbol winning symbol designation value. The normal symbol winning symbol designation value is a designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol displayed by the normal symbol display device 20 when the display result in the variable display of the normal symbol is "normal winning." The normal electric device opening pattern timer can store a timing value corresponding to the remaining time for controlling the second start winning port to an open state. The normal electric device opening pointer can specify the storage address of the normal electric device opening pattern table, in which the time for controlling the second start winning port to an open state is set. The normal electric device winning number counter can store a count value corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the second start switch 22B. The normal symbol process timer can store a time value corresponding to the control time by the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC.

Figure 123-34 (B) shows a configuration example AKB52 of a buffer area for normal symbols. The buffer area for normal symbols of configuration example AKB52 can store numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR2-1 for normal symbols that is read when a gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41. This buffer area for normal symbols includes normal symbol buffer numbers "1" to "4" at addresses F046 [H] to F049 [H]. Normal symbol buffer numbers "1" to "4" are buffers for normal symbols that are assigned buffer numbers "1" to "4," and can store the values of the random number MR2-1 in the order in which the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41. As a result, the information stored in the normal symbol buffer indicates the number of game balls that have passed through the passing gate 41, and also indicates the value of the random number MR2-1 read in response to each passage.

Figure 123-35 is a flowchart showing an example of gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON. Gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON is included in the processing that can be called from the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 123-33 (A), and can be executed in step AKS503 if the gate switch passing flag is on in step AKS502. When the CPU 103 executes gate switch passing processing P_FZU_ON, it sets the gate passing memory counter address using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS601). The gate passing memory counter address is the address of the gate passing memory counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. Next, it loads the gate passing memory counter using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS602).

After step AKS602, it is determined whether the count value of the gate passage memory counter is greater than or equal to the counter maximum value (step AKS603). For example, a comparison and return instruction is used to compare the value loaded in step AKS602 with a counter maximum value such as "4." If the count value is greater than or equal to the counter maximum value (step AKS603; Yes), the gate switch passage processing P_FZU_ON ends and returns to the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. On the other hand, if the count value is less than the counter maximum value (step AKS603; No), the count value of the gate passage memory counter is updated by adding 1 (step AKS604). In this case, an arithmetic and logic operation instruction that increments the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer makes it possible to update the count value of the gate passage memory counter by adding 1.

After step AKS604, the buffer address for the normal symbol is set by a transfer command or the like to set the pointer (step AKS605). In this case, the address of the buffer for the normal symbol with buffer number "0" provided in the game work area of RAM 102 is set to the pointer. The value loaded in step AKS602 is then added to the value stored in the pointer. This allows the address of the buffer for the normal symbol, which stores the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol in the buffer area for the normal symbol, to be set to the pointer. Following this, the random number counter for the normal symbol is stored (step AKS606), and the gate switch passing process P_FZU_ON ends. In step AKS606, a transfer command is issued to specify the lower address of the random number counter for normal symbols in the game work area of RAM 102, and write the value read to the memory area at the address indicated by the pointer. The value of random number MR2-1 obtained from the random number counter for normal symbols can then be stored in the buffer for normal symbols.

Figure 123-36 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM. Normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM is included in the processing that can be called from normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 123-33(A) and can be executed in step AKS507 when the normal symbol process code loaded in step AKS505 is 00 [H]. When executing normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM, the CPU 103 loads the gate passage memory counter (step AKS621). In this case, the count value of the gate passage memory counter can be obtained by a transfer command that specifies the lower address of the gate passage memory counter in the game work area of RAM 102 and sets the value read from the counter in an internal register of CPU 103. Then, a calculation return command that returns processing when the second zero flag in the flag register of CPU 103 is on determines whether the count value of the gate passage memory counter is "0" (step AKS622). At this time, if the second zero flag is on, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is "0" (step AKS622; Yes), and the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM ends and returns to the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC.

If the count value of the gate passage memory counter is not "0" in response to step AKS622 (step AKS622; No), a transfer command for setting a pointer is used to set the table address for setting the normal symbol per symbol (step AKS623). The table address for setting the normal symbol per symbol is the address of the table for setting the normal symbol per symbol stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the buffer for normal symbol per symbol with buffer number "1" is loaded (step AKS624). In step AKS624, a transfer command is used to set the value read by specifying the lower address of the buffer for normal symbol per symbol with buffer number "1" in the game work area of RAM 102 in an internal register of CPU 103. Therefore, it is sufficient if the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol stored in the buffer for normal symbol per symbol with buffer number "1" can be read.

When the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol winning pattern is read in step AKS624, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS625). The value of the random number MR2-1 read in step AKS624 is set as the comparison value in the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625, and the normal symbol winning pattern designated value indicated by the allocation result data can be determined as the display result by the normal symbol display device 20 based on the stored data of the normal symbol winning pattern setting table whose address was set in step AKS623. When the normal symbol winning pattern designated value is determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625, the normal symbol winning pattern designated value is stored in the normal symbol buffer (step AKS626). The normal symbol buffer is located in the normal symbol control data area shown in Figure 123-34 (A) and is assigned address F040 [H]. In step AKS626, the normal symbol value is stored using a transfer command to write it to the memory area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS626, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is decremented by 1 (step AKS627). Then, the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols is shifted (step AKS628). In this case, in the buffer area for symbols corresponding to normal symbols provided in the game work area of RAM 102, the address of the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols with buffer number "2" is set in the pointer specifying the transfer source. Also, the address of the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols with buffer number "1" is set in the buffer pointer specifying the transfer destination. Furthermore, the number of transfers corresponding to the data size of the buffer area for symbols corresponding to normal symbols is set. Thereafter, the contents of the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols are sequentially transferred and shifted using a block transfer command. At this time, the buffer for symbols corresponding to normal symbols with buffer number "4" is cleared to initialize its contents.

After step AKS628, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the address of the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table (step AKS629). The first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table address is the address of the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Furthermore, a time-saving check process is executed to confirm that the time-saving function flag is not the time-saving activation designated value (step AKS630). At this time, if the time-saving function flag is the time-saving activation designated value (step AKS630; No), a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the address of the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table (step AKS631). The second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table address is the address of the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table stored in the game data area of ROM 101.

If the time-saving function flag is not set to the time-saving activation value in response to step AKS630 (step AKS630; Yes), or after step AKS631, the RS3 soft latch random number register is loaded (step AKS632). In this case, the address of the RS3 soft latch random number register in the function control register area is specified, and the stored value is read and set in an internal register of CPU 103 using a transfer command, making it usable as the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern. Then, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS633). In the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633, the value of the random number MR3-1 read in step AKS632 is set as the comparison value, and the normal pattern variation pattern indicated by the allocation result data can be determined using the stored data in the first normal pattern variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS629 or the second normal pattern variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS631.

Once the normal symbol variation pattern is determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633, the normal symbol variation time corresponding to that normal symbol variation pattern is set (step AKS634). In step AKS634, a time data expansion process is executed using the normal symbol variation time table and normal symbol variation pattern designation data, making it possible to set the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern. Next, a transfer command for setting a pointer is issued to set the normal symbol variation work table address (step AKS635). The normal symbol variation work table address is the address of the normal symbol variation work table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Next, data set process P_DATASET is executed (step AKS636), and normal symbol normal process P_FNORM is terminated. The data set processing P_DATASET in step AKS636 uses the normal pattern change work table whose address was set in step AKS635 to set the normal pattern process code to 01 [H], which is the normal pattern change processing designated value, and sets the value stored in the normal pattern change display buffer to 01 [H], which is the normal pattern change display data. In addition, the normal pattern display update timer can be initialized by clearing it.

Figure 123-37 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of data configuration related to normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM. In normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM, the normal pattern per symbol designation value can be determined by executing the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625 using the normal symbol per symbol symbol setting table whose address was set in step AKS623. Furthermore, the normal symbol symbol variation pattern can be determined by executing the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 using the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS629 or the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table whose address was set in step AKS631. In step AKS634, the normal symbol variation time table can be used to set the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the result of determining the normal symbol variation pattern. Additionally, in step AKS507 of the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 123-33 (A), when the normal symbol process code corresponds to 03 [H] and the normal electric device pre-activation processing P_FINT is executed, the opening time of the normal electric device provided in correspondence with the second start winning slot can be determined using a work setting table when the normal electric device is activated, etc.

In this way, normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM makes it possible to determine the pattern designation value for a normal pattern using a table for setting patterns for normal patterns. Normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM also makes it possible to determine the normal pattern change pattern using the first normal pattern change pattern allocation table or the second normal pattern change pattern allocation table. Normal pattern normal processing P_FNORM also makes it possible to determine the normal pattern change time using the normal pattern change time table. Normal electric device pre-activation processing P_FINT, which is executed in response to the execution result of the normal game, can determine the opening time of the normal electric device.

Figure 123-37 (A) shows an example configuration AKT61 of a table for setting symbols for normal symbols. The normal symbol setting table of example configuration AKT61 stores a value 00 [H] corresponding to the first normal symbol designated value at the first address 1B54 [H], and a value 03 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B55 [H]. The stored data from address 1B56 [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the first to third normal symbol designated values. When using the normal symbol setting table of example configuration AKT61, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS625 can determine one of the first to third normal symbol designated values in accordance with the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol. In the example configuration AKT61, the designated symbol value for the first normal symbol is 00 [H], the designated symbol value for the second normal symbol is 01 [H], and the designated symbol value for the third normal symbol is 02 [H]. For example, when the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value of "0", the designated symbol value for the first normal symbol is determined.

Figure 123-37 (B1) shows an example configuration of the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table AKT62. The first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of the example configuration AKT62 stores the value 00 [H] corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern FPZ1 designated value at the first address 1B59 [H], and stores the value 04 [H] indicating the number of processes at the next address 1B5A [H]. The stored data from address 1B5B [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ1 to FPZ4. When using the first normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of the example configuration AKT62, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS633 can determine one of the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ1 to FPZ4 in accordance with the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern.

Figure 123-37 (B2) shows a configuration example AKT63 of the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table. In the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT63, the value 04 [H] corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern FPZ5 designated value is stored at the first address 1B5F [H], and the value 04 [H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B60 [H]. The stored data from address 1B61 [H] onwards indicates allocation judgment values corresponding to normal symbol variation patterns FPZ5 to FPZ8. When using the second normal symbol variation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT63, the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 of step AKS633 can determine one of the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ5 to FPZ8 in accordance with the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern.

Figure 123-37 (C) shows normal pattern fluctuation time determination example AKD61. In determination example AKD61, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 1000 [ms] corresponding to normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP1 to FZP4, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 100 [ms] corresponding to normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP5 to FZP8. In step AKS634, the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 is set. Normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP1 to FZP4 can be determined using the first normal pattern fluctuation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT61 when the time-saving function flag is off. Normal pattern fluctuation patterns FZP5 to FZP8 can be determined using the second normal pattern fluctuation pattern allocation table of configuration example AKT62 when the time-saving function flag is on. This makes it possible to set the normal pattern variation time, which is the variable display time of the normal pattern, to be shorter when time-saving control is in effect than when time-saving control is not in effect.

Figure 123-37 (D) shows an example of determining the normal electric feature release time AKD62. In the normal electric feature activation preprocessing P_FINT, the normal electric feature release time can be determined in accordance with the time-saving activation designated value and the normal symbol per symbol designated value. When the time-saving activation designated value is set to 00 [H], which corresponds to "x", indicating that the time-saving mode is not active, the normal electric feature release time is determined to be 16 ms, corresponding to all normal symbol per symbol designated values 00 [H] to 02 [H]. In contrast, when the time-saving activation designated value is set to 01 [H], which corresponds to "o", indicating that the time-saving mode is active, the normal electric feature activation time is determined to be 5000 ms, corresponding to all normal symbol per symbol designated values 00 [H] to 02 [H].

In this way, the normal electric device opening time can be determined to a different time corresponding to the time-saving operation designated value, regardless of the value of the normal symbol per symbol designated value. The normal symbol per symbol designated value can be determined in accordance with the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol read from the normal symbol per symbol buffer. If the time-saving operation designated value is the same, the normal electric device operation time is determined to be the same whether the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol is the minimum random number value of "0" or any other random number value. Therefore, in correspondence with a special symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20, when the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol per symbol is the minimum random number value of "0," a display result with a higher degree of advantage is not determined compared to when it is any other random number value. This makes it possible to update the random number value appropriately to prevent fraudulent activity due to a malfunction in the second random number value when the random number MR2-1 for the normal winning symbol is used as the second random number value.

In the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 123-1, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the numerical data indicating the values of the random number values included in the game random numbers, including the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern, and the random number MR3-1 for a normal symbol variation pattern. Furthermore, by executing the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in FIG. 123-12, the CPU 103 can update the numerical data indicating the values of the random number values included in the game random numbers, including the random number MR1-2 for a winning symbol, the random number MR1-3 serving as the initial value for a winning symbol, the random number MR2-1 for a normal winning symbol, and the random number MR2-2 serving as the initial value for a normal winning symbol.

When the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in FIG. 123-20 is executed in step AKS248 of the normal special symbol processing shown in FIG. 123-18, the special symbol big win determination process in step AKS304 and the special symbol small win determination process in step AKS305 can use the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "big win" or a "small win." Then, when the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in FIG. 123-22 is executed in step AKS308 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU in step AKS326 or step AKS333 can use the winning symbol random number MR1-2 to determine the jackpot symbol designation value or small win symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol that results in the special symbol display. In addition, when the second allocation judgment value comparison process P_HANTEIS is executed in step AKS625 of the normal pattern normal processing shown in Figure 123-36, it becomes possible to determine the normal pattern winning symbol designated value corresponding to the confirmed normal pattern that will be the display result of the normal pattern using the random number MR2-1 for the normal pattern winning symbol. The jackpot symbol designated value determined using the winning symbol random number MR1-2 makes it possible to set the maximum number of times the large prize opening hole is opened in step AKS330 of the special pattern information setting process P_TZU_SET, as in the example AKD01 of determining the maximum number of times the large prize opening hole is opened shown in Figure 123-24 (C). The normal winning symbol designation value determined using the normal winning symbol random number MR2-1 enables the setting of the normal electric device opening time, as shown in the normal electric device opening time determination example AKD62 shown in FIG. 123-37(D), when the normal symbol process code corresponds to 03[H] and the normal electric device activation pre-processing P_FINT is executed in step AKS507 of the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in FIG. 123-33(A). Therefore, the winning symbol random number MR1-2 is used to determine the display results of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, enabling the setting of the type of jackpot game state advantageous to the player. The normal winning symbol random number MR2-1 is used to determine the display results of the normal symbol display device 20, enabling the setting of a change mode that changes the second starting winning hole, which serves as the starting area, to a guidance state that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through.

In this way, game control-related processing can be performed using various random number values that serve as game random numbers. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which serves as the first random number value, and the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol, which serves as the second random number value, can be updated within their respective update ranges using a common update process, such as the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, which can be called and executed by the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in FIG. 123-12. Here, the update range for the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is "0" to "198," and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "199," so the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. Therefore, for at least one of the first and second random number values that can be updated using the common update process, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. In this way, the shared update process prevents an increase in program size, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number, which suppresses the occurrence of random number synchronization and enables appropriate random number updates.

The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which serves as the first random number value, has an update range of "0" to "199," and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "200," meaning that the total number of random numbers included in the update range is not a prime number. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used to determine the jackpot symbol designation value for the fixed special symbol, and the jackpot symbol designation value may determine whether or not a special state will be entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this case, the determination rate of the jackpot symbol designation value corresponds to the special state entry rate, which is the rate at which the special state is entered. The special state entry rate is included in important specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is desirable for it to be a value that is clearly recognizable. However, if the total number of random numbers included in the update range of the winning symbol MR1-2 is a prime number, the denominator of the special state entry rate will be a prime number, making it difficult to express as a percentage, and thus potentially making the special state entry rate difficult to recognize. Therefore, of the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols and MR2-1 for normal winning symbols, which can be updated using a common update process, the total number of random numbers included in the update range for the normal winning symbols MR2-1 may be a prime number, while the total number of random numbers included in the update range for the winning symbols MR1-2 may not be a prime number. This makes it possible to appropriately update the random numbers so that the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be clearly recognized while suppressing the occurrence of synchronization in the random numbers.

The total number of random numbers included in the update range for the winning symbol random number MR1-2, which serves as the first random number value, may also be a prime number. This more reliably prevents the synchronous occurrence of random number values that can be updated using a common update process, enabling appropriate random number value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 123-12, steps AKS61 to AKS64 can update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and steps AKS65 to AKS68 can update random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value. The random number update process P_RANDOM can update random number MR1-2, which becomes the first random number value, and random number MR2-1, which becomes the second random number value, using the HL register, B register, and DE register of CPU 103, which are common internal storage means. In this way, the first random number value and second random number value can be stably updated using the common internal storage means, making it possible to update random number values appropriately.

The CPU 103 executing the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in FIG. 123-12 serves as a first update means capable of updating the first and second random number values within their respective update ranges through the random number update process when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is set as the first random number value and the random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is set as the second random number value. Furthermore, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B serve as second update means capable of updating the third and fourth random number values within their respective update ranges through a system clock input that serves as a random number clock signal when the third and fourth random number values are set from among the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. For example, the random number MR2-1 for the normal winning symbol has an update range of "0" to "198", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "199", so the total number of random numbers included in the update range of the second random number is a prime number. In contrast, for example, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect has an update range of "0" to "65518", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "65519", the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type has an update range of "0" to "240", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "241", and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern has an update range of "0" to "250", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "251", so the total number of random numbers included in the update range of at least one of the third random number and the fourth random number is a prime number. In this way, the update methods used by the first update means and the second update means are different, and even if the update methods are the same, the total number of random number values included in the update range for at least one of the means is a prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization and enabling appropriate random number updating.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B function as first update means capable of updating the first and second random number values by a system clock input serving as a random number clock signal when the first and second random number values are set from among the random number MR1-1 for determining a special symbol, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern. The CPU 103, which executes the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in FIG. 123-12, functions as second update means capable of updating the third random number value by the random number update process when the third random number value is set from among the random number MR1-2 for a winning symbol and the random number MR2-1 for a normal or winning symbol. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103, which executes the game control main process P_MAIN shown in FIG. 117, executes the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON shown in FIG. 123-7 in step S1. Then, in step AKS13, the CPU 103 sets a stored value in the function setting register area by a function setting register store instruction. At this time, by setting a stored value in a maximum value setting register provided corresponding to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, a maximum value setting process can be executed to set a maximum value for the random number values updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. In the maximum value setting process, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, which serves as the first updating means, starts updating the first random number when the maximum value for the first random number is set, and then starts updating the second random number when the maximum value for the second random number is set. The CPU 103 executing the game control main processing P_MAIN shown in FIG. 117 executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON in step S1, and then, during the loop processing of steps S8 to S11, becomes able to execute the game control timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in FIG. 118 in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt, and starts updating the third random number value by executing the random number update processing P_RANDOM in step S56. In this way, the CPU 103 executing the random number update processing P_RANDOM, which serves as the second updating means, is able to update the third random number value after executing the maximum value setting processing in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. Therefore, by starting the update of a random number value highly related to game value, such as the random number MR1-1 used to determine special symbols, first, uncertainty is increased, enabling appropriate random number value updates.

In the bit data RAP of the RWM access protect register shown in Figure 123-9 (B), bit data RAM0 with bit number "0" is set to its initial value of 0 [B] in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, access to RAM 102, which serves as the RWM, is prohibited in response to the storage value of the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area, being set to the first storage value. After executing the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON shown in Figure 123-7, the CPU 103 sets the storage value in the function setting register area using the function setting register store instruction in step AKS13, and then stores the access permission output value in the RWM access protect register in step AKS14. In this way, after setting the storage value in the function setting register area, which is a storage area related to functions, a second storage value that permits access to RAM 102 as a storage means can be set in the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area. Then, as the next process after setting the second stored value, the main processing for game control P_MAIN shown in FIG. 117 executes the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2, which can be used to execute a confirmation process to check whether the control state can be restored based on the contents stored in RAM 102, which is the storage means. In this way, the contents stored in the storage means are not changed unnecessarily, allowing the confirmation process to be executed reliably and the random number value to be updated appropriately.

The CPU 103 executing the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF shown in FIG. 123-10 stores the checksum data created by the checksum calculation processing P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 in the checksum buffer in step AKS40, thereby executing a stop-time storage process in which the checksum data, which serves as recovery information for restoring the control state in response to a power supply interruption, is stored in a storage area such as the checksum buffer of RAM 102, which is a storage means. After such stop-time storage processing is executed, the clear data set in the output value data in step AKS41 is stored in the RWM access protection register in step AKS42, thereby executing a stop-time storage process in which the first storage value is set in a specific storage area. After the stop-time storage processing is executed, the loop processing of steps AKS48 and AKS49 transitions to a standby state in which game control is not executed. In response to the power supply being restored during this standby state, if the power confirmation signal input bit is not "0" in step AKS49, the power recovery vector table address is set to the stack pointer in step AKS50, and then the power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is terminated by an interrupt return command, allowing the game control main processing P_MAIN shown in FIG. 117 to be executed from the beginning as startup processing upon startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This prevents unstable operation when the power supply is restored and enables appropriate updating of random numbers.

In the address map of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 123-2, the function setting register area of the built-in register assigned addresses FE00[H] to FEBF[H] is the first area for function setting using the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, and the function control register area of the built-in register assigned addresses FF00[H] to FFFF[H] is the second area for function control using the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100. Of these, the RWM access protection register at address FF00[H] is a specific storage area in which a storage value indicating whether or not to allow access to the RWM RAM 102 can be set. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103, which executes the game control main process P_MAIN shown in FIG. 117, executes the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON shown in FIG. 123-7 in step S1. This process can then execute steps AKS5 through AKS7 for control storage, which sets a value stored in the function control register area, which is the second area. After this control storage process is executed, steps AKS11 through AKS13 for setting a value stored in the function setting register area, which is the first area. After this setting storage process is executed, step AKS14 can set a value that permits access to the RAM 102, which is the storage means, in the RWM access protection register, which is the specific storage area. This prevents the contents of the storage means from being tampered with and enables appropriate random number updates.

(Means for solving the problems and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
(1-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
a first display means capable of variably displaying special identification information;
and a second display means capable of variably displaying the normal identification information,
a type of advantageous state is determined in accordance with the display result by the first display means;
A change mode for changing the start area into a guidance state in which the game medium can easily pass through is determined in accordance with the display result by the second display means;
The update method is
the first random number used to determine the display result by the first display means and the second random number used to determine the display result by the second display means can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process;
The first random number value and the second random number value can be updated using a common internal storage means;
The first random number is the number of random numbers included in the update range that is not a prime number.
The total number of random values included in the update range of the second random value is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The special identification information may be, for example, a special symbol. The first display means may be, for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. The normal identification information may be, for example, a normal symbol. The second display means may be, for example, a normal symbol display device 20. The display result by the first display means may be, for example, a confirmed special symbol that results in the display of a special symbol. The display result by the second display means may be, for example, a confirmed normal symbol that results in the display of a normal symbol. The type of advantageous state may be, for example, the maximum number of times the big prize opening is opened. The change mode may be, for example, the opening time of a normal electric device. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The update process may be, for example, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The internal storage means may be, for example, the HL register, B register, or DE register of the CPU 103. The total number of first random numbers may be, for example, "65536" for the random number MR1-2. The total number of second random numbers may be, for example, "199" for the random number MR2-1.
With this configuration, the common update process prevents an increase in program capacity, and since the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number, synchronization between the first random number value and the second random number value is suppressed, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

(1-2) When executing the update process, the update means may be capable of updating the random number value to be updated and changing the initial random number value after setting the random number value to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value.
Here, the setting for executing the update process may be, for example, steps AKS61 to AKS63 and AKS65 to AKS67. The update of the random number value to be updated and the change of the initial value of the random number may be, for example, the part that executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number values appropriately by updating the set random number values to be updated.

(1-3) The updating means may update the second random number value after updating the first random number value through the specific updating process.
Here, the specific update process may be, for example, a random number update process P_RANDOM.
In such a configuration, by updating the first random number value, which is used to determine the display result that attracts the player's attention, before the second random number value, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed and appropriate random number value updates are possible.

(1-4) The update means may be capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value and changing the initial values of the first random number value and the second random number value by calling a common update process corresponding to the first random number value and the second random number value through the specific update process.
Here, the common update process may be, for example, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of steps AKS64 and AKS68 in the random number update process P_RANDOM.
In such a configuration, the common update process prevents an increase in program capacity, and the first random number value and the second random number value are stably updated, making it possible to update the random number value appropriately.

(1-5) The updating means may be capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value by a specific updating process using a common internal storage means.
For example, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, the HL register is set by steps AKS61 and AKS65, the B register is set by steps AKS62 and AKS66, and the DE register is set by steps AKS63 and AKS67, and then the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed by steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In such a configuration, the first random number value and the second random number value are stably updated using a common internal storage means, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

(1-6) When the specific update process stores the reference information in the internal storage means before the common update process, the update means may be capable of setting different reference information in the internal storage means using a common instruction corresponding to the first random number value and the second random number value.
Here, the internal storage means may be, for example, an HL register, a B register, a DE register, etc. The common instruction may be a transfer instruction such as an LD instruction or an LDQ instruction. The different reference information may be, for example, the address F081 [H] of the random number counter for the winning symbol and the address F052 [H] of the random number counter for the normal winning symbol, or the address F050 [H] of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol and the address F053 [H] of the random number initial value data buffer for the normal winning symbol.
In such a configuration, by making it possible to update the first random number value and the second random number value using a common instruction, it becomes possible to stably update the first random number value and the second random number value, thereby updating the random number value appropriately.

(1-7) When executing the update process, the update means updates the random number value to be updated, and then changes the random number initial value in response to the random number value to be updated matching the random number initial value.
For example, in the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, after updating the random number value to be updated in step AKS101, a new random number initial value is stored in step AKS108 in response to the value matching the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer in step AKS105.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number values appropriately by updating the random number values to be updated and changing the initial random number values.

(1-8) When the update means executes the update process to update the random number value to be updated,
Comparing the random number value to be updated with the maximum random number value;
If the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value, add 1 to the random number value to be updated.
A single compare and add instruction may be executed first, which includes changing the random number value to be updated to the minimum random number value if the comparison result is greater than or equal to the maximum random number value.
Here, the compare and add instruction may be, for example, the part of step AKS101.
In such a configuration, by executing the compare and add instruction first, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions and update the random number values appropriately.

(1-9) The updating means may first execute a compare and add instruction in both cases of updating the first random number value and updating the second random number value.
For example, it may be step AKS101 in the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP of steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In such a configuration, by executing the compare and add instruction first, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors in the first random number value and the second random number value, and to update the random number value appropriately.

(1-10) When determining the display result by the first display means, when the first random number value is the minimum random number value, the display result is not determined to be more advantageous than when the first random number value is other than the minimum random number value;
When determining the display result by the second display means, when the second random number value is the minimum random number value, the display result may not be determined to be more advantageous than when the second random number value is other than the minimum random number value.
Here, the display result that is not determined to have a high degree of advantage may be, for example, example AKD01 of determining the number of times the large prize opening is to be performed or example AKD02 of determining the mode of the large prize opening.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately update the random number values so as to prevent fraudulent acts due to defects in the first random number values or the second random number values.

(1-11) The update means is
An initial value update process can be executed to update the initial random value used when changing the random number initial value;
After executing the compare and add instruction, the random number value to be updated after the compare and add instruction is compared with the initial random number value;
If the updated random number value does not match the initial random number value, store the updated random number value as the current random number value.
If the updated random number value to be updated matches the random number initial value, the initial value random number value obtained by the initial value update process may be stored as the current random number value and also as a new random number initial value.
Here, the random number value for the initial value may be, for example, random number MR1-3 or random number MR2-2. The initial value update process may be, for example, random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial value. The comparison with the random number initial value may be, for example, in step AKS105. If it does not match the random number initial value, it may be, for example, in the case of Yes in step AKS105. If it matches the random number initial value, it may be, for example, in the case of No in step AKS105, in steps AKS106 to AKS108.
In such a configuration, the uncertainty of the random number value is increased by setting a new initial value for the random number, and by storing it as the current random number value, an increase in data volume is prevented, and the random number value can be updated appropriately.

(1-12) The update means is
a first initial value update process for updating a first initial value random number value used when changing the random number initial value in response to a case where the random number value to be updated is a first random number value;
In the case where the random number value to be updated is a second random number value, it may be possible to execute an initial value update process that includes a second initial value update process that updates a random number value for a second initial value that is used when changing the random number initial value.
Here, the first random number value for initial values may be, for example, random number MR1-3. The first initial value update process may be, for example, steps AKS81 and AKS82 in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT. The second random number value for initial values may be, for example, random number MR2-2. The second initial value update process may be, for example, steps AKS83 and AKS84 in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT.
In such a configuration, the random number values can be updated appropriately by updating the first initial value random number values and the second initial value random number values.

(1-13) The updating means may update the second random number value for the initial value after updating the first random number value for the initial value through the initial value update process.
For example, in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT, steps AKS83 and AKS84 may be executed after steps AKS81 and AKS82.
In such a configuration, by updating the random number value for the first initial value, which has a higher priority, before the random number value for the second initial value, which has a lower priority, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed, and appropriate random number value updates are possible.

(1-14) When executing the initial value update process, the update means performs the following based on the settings regarding the random number value for the initial value to be updated and the maximum value of the random number for the initial value:
comparing the random number value for the initial value to be updated with the maximum random number value for the initial value;
If the comparison result is less than the maximum value of the initial value random number, add 1 to the initial value random number to be updated.
A single compare and add instruction may be executed, which includes changing the initial value random number value to be updated to the minimum random number value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the initial value random number maximum value.
Here, the compare and add instruction may be, for example, the part of steps AKS82 and AKS84.
In such a configuration, by updating the random number value for the initial value to be updated using a compare and add instruction, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems and update the random number value appropriately.

(1-15) The update means is
A random number update process capable of updating the random number value to be updated;
An initial value random number update process that can update the initial value random number used when changing the random number initial value corresponding to the random number to be updated;
The first process executable in response to a timer interrupt due to the lapse of a predetermined time includes a random number update process and an initial value random number update process,
The second process that can be repeatedly executed until the first process is executed may not include the random number update process, but may include the initial value random number update process.
Here, the random number value to be updated may be, for example, random number MR1-2 or random number MR2-1. The random number update process may be, for example, random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number value for initial value may be, for example, random number MR1-3 or random number MR2-2. The random number update process for initial value may be, for example, random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination. The first process may be, for example, timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. The second process may be, for example, steps S8 to S10 in the main process P_MAIN for game control.
In such a configuration, the initial value random number updating process increases the uncertainty of the initial value random number, making it possible to update the random number appropriately.

(1-16) The update process is
A random number update process capable of updating the random number value to be updated;
An initial value random number update process capable of updating the initial value random number used when changing the random number initial value corresponding to the random number value to be updated,
The random number update process and the initial value random number update process can be called and executed in the timer interrupt process that controls the progress of the game.
The initial value random number update process may be called and executed during standby processing that is repeated after startup processing that is executed based on the start of power supply.
Here, the random number value to be updated may be, for example, random number MR1-2 or random number MR2-1. The random number update process may be, for example, random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number value for initial value may be, for example, random number MR1-3 or random number MR2-2. The random number update process for initial value may be, for example, random number update process for initial value determination P_TFINIT. The timer interrupt process may be, for example, timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. The startup process may be, for example, steps S1 to S7 in the main process P_MAIN for game control. The standby process may be, for example, steps S8 to S10 in the main process P_MAIN for game control.
In such a configuration, the initial value random number updating process increases the uncertainty of the initial value random number, making it possible to update the random number appropriately.

(2-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
the updating means is capable of updating a first random number value for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The first random value is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a specific number,
The second random number value is a predetermined number that is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is smaller than the specific number,
The first random number value may be updated faster than the second random number value.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or the like. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC, or the like. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2, or the like. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The specific number may be, for example, "65536", which is the size of the random number MR1-1. The predetermined number may be, for example, "65519", which is the size of the random number MR3-2. A fast update speed means that, for example, the update speed of the random number MR1-1 in the comparative random number value AKA23 is 15,000 times/ms and the update speed of the random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number value appropriately so that intentional control of the advantageous state becomes difficult due to a fast update speed of the first random number value related to the advantageous state.

(2-2) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
the updating means is capable of updating a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The first random value is updated at a first rate,
The second random number value is a second speed at which the update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed,
The total number of random values included in the update ranges of the first random value and the second random value may be different, and the total number of random values included in both update ranges may be prime numbers.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed becomes an integer multiple, the total number of random number values included in the update range is a different prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization between the first random number value and the second random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(2-3) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
the updating means is capable of updating a first random number value, a second random number value different from the first random number value, and a third random number value different from the first random number value and the second random number value;
The processing means is capable of extracting the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value when a common extraction condition is satisfied;
The first random value is updated at a first rate,
the second random number value and the third random number value are a second speed at which the update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed;
The total number of random numbers included in each update range may be different for the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, and the total number of random numbers included in each update range may be a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed is an integer multiple, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a different prime number, which suppresses synchronization between the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(2-4) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
The update method is
a first updating means for updating the first random number value and the second random number value within their respective update ranges by a random number updating process;
a second updating means for updating the third random number value and the fourth random number value within their respective update ranges using a random number clock signal;
At least one of the first random number value and the second random number value is such that the total number of random number values included in the update range is a prime number;
At least one of the third random value and the fourth random value may be such that the total number of random value values included in the update range is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a special symbol process process P_TPROC or a normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The random number update process may be, for example, a random number update process P_RANDOM. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The fourth random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The random number clock signal may be, for example, a system clock. The total number of random numbers included in the update range may be, for example, "199", which is the size of random number MR2-1, "200", which is the size of random number MR1-2, "241", which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251", which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, the first update means and the second update means use different update methods, and even if the update methods are the same, the total number of random number values included in the update range of at least one of the means is a prime number, thereby suppressing the occurrence of synchronization and enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(3-1) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
the processing means is capable of executing a maximum value setting process for setting a maximum value of the random numbers updated by the update means when a storage value is set in a storage area related to a function by a startup process executed based on the start of power supply;
The update method is
a first updating means capable of updating a first random number value consisting of a specific number of bytes;
a second updating means capable of updating a second random number value that is configured with a predetermined number of bytes that is smaller than the specific number of bytes,
When executing the maximum value setting process, the processing means may set the maximum random number value for the first random number value and then set the maximum random number value for the second random number value.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, a function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or a function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the gaming control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for gaming control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The first random number value may be, for example, the random number MR3-2. The first updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The predetermined number of bytes may be, for example, 1 byte. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The second updating means may be, for example, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. Setting the maximum random number value for the first random number value and setting the maximum random number value for the second random number value may be performed by executing step AKS13 using the function setting register stored value table AKT01, etc.
In such a configuration, by setting a first random number value of a specific number of bytes and then setting a second random number value of a predetermined number of bytes, the first random number value and the second random number value can be stably updated, making it possible to update the random number values appropriately.

(3-2) The updating means may start updating the random numbers in order from the random number for which the maximum random number value is set.
For example, it may be a part that uses the function setting register storage value table AKT01 to set maximum values for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 with channel number "0", the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 with channel number "2", and the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 with channel numbers "1" to "3".
In such a configuration, the uncertainty of the random number value is increased depending on the timing at which the update of the random number value is started, reducing the processing load and enabling appropriate updating of the random number value.

(3-3) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
processing means for executing processing relating to game control using the random number value updated by the updating means;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
the processing means is capable of executing a maximum value setting process for setting a maximum value of the random numbers updated by the update means when a storage value is set in a storage area related to a function by a startup process executed based on the start of power supply;
The update method is
a first updating means capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value by a random number clock signal;
a second updating means capable of updating the third random number value by a random number updating process;
the first updating means, in the maximum value setting process executed by the processing means, starts updating the first random number value when the maximum random number value of the first random number value is set, and then starts updating the second random number value when the maximum random number value of the second random number value is set;
The second updating means may start updating the third random number value after the processing means has executed the maximum value setting process.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a CPU 103 that executes random number update processing P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC or normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, a function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or a function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the gaming control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, a main processing P_MAIN for gaming control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The first random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-1, MR3-2, etc. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The third random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-2 or MR2-1. The random number updating process may be, for example, the random number updating process P_RANDOM. The second updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the random number updating process P_RANDOM in step S56. The updating of the first random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 with channel number "0" and the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 with channel number "2" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the second random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 with channel numbers "1" to "3" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the third random number value may be started, for example, at the part where the random number update processing P_RANDOM of step S56 is executed in the timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control after the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON of step S1 is executed.
In such a configuration, by starting the update of random numbers such as MR1-1, which have a high correlation with the gaming value, first, uncertainty is increased, and appropriate random number values can be updated.

(4-1) a storage means capable of storing information related to game control;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
a specific storage area among the storage areas relating to the function can be set to a first storage value that prohibits access to the storage means in response to the start of power supply;
The processing means is
After setting a storage value in the storage area related to the function, a second storage value that allows access to the storage means can be set in the specific storage area;
As a next process after the second storage value is set in the specific storage area, a confirmation process may be executed to confirm whether or not the control state can be restored based on the stored contents of the storage means.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100. The specific storage area may be, for example, an RWM access protection register. The first storage value may be, for example, 00 [H]. The second storage value may be, for example, 01 [H]. The second storage value may be set in the specific storage area by, for example, executing step AKS14 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The confirmation processing may be, for example, the RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK of step S2.
In this configuration, the contents stored in the storage means are prevented from being changed unnecessarily, so that the confirmation process can be executed reliably and the random number value can be updated appropriately.

(4-2) The processing means is
In response to the power supply interruption, a stoppage storage process can be executed to store recovery information for restoring the control state in the storage means,
After the stop-time storage process is executed, a stop-time storage process can be executed to set the first storage value in the specific storage area,
After the stop storage process is executed, the machine may be shifted to a standby state in which game control is not executed, and in response to the power supply being restored while the machine is in the standby state, the start-up process based on the start-up of the game machine may be executed from the beginning.
The recovery information may be, for example, checksum data. The stop storage process may be, for example, the checksum calculation process of step AKS39 or step AKS40 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The stop storage process may be, for example, steps AKS41 and AKS42 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The transition to the standby state may be, for example, the execution of steps AKS48 and AKS49 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The executable process from the beginning of the startup process may be, for example, the execution of step AKS50 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF and then the execution of the RET command.
In such a configuration, when the power supply is restored, unstable operation can be prevented and the random number values can be updated appropriately.

(4-3) a storage means capable of storing information related to game control;
a storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of the updating means and the processing means;
The storage means includes, as a storage area relating to functions,
a first area for setting functions;
a second area for function control;
the second area includes a specific storage area in which a storage value indicating whether or not access to the storage means is permitted can be set;
The processing means performs a startup process based on the start of power supply,
A control storage process for setting a storage value in the second area can be executed;
After the control storage process is executed, a setting storage process can be executed to set a storage value in the first area,
After the setting storage process is executed, a storage value that allows access to the storage means may be set in the specific storage area.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100. The first area may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01. The second area may be, for example, the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The specific storage area may be, for example, an RWM access protection register. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The control storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS5 to AKS7 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The setting storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The storage value can be set in the specific storage area by, for example, executing step AKS14 in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON.
In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the contents stored in the storage means from being changed unnecessarily and to update the random number values appropriately.

(SKY2021-664) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The determination result of the first random number value has a greater influence on the payout rate than the determination result of the second random number value,
The update means
The first random value and the second random value can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process,
updating the first random value and then updating the second random value;
before updating the first random value by the update process, setting reference information for the first random value in an internal storage means using a specific command;
Before updating the second random value by the update process, the specific instruction is used to set reference information for the second random value in the internal variable means.
Here, the payout rate is a rate calculated by taking the number of game balls inserted into the gaming machine as the denominator and the number of game balls paid out to the player as the numerator. It is set as a design value for each gaming machine. If it exceeds 100%, it indicates that the number of game balls paid out to the player is greater than the number of game balls inserted into the gaming machine.
Here, the first random number value corresponds to the random number for the winning symbol (MR1-2), and the second random number value corresponds to the random number for the winning symbol (MR2-1). The random number for the winning symbol is a random number used to determine the number of jackpot rounds, which is the main trigger for acquiring game balls (a random number for determining the display result of the special symbol linked to the number of jackpot rounds) (see Figure 123-24 (C)). The random number for the winning symbol is a random number used to determine the opening time of the normal electric device (a random number for determining the display result of the normal symbol linked to the opening time of the normal electric device) (see Figure 123-37 (D)). The determination by the random number for the winning symbol is used to determine the number of jackpot rounds, while the determination by the random number for the winning symbol is used to determine the opening time of the normal electric device, and the random number for the winning symbol has a greater impact on the number of game balls acquired. The number of game balls that can be won by landing a ball in the big prize slot is 15, while the number of game balls that can be won by landing a ball in a regular electric device is 1.
In this configuration, since the first random number value has a greater impact on the number of balls a player wins, by processing it first, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the random number value becoming constant due to a malfunction or the like (which would result in a biased period of time without being updated), and by updating the random number using a common command, stable updates can be performed.

(SKY2021-665) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
The update means
The first random value and the second random value can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process,
A single compare and add instruction including: comparing the random number value with a maximum random number value; adding 1 to the random number value if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number value; and changing the random number value to a minimum random number value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the maximum random number value; is the first process of the update process for the first random number value and the update process for the second random number value;
When the first random number value is the minimum random number value, the determination result is not more advantageous than when the first random number value is other than the minimum random number value,
If the second random number value is the minimum random number value, the determination result will not be more advantageous than if the second random number value is other than the minimum random number value.
Here, the display result that is not determined to have a high degree of advantage may be, for example, the example of determining the number of times the large prize opening is performed AKD01 or the example of determining the mode of opening the large prize opening AKD02. Also, the normal electric device opening time in the example of determining the normal electric device opening time in FIG. 123-37 (D) is designed so that there is no advantage or disadvantage, such as a uniform 16 ms in the normal state (time-saving operation designated value ×) and a uniform 5000 ms in the special state (time-saving operation designated value 0). However, in the example of determining the normal electric device opening time in FIG. 123-37 (D), the normal electric device opening time for the normal symbol per symbol designated value "00" is 16 ms or 5000 ms, but it may be set to 10 ms or 3000 ms to make it relatively disadvantageous compared to other opening times. By doing so, when the number of times the large prize opening is opened, which is the result of the first random number value (random number for winning symbols (MR1-2)), and the opening time of the normal electric device, which is the result of the second random number value (random number for winning symbols (MR2-1)), both become the minimum random number value (00H), it is possible to prevent a favorable decision result (10 times for the number of times the large prize opening is opened, and 5000 ms for the opening time of the normal electric device).
In such a configuration, by executing the comparison and addition instruction first, the occurrence of malfunctions is suppressed and the random number value can be updated appropriately. If a malfunction occurs, the random number value will be slightly biased toward the smallest random number value, but even in that case, the design is such that the decision result will not be highly advantageous, so it is possible to prevent the malfunction from being intentionally induced, and as a result, it is possible to update the random number value appropriately.

(SKY2021-708) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
The random number values include a first random number value used in a process regarding whether or not to control to the advantageous state, and a second random number value different from the first random number value,
The first random value is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a specific number;
the second random number value is configured by the specific number of bytes, and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a predetermined number smaller than the specific number;
The update speed of the first random number value by the update means is faster than the update speed of the second random number value by the update means.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or the like. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC, or the like. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2, or the like. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The specific number may be, for example, "65536", which is the size of the random number MR1-1. The predetermined number may be, for example, "65519", which is the size of the random number MR3-2. A fast update speed means that, for example, the update speed of the random number MR1-1 in the comparative random number value AKA23 is 15,000 times/ms and the update speed of the random number MR3-2 is 469 times/ms.
In such a configuration, it is possible to update the random number value appropriately so that intentional control of the advantageous state becomes difficult due to a fast update speed of the first random number value related to the advantageous state.

(SKY2021-709) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value and a second random number value different from the first random number value;
the first random value is updated at a first rate;
the second random number value is a second speed at which the update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed,
The first random number value and the second random number value are random number values obtained at the same time,
the total number of random values included in each update range is different between the first random value and the second random value;
The first random value is a prime number, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The total number of random values included in the update range of the second random value is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed becomes an integer multiple, the total number of random number values included in the update range is a different prime number, thereby suppressing synchronization between the first random number value and the second random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(SKY2021-710) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An update means capable of updating the random value;
the random number values include a first random number value, a second random number value different from the first random number value, and a third random number value different from the first random number value and the second random number value;
the first random value is updated at a first rate;
the second random number value and the third random number value are a second speed at which an update speed is an integer multiple of the first speed,
the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value are random number values obtained at the same opportunity,
the total number of random numbers included in each update range is different for the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value;
The first random value is a prime number, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The second random value is a prime number, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The total number of random values included in the update range of the third random value is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The first speed may be, for example, 469 times/ms. The second speed may be, for example, 938 times/ms. The total number of random numbers may be, for example, "65519," which is the size of random number MR3-2, "241," which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251," which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, even if the update speed is an integer multiple, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a different prime number, which suppresses synchronization between the first random number value, the second random number value, and the third random number value, thereby enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(SKY2021-711) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a first updating means for updating the first random number value and the second random number value within their respective update ranges by a random number updating process;
a second update means for updating the third random number value and the fourth random number value within their respective update ranges using a random number clock signal;
At least one of the first random value and the second random value has a total number of random values included in an update range that is a prime number;
At least one of the third random number value and the fourth random number value has a total number of random number values included in an update range that is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a special symbol process process P_TPROC or a normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The first random number value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The second random number value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The random number update process may be, for example, a random number update process P_RANDOM. The third random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-3. The fourth random number value may be, for example, a random number MR3-4. The random number clock signal may be, for example, a system clock. The total number of random numbers included in the update range may be, for example, "199", which is the size of random number MR2-1, "200", which is the size of random number MR1-2, "241", which is the size of random number MR3-3, and "251", which is the size of random number MR3-4.
In such a configuration, the first update means and the second update means use different update methods, and even if the update methods are the same, the total number of random number values included in the update range of at least one of the means is a prime number, thereby suppressing the occurrence of synchronization and enabling appropriate updating of the random number values.

(SKY2021-712) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a game control means for controlling the game;
a first updating means capable of updating the first random number value and the second random number value by a random number clock signal;
a second updating means for updating the third random number value by a random number updating process;
The game control means is capable of executing a maximum value setting process for setting a maximum value of the first random number value and the second random number value when setting a stored value in a storage area by a startup process executed based on the start of power supply,
the first updating means, in the maximum value setting process, can start updating the first random number value when a maximum random number value for the first random number value has been set, and then start updating the second random number value when a maximum random number value for the second random number value has been set;
The second updating means can start updating the third random number value after starting to update the first random number value and the second random number value.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The updating means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a CPU 103 that executes random number update processing P_RANDOM. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes special symbol process processing P_TPROC or normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, a function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or a function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the gaming control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, a main processing P_MAIN for gaming control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The first random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-1, MR3-2, etc. The second random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first updating means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A or an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The third random number value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-2 or MR2-1. The random number updating process may be, for example, the random number updating process P_RANDOM. The second updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the random number updating process P_RANDOM in step S56. The updating of the first random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 with channel number "0" and the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 with channel number "2" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the second random number value may be initiated, for example, by setting maximum values for the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 with channel numbers "1" to "3" using the function setting register stored value table AKT01. The updating of the third random number value may be started, for example, at the part where the random number update processing P_RANDOM of step S56 is executed in the timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control after the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON of step S1 is executed.
In such a configuration, by starting the update of random numbers such as MR1-1, which have a high correlation with the gaming value, first, uncertainty is increased, and appropriate random number values can be updated.

(SKY2021-713) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a game control means for controlling the game;
a storage means capable of storing information relating to game control;
a storage means including a storage area related to game control functions;
The storage means has a storage area relating to functions,
a first area for setting functions related to game control;
a second area for controlling functions related to game control;
the second area includes a specific storage area in which a storage value indicating whether or not access to the storage means is permitted can be set;
The game control means performs a startup process based on the start of power supply,
A control storage process for setting a storage value in the second area can be executed,
After the control storage process is executed, a setting storage process can be executed to set a storage value in the first area,
After the setting storage process is executed, a storage value that permits access to the storage means can be set in the specific storage area.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area related to the function may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, an internal register of the game control microcomputer 100. The first area may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01. The second area may be, for example, the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The specific storage area may be, for example, an RWM access protection register. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The control storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS5 to AKS7 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The setting storage processing may be, for example, steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON. The storage value can be set in the specific storage area by, for example, executing step AKS14 in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON.
In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the contents stored in the storage means from being changed unnecessarily and to update the random number values appropriately.

The various forms described above are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be applied to slot machines, etc.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can execute variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body and
A game control means;
A variable means;
A display performance control means;
A performance control means;
a movable body control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action prompting performance is notified.
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of variable display before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control is performed using the second movable control pattern during the execution of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control ends before the start of the second part,
the display control means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display when the power is turned on,
the movable body control means is capable of starting the confirmation operation control after the start-up preparation display has started to be displayed,
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the movable body performance is restricted during the confirmation operation control to display the effect display,
The game control means is capable of performing a round game multiple times in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means is set to an easy-entry state in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
The game machine further includes an ending performance execution means for executing an ending performance after the final round of games is completed,
The movable body control means
If no power outage occurs during the execution of the ending performance, the movable body performance is not performed during the execution of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs during the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control ends before the execution period of the ending performance ends.
A gaming machine characterized by: